Burstner Nexxo Time 2015 Instruction Manual PDF

Instruction manual

T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

2014 Brstner GmbH Kehl

Instruction manualDear Reader ... We would like to congratulate you on the purchase of your new motorhome. You have selected a top-quality vehicle which will afford you many years of enjoyment. To enable you to always use and operate your motorhome properly and easily, your Brstner dealer will first provide you detailed instructions for all important functions when you take delivery. This manual, the instruction manuals from the base vehicle manufacturer as well as the instruction manuals from the appliance manufacturer will always be at hand to answer any questions you may have regarding your motorhome.

Before your first journey Please familiarise yourself with this manual rather than relying on it strictly for reference. Fill in the warranty cards for the appliances and special equipment in the individual instructions and send these cards to the respective manufacturers. This ensures your warranty claim for each appliance.

T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Instruction manual

3T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Contents

1 Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 1.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 1.2 Environmental tips. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

2 Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 2.1 Fire prevention . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 2.1.1 Avoidance of fire risks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 2.1.2 Fire-fighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 2.1.3 In case of fire. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 2.2 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 2.3 Road safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 2.4 Towing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 2.5 Gas system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 2.5.1 General instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 2.5.2 Gas bottles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 2.6 Electrical system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 2.7 Water system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

3 Before the journey . . . . . . . . . . . 17 3.1 Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 3.2 Registration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 3.3 Payload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 3.3.1 Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 3.3.2 Calculating the payload. . . . . . . . . . . . 20 3.3.3 Loading the vehicle correctly. . . . . . . . 21 3.3.4 Roof rail and ladder

(special equipment). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 3.3.5 Rear garage/rear storage space . . . . . 24 3.3.6 Bike rack (special equipment) . . . . . . . 25 3.3.7 Bike/e-bike bike rack

(special equipment). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 3.3.8 Removable load rack AL-KO

(special equipment). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 3.3.9 Load rack SAWIKO

(special equipment). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 3.4 Towing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 3.5 Caravan coupling

(special equipment). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 3.6 Electrically operated entrance step

(partially special equipment) . . . . . . . . 31 3.7 TV unit (special equipment) . . . . . . . . 33 3.8 Sink and drain basin covers . . . . . . . . 33 3.9 Securing add-on parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 3.10 Snow chains (special equipment) . . . . 34 3.11 Road safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

4 During the journey . . . . . . . . . . . 37 4.1 Chapter overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 4.2 Driving the motorhome . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 4.3 Reversing camera

(special equipment). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 4.4 Driving speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 4.5 Brakes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 4.6 Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 4.6.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 4.6.2 Fastening the seat belt correctly . . . . . 40 4.7 Child restraint systems . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

4.8 Pilot seats for the driver's and front passenger's seats. . . . . . . . . 41

4.9 Seat heater (special equipment) . . . . . 41 4.10 Headrests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 4.11 Seating arrangement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 4.12 Roman shade in the driver's cabin. . . . 43 4.12.1 Pleated Roman shades . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 4.12.2 Roman shades, Remis

(partially special equipment) . . . . . . . . 44 4.13 Refuelling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

5 Pitching the motorhome . . . . . . 45 5.1 Handbrake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 5.2 Entrance step. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 5.3 Ramps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 5.4 Wheel chocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 5.5 Supports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 5.5.1 General instructions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 5.5.2 Steady legs (SAWIKO)

(special equipment) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 5.5.3 Steady legs (AL-KO)

(special equipment) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 5.6 230 V connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 5.7 Refrigerator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 5.8 Satellite unit (special equipment) . . . . . 48 5.8.1 Equipment with automatic antenna

alignment (Alden). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 5.8.2 Equipment with automatic antenna

alignment (Oyster) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 5.9 Awning (special equipment). . . . . . . . . 50

6 Living . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 6.1 Central locking system

(special equipment) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 6.2 Conversion door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 6.2.1 Conversion door, outside

(Hartal M1). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 6.2.2 Conversion door, inside

(Hartal M1). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 6.2.3 Conversion door, outside

(Hartal Premium) (partially special equipment) . . . . . . . . 53

6.2.4 Conversion door, inside (Hartal Premium) (partially special equipment) . . . . . . . . 53

6.2.5 Conversion door, outside (Hartal) . . . . 54 6.2.6 Conversion door, inside (Hartal) . . . . . 54 6.2.7 Window of conversion door

(partially special equipment) . . . . . . . . 54 6.2.8 Folding insect screen

on the conversion door (partially special equipment) . . . . . . . . 55

6.3 External flaps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 6.3.1 Flap lock with recessed handle . . . . . . 56 6.3.2 Flap lock, square . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 6.3.3 Flap lock with push button . . . . . . . . . . 57

Contents

4 T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

6.3.4 Flap for the 230 V connection, square (Ixeo) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

6.3.5 Cap for the drinking water filler neck (Ixeo) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58

6.4 Furniture flaps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 6.4.1 Furniture flaps with push button. . . . . . 58 6.4.2 Furniture flaps with unlocking bar . . . . 59 6.4.3 Furniture flaps with handle

and push button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 6.4.4 Furniture flaps with handle

and unlocking bar. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 6.5 Light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 6.5.1 Entrance area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 6.5.2 Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 6.5.3 Recessed light with LED . . . . . . . . . . . 61 6.5.4 Wardrobe light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 6.6 Spotlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 6.7 Holder for flat screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 6.7.1 Holder on the column. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 6.7.2 Holder with jointed arm . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 6.7.3 Holder in the TV cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . 64 6.7.4 Holder with release lever . . . . . . . . . . . 64 6.7.5 Holder behind

wall-mounted cupboard . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 6.8 Ventilation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 6.9 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 6.9.1 Hinged window with rotary hinges . . . . 67 6.9.2 Hinged window with

automatic hinges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 6.9.3 Blind and insect screen . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 6.9.4 Roman shade and insect screen . . . . . 72 6.9.5 Roman shades for windscreen,

driver's window and front passenger's window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72

6.10 Skylights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 6.10.1 Skylight with snap latch . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 6.10.2 Heki skylight (mini and midi)

(partially special equipment) . . . . . . . . 76 6.10.3 Wind-up skylight

(special equipment) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 6.10.4 Omni-Vent skylight with fan

(special equipment) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 6.10.5 Skyroof skylight

(partially special equipment) . . . . . . . . 79 6.11 Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 6.11.1 Fixed table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 6.11.2 Suspension table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 6.11.3 Lift-off table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 6.12 Beds. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 6.12.1 Fixed bed (gas-pressure springs) . . . . 85 6.12.2 Fixed bed

(adjustable head section). . . . . . . . . . . 86 6.12.3 Fixed bed, electrically adjustable

(special equipment) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 6.12.4 Bunk bed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 6.12.5 Pull-down bed, manually operated

(lxeo) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88

6.12.6 Pull-down bed, electrically operated (special equipment, Ixeo) . . . . . . . . . . .89

6.12.7 Pull-down bed, electrically operated (Ixeo Time) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92

6.13 Converting seating groups for sleeping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95

6.13.1 Conversion of semi-dinette into guest bed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97

6.13.2 Conversion of L-seating group into guest bed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98

6.13.3 Conversion semi-dinette into transverse bed (with additional cushion table) . . . . . . .98

6.13.4 Conversion L-seating group into transverse bed (with additional cushion table) . . . . . . .99

6.13.5 Conversion semi-dinette into transverse bed (without additional cushion table) . . . . .99

6.13.6 Conversion L-seating group into transverse bed (without additional cushion table) . . . .100

6.13.7 Conversion semi-dinette into transverse bed (without bed widening) . . . . . . . . . . . .100

6.14 Shower connection point for external shower (special equipment) . . . . . . . .101

7 Gas system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103 7.1 General. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103 7.2 Gas bottles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104 7.3 Changing gas bottles . . . . . . . . . . . . .105 7.4 Gas isolator taps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106 7.5 External gas connection

(special equipment) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106 7.6 Crash protection unit switching facility

(special equipment) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107

8 Electrical system . . . . . . . . . . . .111 8.1 General safety instructions . . . . . . . . .111 8.2 Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112 8.3 USB socket. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113 8.4 12 V power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113 8.4.1 Selector switch for radio

(special equipment) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114 8.4.2 Starter battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114 8.4.3 Living area battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116 8.5 Transformer/rectifier (EBL 99) . . . . . .117 8.5.1 Battery cut-off switch . . . . . . . . . . . . .118 8.5.2 Battery selector switch . . . . . . . . . . . .118 8.5.3 Battery monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119 8.5.4 Charging the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119 8.6 Panel IT 96-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120 8.6.1 12 V main switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120 8.6.2 V/tank gauge for battery voltage

and water or waste water levels . . . . .120 8.6.3 Switch for water pump . . . . . . . . . . . .122

5T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Contents

8.6.4 Battery alarm for the living area battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122

8.6.5 12 V indicator lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 8.6.6 230 V indicator lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 8.7 Fuel cell (EFOY)

(special equipment). . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 8.8 Solar installation

(special equipment). . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 8.9 230 V power supply. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 8.9.1 230 V connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 8.9.2 Connecting the 230 V

power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 8.10 Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 8.10.1 12 V fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 8.10.2 230 V fuse. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 8.11 External socket

(special equipment). . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 8.12 Circuit diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 8.12.1 Circuit diagrams, interior . . . . . . . . . 136 8.12.2 Circuit diagram, exterior . . . . . . . . . . 138

9 Appliances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 9.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 9.2 Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 9.2.1 Models with waste gas vent on

the right-hand side of the vehicle . . . 140 9.2.2 To heat properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 9.2.3 Truma Combi hot-air heater . . . . . . . 141 9.2.4 Hot-air heater with CP plus

digital operating unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 9.2.5 Alde hot-water heater

(special equipment Nexxo) . . . . . . . . 146 9.2.6 Auxiliary heat exchanger

(partially special equipment) . . . . . . . 152 9.2.7 Electrical floor warming unit

(special equipment). . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 9.2.8 Independent vehicle heater

(special equipment). . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 9.3 Air conditioning unit

(special equipment). . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 9.3.1 Dometic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 9.3.2 Telair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 9.4 Boiler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 9.4.1 Models with waste gas vent on the

right-hand side of the vehicle . . . . . . 158 9.4.2 Truma Combi boiler. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 9.4.3 Truma boiler with operating unit

CP plus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 9.4.4 Alde boiler

(special equipment Nexxo) . . . . . . . . 163 9.5 Cooker. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164 9.5.1 Gas cooker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164 9.5.2 Gas oven (Dometic)

(special equipment). . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 9.5.3 Microwave oven

(special equipment). . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167

9.5.4 Extractor hood (special equipment) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168

9.6 Refrigerator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 9.6.1 Refrigerator ventilation grill . . . . . . . . 169 9.6.2 Operation (Dometic 8 series with

manual power selection MES) . . . . . . 170 9.6.3 Operation (Dometic RMD 8 series

with automatic power selection and frame heater) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172

9.6.4 Operation (Thetford with manual power selection). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175

9.6.5 Refrigerator door locking mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178

10 Sanitary fittings . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181 10.1 Water supply, general . . . . . . . . . . . . 181 10.2 Water system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182 10.2.1 Water tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182 10.2.2 Drinking water filler neck . . . . . . . . . . 182 10.2.3 Filling the water system . . . . . . . . . . . 183 10.2.4 Topping up the water . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 10.2.5 Closing/opening the overflow. . . . . . . 184 10.2.6 Draining water

(handle with overflow) . . . . . . . . . . . . 185 10.2.7 Emptying the water system . . . . . . . . 185 10.3 Waste water installation. . . . . . . . . . . 186 10.3.1 Draining waste water . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 10.3.2 Heater for waste water tank

and waste water pipes (special equipment) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187

10.3.3 Warming unit for waste water pipes (special equipment) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188

10.4 Toilet compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 10.5 Toilet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 10.5.1 Preparing toilet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 10.5.2 Swivel toilet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191 10.5.3 Toilet with fixed seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192 10.5.4 Toilet (Dometic) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192 10.5.5 Emptying the sewage tank. . . . . . . . . 193

11 Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195 11.1 External care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195 11.1.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195 11.1.2 Washing with

a high-pressure cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . 195 11.1.3 Washing the vehicle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196 11.1.4 Windows of acrylic glass . . . . . . . . . . 196 11.1.5 Underbody . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196 11.1.6 Entrance step. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 11.2 Interior care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 11.3 Water system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198 11.3.1 Cleaning the waste water tank. . . . . . 198 11.3.2 Cleaning the water tank . . . . . . . . . . . 198 11.3.3 Cleaning the water pipes . . . . . . . . . . 199 11.3.4 Disinfecting the water system . . . . . . 199 11.4 Extractor hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 11.5 Air conditioning unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200

Contents

6 T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

11.5.1 Dometic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 11.5.2 Telair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 11.6 Winter care. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201 11.6.1 Preparations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201 11.6.2 Winter operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201 11.6.3 At the end of the winter season . . . . . 201 11.7 Lay-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202 11.7.1 Temporary lay-up. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202 11.7.2 Winter lay-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203 11.7.3 Starting up the vehicle after

a temporary lay-up or after lay-up over winter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204

12 Maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205 12.1 Inspection work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205 12.2 Maintenance work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205 12.3 Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 12.4 Living area battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 12.5 Fuel cell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 12.5.1 Replacing the tank cartridge . . . . . . . 206 12.5.2 Refilling service fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 12.6 Alde hot-water heater. . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 12.6.1 Checking the fluid level . . . . . . . . . . . 208 12.6.2 Topping up heating fluid. . . . . . . . . . . 208 12.6.3 Bleeding the heating system . . . . . . . 208 12.7 Independent vehicle heater . . . . . . . . 209 12.8 Replacing bulbs, external. . . . . . . . . . 209 12.8.1 Front lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210 12.8.2 Rear lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210 12.8.3 Side lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210 12.8.4 Types of bulbs for exterior lighting . . . 211 12.9 Replacing bulbs, internal . . . . . . . . . . 211 12.9.1 Recessed light with LED . . . . . . . . . . 212 12.9.2 Spotlight (movable) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 12.9.3 Surface mounted light . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 12.10 Spare parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 12.11 Vehicle identification plate . . . . . . . . . 214 12.12 Warning and information stickers. . . . 214

13 Wheels and tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . 215 13.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215 13.2 Tyre selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216 13.3 Tyre specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 13.4 Handling of tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 13.5 Changing wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 13.5.1 General instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 13.5.2 Tightening torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218 13.5.3 Changing a wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220 13.6 Spare wheel support

(special equipment) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221 13.7 Tyre pressure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221

14 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . .223 14.1 Braking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223 14.2 Electrical system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223 14.3 Fuel cell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226 14.4 Gas system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226 14.5 Heater/boiler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226 14.5.1 Truma heater/boiler with

analogue operating unit . . . . . . . . . . .227 14.5.2 Truma heater/boiler with

CP plus digital operating unit . . . . . . .228 14.5.3 Alde heater/boiler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .230 14.6 Air conditioning unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231 14.6.1 Dometic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231 14.6.2 Telair. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231 14.7 Cooker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .232 14.7.1 Gas cooker/gas oven . . . . . . . . . . . . .232 14.7.2 Microwave oven . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .232 14.8 Refrigerator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .232 14.8.1 Dometic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233 14.8.2 Thetford . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .234 14.9 Water supply. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .235 14.10 Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .236

15 Special equipment . . . . . . . . . . .237 15.1 Weight details for

special equipment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .237

16 Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .241 16.1 View of ground plans . . . . . . . . . . . . .241 16.2 Table of linear measures . . . . . . . . . .248 16.3 Power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .249

17 Helpful notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .251 17.1 Traffic rules in foreign countries . . . . .251 17.2 Help on Europe's roads . . . . . . . . . . .251 17.3 Traffic rules for motorhomes. . . . . . . .254 17.4 Sleeping in the vehicle away from

camping areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .256 17.5 Gas supply in European countries . . .258 17.6 Toll regulations in

European countries . . . . . . . . . . . . . .259 17.7 Tips on staying overnight

safely during travel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .259 17.8 Tips for winter campers . . . . . . . . . . .259 17.9 Travel checklists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .260

18 Inspection plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . .263

7T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Introduction 1

1IntroductionPlease read this instruction manual completely before using the vehicle for the first time! Always keep this instruction manual in the vehicle. Also inform all other users of the safety regulations.

This instruction manual contains sections which describe model-spe- cific equipment or special equipment. These sections are specially marked. It may be that your vehicle has not been fitted with this special equipment. In some cases, the actual equipment of your vehicle may therefore be different from that shown in some illustrations and descrip- tions. However, your vehicle may be fitted with other special equipment not described in this instruction manual. Special equipment is described when an explanation is required. Adhere to the instruction manuals which are separately enclosed.

Should the vehicle be subjected to damage due to a failure to follow the instructions in this instruction manual, then the guarantee claim is deemed invalid. Our vehicles are subjected to continuous development. Please understand that we reserve the right to alter the form, equipment and technology. There- fore, no claims can be made against the manufacturer as a result of the con- tents of this instruction manual. The equipment which was known and included at the time of going to press is described. The reprinting, translation and copying, including extracts is not permitted without prior written authorisation from the manufacturer.

1.1 General The vehicle is constructed in accordance with the latest technology and the recognised safety regulations. Nevertheless, personal injury may result and the vehicle may be damaged if the safety instructions in this instruction manual are not followed.

The non-observance of this symbol can lead to personal injury.

The non-observance of this symbol can lead to damage being caused to, or inside the vehicle.

This symbol indicates recommendations or special aspects.

This symbol indicates actions which lead to environmental awareness.

The details "right", "left", "front" and "rear" always refer to the vehicle in direction of travel. All dimensions and weight details are "approximate".

8 T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Introduction1

Only use the vehicle in a technically impeccable condition. Follow the instruc- tions in the instruction manual. Malfunctions which impair the safety of persons or the vehicle should be immediately remedied by qualified personnel. To avoid further damages, observe the duty to avert, minimize or mitigate loss for the user during faults. Have the vehicle's braking and gas systems inspected and repaired by an authorised specialist workshop only. Alterations to the body are only to be carried out with the authorisation of the manufacturer. The vehicle is designed for the exclusive transport of persons. Luggage and accessories may only be transported up to the maximum permissible gross weight. Observe the test and inspection periods stipulated by the manufacturer.

1.2 Environmental tips Be considerate of the environment. Remember that: All kinds of waste water and household waste are not to be disposed of in drains or in the open countryside. On board, collect waste water only in the waste water tank or if necessary in other containers designed for that purpose. Only empty the waste water tank and toilet cassette or sewage tank at dis- posal stations at the camping or caravan sites, which are especially pro- vided for this purpose. When stopping in towns and communities, observe the instructions at caravan sites or ask where there are disposal stations. Empty waste water tank as often as possible, even when it is not com- pletely full (hygiene). If possible, flush out waste water tank and, if necessary, drainage pipe with fresh water every time it is emptied. Never allow the toilet cassette or sewage tank to become too full. Empty the toilet cassette or sewage tank frequently, at the latest as soon as the level indicator lights up. Separate household waste according to glass, tin cans, plastic and wet waste also when on a journey. Enquire at the town or community authority about disposal points. Household waste is not to be disposed of in waste paper baskets which are situated at car parks. Empty waste bins as often as possible into the containers provided for this purpose. This helps to avoid unpleasant smells and an accumulation of rubbish on board. When parked, do not allow the engine to run more than necessary. When running idle, a cold engine releases more contaminants than usual. The running temperature of the engine is achieved more quickly whilst the vehicle is in motion. Use an environmentally-friendly WC chemical agent for the WC which can also be biologically degraded and only use small doses. When staying in towns and communities for long periods, search for parking areas which are specially reserved for motorhomes. Enquire at the town or community authority about parking spaces. Always leave the parking places in a clean condition.

9T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Safety 2

2SafetyChapter overview This chapter contains important safety instructions. The safety instructions are for the protection of persons and property. The instructions address the following topics:

fire prevention and what to do in case of fire general care of the vehicle road safety of the vehicle towing gas system of the vehicle electrical system of the vehicle water system of the vehicle

2.1 Fire prevention 2.1.1 Avoidance of fire risks

2.1.2 Fire-fighting

2.1.3 In case of fire

Never leave children in the vehicle unattended. Keep flammable materials clear of heating and cooking appliances. Halogen lamps can get very hot. When the light is switched on, there must always be a safety distance of 30 cm between light and flammable objects. Fire hazard! Never use portable heating or cooking appliances. Only authorised qualified personnel may make changes to the electrical system, gas system or appliances.

Always carry a dry powder fire extinguisher in the vehicle. The fire extin- guisher must be approved, tested and close at hand. Have the fire extinguisher tested at regular intervals by authorised qual- ified personnel. Observe the date of testing. Depending on the equipment, the fire extinguisher is included in the scope of delivery. Always keep a fire blanket near the cooker.

Evacuate all passengers. Cut off the electrical power supply and disconnect from the mains. Close regulator tap on the gas bottle. Sound the alarm and call the fire brigade. Fight the fire if this is possible without risk.

Acquaint yourself with the position and operation of the emergency exits. Keep escape routes clear. Observe the fire extinguisher instructions for use.

10 T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Safety2

All windows and doors which meet the following requirements are considered as emergency exits:

Open to the outside or can be shifted in horizontal direction Opening angle at least 70 Minimum diameter of clearance = 450 mm Maximum distance from the vehicle floor = 950 mm

2.2 General

The oxygen in the vehicle interior is used up by breathing and the use of gas operated appliances. That is why the oxygen needs to be replaced on a constant basis. For this purpose, forced ventilation options (e.g. skylights with forced ventilation, mushroom-shaped vents or floor vents) are fitted to the vehicle. Never cover or block forced ventilations from the inside or outside with objects such as e.g. a winter mat. Keep forced ven- tilations clear of snow and leaves. There is a danger of suffocation due to increased CO2 levels.

Do not use storage compartments or rear garages as places for people or animals to stay or sleep in. These spaces are not forced-air ventilated. There is a danger of suffocation due to oxygen deprivation or exhaust from the heater. Observe the headroom of the doors.

As far as the fitted appliances (heater, cooker, refrigerator, etc.) and the base vehicle (engine, brakes, etc.) are concerned, the instruction manuals are authoritative. It is imperative that they be observed. Fitting accessories or special equipment can alter the dimensions, weight and road behaviour of the vehicle. Some of the parts must be entered in the vehicle papers. Only use wheel rims and tyres which are approved for the vehicle. Informa- tion concerning the size of the approved wheel rims and tyres is included in the vehicle documents or can be obtained from authorised dealers and service centres. Firmly apply the handbrake when parking the vehicle. If the maximum permissible gross weight of the vehicle exceeds 4 tonnes, wheel chocks must be used when parking on gradients. The wheel chocks are provided as standard for vehicles with a maximum permissible gross weight exceeding 4 tonnes.

When leaving the vehicle, it is imperative that all doors, external flaps and windows are closed. Carry a hazard warning triangle and a first-aid kit and/or flashing hazard warning light when this is required by law. The vehicle may only be driven by drivers who hold a driving licence which is valid for the respective vehicle class. When selling the vehicle, hand over all instruction manuals for the vehicle and the fitted appliances.

11T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Safety 2

2.3 Road safety

Before commencing the journey, carry out a functional check of indi- cating and lighting equipment, the steering and the brakes. If the vehicle has been stationary for a long period (approx. 10 months) have the braking and gas systems checked by an authorised specialist workshop. Before commencing the journey and after short interruptions of the journey, ensure that the entrance step is completely retracted. Before commencing the journey, secure the hinged pull-down bed. Before commencing the journey, open and secure the shades on the windscreen and on the driver's and front passenger's windows. Before commencing the journey, store the television securely. Before commencing the journey, place and secure the flat screen and screen support in the initial position. If the screen holder is installed in a TV cabinet: Close TV cabinet. Before commencing the journey, take off the loose sink and drain basin covers and store them securely in the kitchen unit or the wardrobe. Carefully store all moving parts and all loose objects before starting your journey. Before commencing the journey, fix adjustable tables. Before commencing the journey, rotate all swivel seats in the direction of travel and lock in position. During the journey, the swivel seats must remain locked in place in the direction of travel. During the journey, persons are only to sit on the permitted seats (see chapter 4). The authorised number of seats is stipulated in the vehicle documents. Seat belts must be worn by all passengers. Fasten your seat belts before the beginning of the journey and keep them fastened during the journey. Always secure children with the children safety equipment prescribed for the respective height and weight. Factory-set three-point safety belts must be used when attaching child restraint systems. The base vehicle is a commercial vehicle (small truck). Adjust your driving technique accordingly. In case of underpasses, tunnels or similar obstacles, note the total height of the vehicle (including the roof load). In winter, the roof must be free of snow and ice before commencing the journey. Check tyre pressure before a journey or every 2 weeks. Wrong tyre pressure causes excessive wear and can lead to damage or even to tyre burst. You can lose control of the vehicle. Do not operate the heater at petrol stations. Danger of explosion! Do not operate the heater in closed spaces. Danger of suffocation!

12 T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Safety2

2.4 Towing

2.5 Gas system 2.5.1 General instructions

Before commencing the journey, distribute the payload evenly within the vehicle (see chapter 3). When loading the vehicle and when taking a rest from driving, in order to load luggage or food, for example, observe the maximum permissible gross weight and axle loads (refer to vehicle documents). Before commencing the journey, ensure that all cupboard doors, the toilet compartment door and all drawers and flaps are secure. Engage the refrig- erator door securing device. Before commencing the journey, close windows and skylights. Before commencing the journey, close all external flaps and lock them. Before commencing the journey, remove the external supports and retract the corner steadies or steady legs, which are fitted to the vehicle. Before commencing the journey, put the antenna in park position. During the initial journey and each time after changing a wheel, re-tighten the wheel bolts/wheel nuts after 50 km (30 miles). Subsequently inspect them at regular intervals in order to ensure that they are firmly seated. See chapter 13 for tightening torque. Tyres may not be older than 6 years as the material becomes brittle over time (see chapter 13). When using snow chains, the tyres, wheel suspension and steering are subjected to an additional load. When using snow chains, drive slowly (maximum speed 50 km/h) and only on streets which are completely cov- ered with snow. Otherwise the vehicle could be damaged.

Care is to be taken when connecting and detaching a trailer. Risk of acci- dent and injury! No persons are to be between the towing vehicle and the trailer during positioning for connecting and detaching.

Before commencing the journey, when leaving the vehicle or when gas equipment is not in use, close all gas isolator taps and the main isolator tap on the gas bottle. All gas-operated devices (heater, cooker, oven, grill, refrigerator - depending on the equipment) must be switched off for refuelling, on fer- ries or in the garage. Danger of explosion! Do not use gas-operated devices in closed spaces (e.g. garages). Danger of poisoning and suffocation! Only have the gas system maintained, repaired or altered by an author- ised specialist workshop. Have the gas system checked by an authorised specialist workshop according to the national regulations before commissioning. This also applies for not registered vehicles. For modifications to the gas system have the gas system immediately checked by an authorised specialist workshop.

13T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Safety 2

The gas pressure regulator and exhaust gas pipes must also be inspected. The gas pressure regulator has to be replaced after 10 years at the latest. The vehicle owner is responsible for seeing that this is car- ried out. In case of a defect of the gas system (gas odour, high gas consumption) there is danger of explosion! Close regulator tap on the gas bottle imme- diately. Open doors and windows and ventilate well. If the gas system is defective: Do not smoke; do not ignite any open flames, and do not operate electric switches (light switches etc.). Only the stipulated devices may be connected to internal connections. Do not operate any device outside the vehicle if it is connected to an internal connector. Before using the cooker make sure that there is sufficient ventilation. Open windows or the skylight. Do not use the gas cooker or gas oven for heating purposes. If there are several gas devices, each gas device must have its own gas isolator tap. If individual gas devices are not in use, close the respective gas isolator tap. Ignition safety valves must close within 1 minute after the gas flame has extinguished. A clicking sound is audible. Check function from time to time. The built-in gas devices are exclusively meant for use with propane or butane gas or a mixture of both. The gas pressure regulator as well as all built-in gas devices are designed for a gas pressure of 30 mbar. Propane gas is capable of gasification up to -42 C, whereas butane gas gasifies at 0 C. Below these temperatures no gas pressure is available. Butane gas is unsuitable for use in winter. Regularly inspect the gas tube fitted to the gas bottle connection for tightness. The gas tube must not have any tears and must not be porous. Have the gas tube replaced by an authorised specialist work- shop no later than ten years after the manufacturing date. The operator of the gas system must see to it that the parts are replaced. Due to its function and construction, the gas bottle compartment is a space which is open to the exterior. Never cover or block up the standard forced ventilations. Otherwise gas that is emitted can not be diverted to the outside. The gas bottle compartment must not be used as storage space. Secure the gas bottle compartment against unauthorised access. To do this, lock the compartment. The regulator tap on the gas bottle must be accessible. Only connect gas-operated devices (e.g. gas grill) which have been designed for a gas pressure of 30 mbar. The exhaust gas pipe must be fitted tightly to the heating system and to the vent and must be sealed. The exhaust gas pipe must not show any evidence of damage. Exhaust fumes must be able to escape into the atmosphere unhindered and fresh air must be able to enter unhindered. For this reason, keep the exhaust pipe and intake openings clean and unobstructed (e.g. free from snow and ice). For this reason, no snow walls or aprons may lie against the vehicle.

14 T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Safety2

2.5.2 Gas bottles

2.6 Electrical system

Gas bottles are only to be transported within the designated gas bottle compartment. Place the gas bottles in vertical position in the gas bottle compartment. Fasten the gas bottles so that they are unable to turn or tilt. Connect the gas tube to the gas bottle without tension. If the gas bottles are not connected to the gas tube, always place the protective cap on top. Close the regulator tap on the gas bottle before the gas pressure regu- lator or gas tube are removed from the gas bottle. Use your hands only to connect the gas pressure regulator or the gas tube to the gas bottles. Do not use any tools. Only use special gas pressure regulators with a safety valve designed for vehicle use. Other gas pressure regulators are not permitted and cannot meet the demanding requirements. Use the gas pressure regulator defroster if the temperature falls below 5 C. Use only 11 kg or 5 kg gas bottles. Camping gas bottles with built-in check valve (blue bottle with max. 2.5 or 3 kg content) are can be used in exceptional cases with a safety valve. Use the shortest possible tube lengths (150 cm max.) for external gas bottles. Never block the floor ventilation openings below the gas bottles.

Only allow qualified personnel to work on the electrical system. Prior to carrying out work on the electrical system, switch off all devices and lights, disconnect the battery and disconnect the vehicle from the mains. Only use original fuses with the stipulated values. Only replace defective fuses when the cause of the defect is known and has been remedied. Never bridge or repair fuses.

15T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Safety 2

2.7 Water system

Water left standing in the water tank or in the water pipes becomes undrinkable after a short period. Therefore, before each use of the vehicle, thoroughly clean the water pipes and the water tank. After each use of the vehicle completely empty the water tank and the water pipes. In the case of lay-ups lasting more than a week disinfect the water system before using the vehicle (see chapter 11).

If the vehicle is not used for several days or if it is not heated when there is a risk of frost, empty the entire water system. Make certain that the water pump is switched off on the panel. Otherwise, the water pump will overheat and may get damaged. Leave the water taps on in central position. Leave the safety/drainage valve (if there is one) and all drain cocks open. Frost damage to appliances, frost damage to the vehicle and deposits in water- carrying components can be avoided in this way.

16 T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Safety2

17T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Before the journey 3

3Before the journeyChapter overview This chapter contains important information which has to be noted before com- mencing your journey or carrying out any tasks before the journey. The instructions address the following topics:

keys registration calculating the payload correct loading of the vehicle and bike rack load rack towing retracting and extending the entrance step storing the television storing the sink cover securing add-on parts using snow chains

At the end of the chapter there is a checklist which once again summarises the most important points.

3.1 Keys The following keys are included with your vehicle: Two keys for

ignition lock driver's and passenger's doors fuel tank

Two keys for

conversion door of the body drinking water filler neck external flaps

Always deposit a replacement key outside the vehicle. Make a note of the key number. Our authorised dealers and workshops can offer assistance in case of loss.

3.2 Registration Your motorhome is a vehicle which must be registered. Observe national reg- ulations on registration. Please remember that certain countries require a separate national code sticker in addition to the EU plate.

18 T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Before the journey3

3.3 Payload

On loading, make sure that the payload's centre of gravity is as low as possible (directly above the floor of the vehicle). Otherwise this may affect the driving characteristics of the vehicle.

3.3.1 Terms

Maximum permissible gross weight in a laden

condition

The maximum permissible gross weight in a laden condition is the weight that a vehicle may never exceed. The maximum permissible overall weight in laden condition consists of the mass in ready-to-drive condition and of the payload. In the vehicle documents, the manufacturer has specified the maximum per- missible gross weight in a laden condition.

Permitted mass The permitted mass is the weight specified by the manufacturer for issuing the type approval. The permitted mass must never exceed the maximum permis- sible gross weight of the loaded vehicle.

Overloading the vehicle and wrong tyre pressure can cause tyres to burst. You can lose control of the vehicle. Only the maximum permissible gross weight and the mass in a ready-to- drive condition, not the actual weight of the vehicle, is stated in the vehicle documents. For your own safety, we recommend that you have your loaded vehicle (with all passengers, luggage and personal objects) weighed on a public weighbridge before you set out on your journey. Adapt the speed to the payload. The stopping distance is increased if the payload is high.

Do not exceed the maximum permissible gross weight stated in the vehicle documents by the payload. Built-in accessories and special equipment reduce the payload. Adhere to the axle load stated in the vehicle documents.

Description Load (kg)

Maximum permitted payloads

Pull-down bed 200

Bunk bed 100

Roof load 200

Rear garage and rear storage space 200

Bike rack Double 60

Triple 60

E-bike bike rack Double 100

Load rack (AL-KO) 150

Load rack (SAWIKO) 130

Technically speaking, the term "mass" has now replaced the term "weight". However, "weight" is still the term more frequent in common use. For better understanding, "mass" is therefore only used in the following sections for fixed formulations. All specifications according to EU norm DIN EN 1646-2.

19T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Before the journey 3

Mass in ready-to-drive condition

The mass in ready-to-drive condition is the weight of the ready-to-drive standard vehicle. The mass in ready-to-drive condition is made up as follows:

Unladen weight (mass of the empty vehicle) with factory-installed standard equipment Driver's weight Basic equipment weight

Unladen weight includes lubricants such as oils and coolants which have been filled, the on-board tool set, the spare wheel and a fuel tank which has been filled up to 90 %. 75 kg are calculated for the weight of the driver, regardless of how much the driver really weighs. Basic equipment includes all equipment and fluids required for safe and proper vehicle use. The weight of the basic equipment includes:

Water system filled up to 90 % (water tank and pipes) Gas bottles filled up to 90 % A full heating system The power cables for the 230 V power supply A full toilet flushing system The installation kit for an auxiliary battery if an auxiliary battery can be used

The waste water and sewage tanks are empty.

In the vehicle documents, the manufacturer specifies the mass in ready-to- drive conditions.

Payload The payload is made up as follows:

Conventional load Additional equipment Personal equipment

You will find explanations on the individual components of the payload in the following text.

Conventional load The conventional load is the weight specified by the manufacturer for the pas- sengers. Conventional load means: 75 kg are calculated for every seat specified by the manufacturer, regardless of how much the passengers actually weigh. The driver's seat is already included as part of the mass in ready-to-drive condition and must not be calculated as part of the conventional load. In the vehicle documents, the manufacturer specifies the number of seats.

Example for calculating the basic equipment

Water tank with 60 l (overflow open) 60 kg

Gas bottle (11 kg gas + 5.5 kg bottle) + 16.5 kg

Boiler with 12 l + 12 kg

230 V power cable + 4 kg

Installation kit for auxiliary battery + 20 kg

Total = 112.5 kg

The vehicle's payload can be increased by reducing the weight in a ready- to-drive condition. To do this, it is allowed for example to empty the fluid containers or to remove the gas bottles.

20 T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Before the journey3

Additional equipment Additional equipment includes accessories and special equipment. Examples of additional equipment include:

Caravan coupling Roof rail Awning Bike or motorcycle rack Satellite unit Microwave oven

Chapter 15 lists the weights of the various items of special equipment; they may also be obtained from the manufacturer.

Personal equipment Personal equipment includes all items in the vehicle that are not included in the conventional load or in the additional equipment. For example, personal equipment can include the following:

Foodstuffs Crockery Television Radio Clothes Bedding Toys Books Toiletries

No matter where kept, personal equipment also includes:

Animals Bikes Boats Surfboards Sports equipment

For the personal equipment, according to the applicable regulations, the man- ufacturer must use a minimum weight that is determined according to the fol- lowing formula:

Formula Minimum weight M (kg) = 10 x N + 10 x L

Explanation N = maximum number of people including the driver, as stated by the manu- facturer L = total length of the vehicle in metres

3.3.2 Calculating the payload

The payload calculation at the factory is partly based on all-inclusive weights. For safety reasons, the maximum permissible gross weight in a laden condition must not be exceeded. Only the maximum permissible gross weight and the mass in a ready-to- drive condition, not the actual weight of the vehicle, is stated in the vehicle documents. For your own safety, we recommend that you have your loaded vehicle (with all passengers, luggage and personal objects) weighed on a public weighbridge before you set out on your journey.

21T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Before the journey 3

The payload (see section 3.3.1) is the difference in weight between

Maximum permissible gross weight in a laden condition and Vehicle mass complete in a ready-to-drive condition.

The calculation of the payload from the difference between the maximum per- missible gross weight in laden condition and the mass specified by the manu- facturer in ready-to-drive condition is however only a theoretical value. Only if the vehicle is weighed with full tanks (fuel and water), full gas bottles and complete additional equipment on a public weighbridge, can the actual payload be determined. To do this, proceed as follows:

First only drive the vehicle on to the weighbridge with the front wheels and have it weighed. Then drive the vehicle on to the weighbridge with the back wheels and have it weighed.

The individual values give the current axle loads. These are important for the correct loading of the vehicle (see section 3.3.3). The sum of these values is the current weight of the vehicle. The actual payload is the difference between the maximum permissible gross weight in laden condition and the weighed vehicle weight. This can be used to determine the weight that remains for the personal equip- ment:

Determine the weight of the passengers and subtract it from the value for the actual payload.

The result is the weight that is permitted for the actual load of the personal equipment.

3.3.3 Loading the vehicle correctly

Mass in kg to be calculated

Calculation

Example for calculating the payload

Maximum permissible gross weight ac- cording to vehicle documents

3500

Vehicle mass in a ready-to-drive condi- tion, including basic equipment according to vehicle documents

- 3070

This results in a permissible payload of

430

Conventional load e.g.: 3 persons each weighing 75 kg

- 225

Additional equipment - 40

For the personal equipment this re- sults in

= 165

For safety reasons, never exceed the maximum permissible gross weight in a laden condition. Distribute the load evenly on the left and right sides of the vehicle.

22 T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Before the journey3

Large storage spaces, such as the rear garage, also have room for heavy objects (e.g. motorcycle). This might mean that the axle load on the rear axle is exceeded. However, the individual axles may not be overloaded under any circum- stances. That is why it is important, at which distance to the axles the load is stored. To distribute the load correctly, you will need a scale, a tape measure, a cal- culator and some time. Two simple formulas are needed to calculate the effect of the weight of the load on the axles:

Formulas A x G : R = weight on the rear axle Weight on the rear axle G = weight on the front axle

Explanation A = distance between storage compartment and front axle in cm G = weight of the load in the storage compartment in kg R = wheelbase of the vehicle (distance between axles) in cm

Calculating axle loads: Multiply the distance between storage compartment and front axle (A) with the weight of the load in the storage compartment (G) and divide the result by the wheelbase (R). The result is the weight of the load in the storage compartment on the rear axle. Make a note of this weight and of the storage compartment. In a second step, subtract the weight in the storage compartment (G) from the weight calculated beforehand. If the result is a positive value (example 1), this means that the load on the front axle is reduced by this value. If the result is a negative value (example 2), this means that the load on the front axle is increased. Make a note of this value, too. Calculate all storage compartments of the vehicle in the same way. In a last step, add all weights calculated for the rear axle to the rear axle load and add (or subtract) all weights calculated for the front axle to (from) the front axle load. How to determine rear axle load and front axle load is described in section 3.3.2.

Distribute the load evenly on both axles. In doing so, observe the axle loads specified in the vehicle documents. Observe the permissible load- carrying capacity of the tyres (see chapter 13). Heavy loads behind the rear axle can reduce the load on the front axle due to the leverage effect ( ). This applies especially to long rear extensions, if a motorbike is transported on the rear carrier or if there is a heavy load in the rear storage space. The release of the front axle neg- atively affects the driving quality, especially for front-driven vehicles. Store all objects in such a way that they cannot slip. Store heavy objects (awning, tin cans, etc.) close to the axles. Low-lying storage compartments whose doors do not open in the direction of travel are particularly suited for storing heavy objects. Stack light objects (laundry) in the roof storage cabinets. Load the bike rack with bicycles only (max. three units).

Measure the external distances horizontally from the centre of the front wheel to the centre of the storage compartment or to the centre of the back wheel.

23T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Before the journey 3

If the calculated value exceeds the permissible axle load, the load must be dis- tributed in a different way. If the load on the front axle is too low, the grip of the tyres on the road is reduced (traction). This applies in particular to vehicles with front wheel drive. In this case, the load must be redistributed, too.

3.3.4 Roof rail and ladder (special equipment)

Example 1 Example 2

Example calculation Distance to the front axle A (A1) 450 (cm) (A2) 250 (cm)

Weight in the storage compartment G x 100 (kg) x 50 (kg)

Wheelbase of the vehicle R 325 (cm) 325 (cm)

Load on the rear axle (add to the axle load)

138.5 (kg) 38.5 (kg)

Weight in the storage compartment - 100 (kg) - 50 (kg)

Load relief to the front axle (subtract from the axle load)

38.5 (kg)

Load on the front axle (add to the axle load)

-11.5 (kg)

Access the roof only when a roof rail has been fitted. Only climb onto the roof via a ladder. Take care when stepping onto the ladder. There is danger of slipping when the ladder is moist or icy. Take care when stepping onto the roof. There is danger of slipping when the roof is moist or icy. Do not overload the roof. Road behaviour and brake reaction deteriorate as the roof load increases.

If the vehicle is equipped with a roof rail, load racks can be mounted on the roof rail for roof loads (e.g. for surfboards, rubber boats or light canoes). Special girder systems are available as accessory. The authorised dealer or service centre will be happy to advise you. The maximum permissible roof load is 200 kg.

The maximum localised load is 90 kg/100 cm2. Before stepping on to the roof, extensively cover the area you will be treading on. Materials with a smooth or soft surface are suitable, for example, a thick polystyrene panel. Secure roof loads with tension belts. Do not use rubber expanders. Observe the overall height of the vehicle when the roof rack is loaded.

The driver's cabin should have a clearly visible notice stating the overall height. This eliminates the need for calculations at bridges and thorough- fares.

24 T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Before the journey3

Climbing on to the roof (foldable ladder):

Open the strap (Fig. 1,1) on the ladder (Fig. 1,3) at the rear of the vehicle. Fold out the guard rail (Fig. 1,2). Extend the ladder downward. Place guard rail with the rubber knobs (Fig. 2,1) up against the back panel of the vehicle. Carefully climb the ladder.

Climbing on to the roof (telescopic ladder):

Carefully place the telescopic ladder (special equipment) against the side of the vehicle. Carefully climb the ladder.

3.3.5 Rear garage/rear storage space

Fig. 1 Foldable ladder, ladder folded upwards

Fig. 2 Foldable ladder, ladder folded downwards

Do not use storage compartments or rear garages as places for people or animals to stay or sleep in. These spaces are not forced-air ventilated. There is a danger of suffocation due to oxygen deprivation or exhaust from the heater. Observe the permissible axle loads and maximum permissible gross weight when loading the rear garage/the rear storage space. The maximum permitted load of the rear garage/the rear storage space is 200 kg. Do not exceed the permissible rear axle load. Observe: If the rear garage or (depending on the model) the rear storage space is loaded to its maximum capacity, this will reduce the load on the front axle due to the levering action. The driving quality is impaired.

Depending on the vehicle equipment, clamping rails with clamping eyelets are mounted in the rear garage or in the rear storage space. Always secure loads onto the clamping eyelets. Always use tightening straps or lashing nets for securing the load, never rubber expanders. When clamping loads, always check that the clamping eyelets are placed tightly in the clamping rails. If the clamping eyelet is not anchored tightly in the clamping rail, the load may slide or loosen during forcible movements of the steering wheel or when braking. Distribute the load evenly. Excessive spot loads can lead to damages of the floor covering. Use the supporting system offered by your dealer if two-wheelers are trans- ported in the rear garage.

25T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Before the journey 3

3.3.6 Bike rack (special equipment)

Loading the bike rack with bicycles

When loading the bike rack, observe the centre of gravity. The centre of gravity of the bicycles must be as close as possible to the rear wall of the vehicle. The bike rack should always be loaded from the inside to the outside. Loading the bike rack correctly:

Depending on the model, fold the bike rack down or pull it out. Place the heaviest bicycle directly against the rear wall. Place the lightest bicycles in the centre or on the outside of the bike rack. Secure the front and rear wheels of each bicycle with the retaining straps on the bike rack. In addition, fasten the outermost bicycle depending on the model of the bike rack on the retaining clip or the retaining bracket and to the spacer respectively.

If the bike rack is only loaded with one bicycle, position the bicycle as closely as possible to the rear wall.

Observe the permissible axle loads and maximum permissible gross weight when loading the bike rack. Bicycles may protrude at the side by a maximum of 40 cm, measured from the outer edge of the tail lights. However, a total width of 2.5 m must not be exceeded. Adjust the attachments for the bikes accordingly. The lateral overhang must be marked with a red flag. Load the bike rack with bicycles only (max. three units). Fasten bicycles using the straps provided and check to see that they are secure after you have driven a few kilometres. Check the secure attachment of the bicycles on the bike rack after the first 10 km and then at each break in the journey. Do not use the bike rack as luggage rack or ladder.

The bike rack is only to be used for transporting bicycles. The gross weight specified by the manufacturer must not be exceeded. The identification plate and rear lights must not be covered. The maximum permissible payload of the bike rack is 60 kg. When loading the bike rack, observe the centre of gravity. If the bike rack is only loaded with one bicycle, position the bicycle as closely as possible to the vehicle wall. Driving with a folded out bike rack without bicycles is not permitted. Before every journey, check: Is the bike rack without bicycles folded in correctly? Are the bicycles securely fastened to the bike rack using the bike rack belts?

26 T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Before the journey3

Bike rack, lowerable

The bike rack (Fig. 3) permits to easily transport 2 bicycles. Expansion for 3 bicycles is possible. A winding system may be used to lift and lower the bike rack approx. 40 cm. The winding system brings the bicycles to gripping height within seconds.

Loading the bicycles: Attach the manual crank to the bicycle rack and lower the bike rack to grip- ping height. Place the bicycles on top and secure them with quick straps. Fasten the bike-block spacer to the frame of the outermost bicycle. Use the manual crank to lift the bicycles back up.

Bike rack, not lowerable

The bike rack (Fig. 4,2) permits to easily transport 2 bicycles. Expansion for 3 bicycles is possible.

Loading the bicycles: Fold the telescopic swivel clip (Fig. 4,4) down. Place the bicycles on top and secure them with quick straps (Fig. 4,3). Fasten the spacer (Fig. 4,1) to the frame of the outermost bicycle.

Also read the manufacturer's instruction manual.

Fig. 3 Bike rack, lowerable

Also read the manufacturer's instruction manual.

Fig. 4 Bike rack, not lowerable

27T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Before the journey 3

3.3.7 Bike/e-bike bike rack (special equipment)

Loading the bike rack with bicycles

When loading the bike rack, observe the centre of gravity. The centre of gravity of the bicycles must be as close as possible to the rear wall of the vehicle. The bike rack should always be loaded from the inside to the outside. Loading the bike rack correctly:

Place the heaviest bicycle directly against the rear wall. Position the lighter bicycle on the outside of the bike rack. Secure the front and rear wheels of each bicycle with the retaining straps on the bike rack. Fix every bicycle to the retaining arm.

If the bike rack is only loaded with one bicycle, position the bicycle as closely as possible to the rear wall.

Observe the permissible axle loads and maximum permissible gross weight when loading the bike rack. Bicycles may protrude at the side by a maximum of 40 cm, measured from the outer edge of the tail lights. However, a total width of 2.5 m must not be exceeded. Adjust the attachments for the bikes accordingly. The lateral overhang must be marked with a red flag. Lock bike rack in drive position before starting your journey. Fasten bicycles using the straps provided and check to see that they are secure after you have driven a few kilometres. Check the secure attachment of the bicycles on the bike rack after the first 10 km and then at each break in the journey. Do not use the bike rack as luggage rack or ladder.

The bike rack is designed only to carry bicycles and electrically assisted bicycles (e-bikes, pedelecs). The gross weight specified by the manufacturer must not be exceeded. The identification plate and rear lights must not be covered. The maximum permissible payload of the bike rack is 100 kg. When loading the bike rack, observe the centre of gravity. If the bike rack is only loaded with one bicycle, position the bicycle as closely as possible to the vehicle wall. Before fixing bicycles, check that the retaining arms and the wheel-holders of the bike rack are in the correct position. If necessary, adjust the retaining arm or wheel-holder to fit the bicycle. Driving with a folded out bike rack without bicycles is not permitted. Before every journey, check: Is the bike rack without bicycles folded in correctly? Are the bicycles securely fastened to the bike rack using the bike rack belts? If the bicycle rack is equipped with a charging unit: Are the charging cables securely fastened? Otherwise, charging cables can tear off.

28 T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Before the journey3

Loosen the strap and fold the e-bike bike rack (Fig. 5,2) down. Lift the first e-bike onto the bike rack and place it on the wheel-holders (with the front wheel pointing left). Swing out the shorter retaining arm (Fig. 5,1) and secure the e-bike's front frame tube (Fig. 6,1) with straps. Using the straps, fix both wheels to the wheel-holders. Lift the second e-bike onto the bike rack and place it on the wheel-holders (with the front wheel pointing right). Swing out the longer retaining arm (Fig. 5,1) and secure the e-bike's front frame tube (Fig. 6,1) with straps. Using the straps, fix both wheels to the wheel-holders. If necessary, place third e-bike on the wheel-holders and secure it. Check that all bicycles are securely fastened.

3.3.8 Removable load rack AL-KO (special equipment)

Fig. 5 E-bike bike rack Fig. 6 Positioning of e-bikes

Do not exceed the rear axle load. Heavy loads behind the rear axle can reduce the load on the front axle due to the leverage effect ( ). This applies especially to long rear extensions, if a motorbike is transported on the rear carrier or if there is a heavy load in the rear storage space. The release of the front axle neg- atively affects the driving quality, especially for front-driven vehicles. Always make sure to store the load roadworthy and secure it against falling. The load may not jut out beyond the maximum width of the vehicle. The lighting and the official licence plate on the load rack may not be covered by the load. Always mount or dismount the load rack with 2 persons. Only mount the unloaded load rack.

The load rack and caravan coupling may not be used simultaneously.

The load rack has a EG type approval number. Have your dealer or service centre install the load rack. Observe the country-specific regulations. Also read the manufacturer's instruction manual.

29T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Before the journey 3

The load rack permits transport of a load (e.g. a motorcycle or a motor scooter) weighing up to 150 kg. Always remove the load rack after use.

Installation: Apply the handbrake. Insert the spars in the holders on the left and right side of the frame and push them in completely. Close the clamping levers. To do so, press and rotate the clamping levers. Close the clamp fasteners on the support tubes. On the left and the right side, put a clamping lever through the holes in the holders and in the spars, and secure them with cotter pins. Connect the electrics between the load rack and the vehicle. Check the fixing of the load rack on the vehicle and the functioning of the lamps.

Removal: Apply the handbrake. Disconnect the electrics between the load rack and the vehicle. On the left and the right side, remove the cotter pin from the clamping lever and pull clamping lever out off the holder. Open the clamp fasteners on the support tubes. Open the clamping levers. To do so, press and rotate the clamping levers. Remove the spars from the holders on the frame.

Requirement for mounting

If the load rack is to be mounted, two galvanised tube mounts must be attached to the left and right side of the vehicle frame. They are designed to hold the load rack.

3.3.9 Load rack SAWIKO (special equipment)

Do not exceed the rear axle load. Heavy loads behind the rear axle can reduce the load on the front axle due to the leverage effect ( ). This applies especially to long rear extensions, if a motorbike is transported on the rear carrier or if there is a heavy load in the rear storage space. The release of the front axle neg- atively affects the driving quality, especially for front-driven vehicles. Always make sure to store the load roadworthy and secure it against falling. The load may not jut out beyond the maximum width of the vehicle. The lighting and the official licence plate on the load rack may not be covered by the load.

The load rack and caravan coupling may not be used simultaneously.

An entry must be made in the vehicle documents in order to attach a load rack. The required documents are enclosed with the load rack. Have your dealer or service centre install the load rack. Observe the country-specific regulations. Also read the manufacturer's instruction manual.

30 T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Before the journey3

The load rack permits transport of a load weighing up to 130 kg. For the trans- port of the load different attachments are available. They are e.g. bike rack or a transport box. Our authorised dealers and service centres will be happy to advise you.

The load rack (Fig. 7) permits transport of a motorcycle or a motor scooter weighing up to 130 kg.

Scope of delivery The following parts belong to the scope of delivery:

Rack trough (Fig. 7,3) and retaining clip (Fig. 7,1) with attachment to vehicle (Fig. 8) Rear lights (Fig. 7,4) Vehicle licence plate light (Fig. 7,5) 13-pole Jger System plug Ramp (Fig. 7,2)

Attachment to vehicle The two side members (Fig. 8,1) of the load rack are fixed to the floor of the vehicle by means of tommy screws (Fig. 8,2) on the square drives (Fig. 8,4). The load rack is secured by a bolt (Fig. 8,3) with locking ring.

Entry in the vehicle documents

Have your dealer or service centre install the add-on parts. They will also take care of all the formalities for you.

3.4 Towing

Depending on the model, different nose weights may apply for the caravan couplings. Refer to the following table for the respective permissible nose weight.

Fig. 7 Load rack Fig. 8 Attachment to vehicle

Care is to be taken when connecting and detaching a trailer. Risk of acci- dent and injury! No persons are to be between the towing vehicle and the trailer during positioning for connecting and detaching. Observe the permissible nose weight and rear axle load of the motorhome. Refer to the vehicle documents for the rear axle load.

Trailer with an overrun brake: Do not connect or detach trailer with the overrun brake on. Caravan coupling with detachable ball neck: If the ball neck is mounted incorrectly, there is the danger of the trailer breaking away. Observe the instruction manual for the caravan coupling.

31T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Before the journey 3

3.5 Caravan coupling (special equipment)

Entry in the vehicle documents

Have your dealer or service centre install the add-on parts. They will also take care of all the formalities for you.

3.6 Electrically operated entrance step (partially special equipment)

Model Permissible nose weight

SAWIKO MT019 75 kg

SAWIKO (other) 100 kg

Linnepe 100 kg

AL-KO 80 kg

When mounting a caravan coupling, see the vehicle documents for infor- mation on maximum nose weight and caravan load. Retighten the caravan coupling fixing screws after 1000 operating hours.

The load rack and caravan coupling may not be used simultaneously.

An entry must be made in the vehicle documents in order to attach a car- avan coupling. The required documents are enclosed with the caravan coupling. Also read the manufacturer's instruction manual.

Fig. 9 Caravan coupling, rigid Fig. 10 Caravan coupling, detachable

Before commencing the journey and after short interruptions of the journey, ensure that the entrance step is completely retracted. Do not stand in the direct range of the entrance step while it is being retracted or extended. Do not step on the entrance step until it has extended completely. There is a risk of injury. Do not under any circumstances raise or lower persons or loads with the entrance step.

32 T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Before the journey3

The vehicles have a one-step, electrically extendable entrance step (Fig. 11,1).

Before stepping on the entrance step, fully extend it (Fig. 12).

Extending: Press the rocker button (Fig. 13,1) down and hold it pressed (at least 3 seconds) until the entrance step has extended completely.

Retracting: Press the rocker button (Fig. 13,1) up until the entrance step has retracted completely.

Take note of the different step heights and make certain that the ground is firm and even when exiting. Do not grease or lubricate the pivot bearing and joints of the entrance step (see chapter 11).

The button to operate the entrance step is located on the inside of the vehicle in the area of the conversion door. If the entrance step is not retracted and locked in place correctly, a red indi- cator lamp lights up on the dashboard when the ignition is switched on. Follow the warning notice on the entrance step.

Fig. 11 Entrance step

Fig. 12 Warning notice for entrance step

Fig. 13 Operating button for entrance step

33T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Before the journey 3

When the ignition is switched on and the entrance step is extended, an indi- cator lamp (Fig. 14,1) is illuminated on the dashboard.

3.7 TV unit (special equipment)

3.8 Sink and drain basin covers

3.9 Securing add-on parts

Fig. 14 Indicator lamp

Before commencing the journey, place and secure the flat screen and screen support in the initial position. If the screen holder is installed in a TV cabinet: Close TV cabinet. Before commencing the journey, ensure that the antenna is in park posi- tion. Danger of accidents! Park position means: The antenna points towards the back, is fully lowered and is locked in this position.

Further information on positioning the flat screen can be obtained from chapter 6.

In the event of an accident or emergency braking, the loose sink (Fig. 15,1) and drain basin covers could injure the occupants of the vehicle. Before commencing the journey, take the loose covers off and store them securely in the kitchen unit or wardrobe.

Fig. 15 Sink cover (example)

In the event of an accident or emergency braking, loose add-on parts could injure the occupants of the vehicle. Before setting off, secure loose add-on parts in the holders provided or stow them in a secure place inside the vehicle.

34 T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Before the journey3

Add-on parts Add-on parts include bed extensions, ladders or table extensions.

Securing add-on parts: Place the add-on parts (Fig. 16,1 and Fig. 17,1) in the holders provided and secure them with the available means of attachment. If no holder is provided for the add-on part, stow the add-on part in a storage space the doors of which cannot be opened in the direction of travel (e.g. wardrobe or rear storage space).

Doors and flaps Doors are, for example, inner doors or partition walls. See section 6.4 for fur- niture flaps.

Securing doors: Secure doors (Fig. 18,1) or partition walls (Fig. 19,1) with the locks or means of securing provided.

3.10 Snow chains (special equipment)

Unsecured flaps and doors can spring open during the journey and damage parts of the interior. Secure all flaps and doors before setting off.

Fig. 16 Bed extension in the rear garage

Fig. 17 Access ladder in the wardrobe

Fig. 18 Sliding door Fig. 19 Shower partition

Only mount snow chains if there is a clearance of at least 50 mm between the tyres and the vehicle body. When using snow chains, the tyres, wheel suspension and steering are subjected to an additional load. When using snow chains, drive slowly (maximum speed 50 km/h) and only on streets which are completely cov- ered with snow. Otherwise the vehicle could be damaged. Observe the fitting instructions issued by the manufacturer of the snow chains. Do not fit snow chains on alloy wheel rims.

35T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Before the journey 3

Only use suitable snow chains:

The use of snow chains is subject to the legal regulations of the individual countries.

Always mount snow chains to the drive wheels. After a few metres, check the tension of the snow chains.

3.11 Road safety

Before commencing the journey, work through the checklist:

Tyre size Snow chain size

215/70 R 15 C 230

225/75 R 16 C 245

Check tyre pressure before a journey or every 2 weeks. Wrong tyre pressure causes excessive wear and can lead to damage or even to tyre burst. You can lose control of the vehicle.

No. Checks Checked

Base vehicle 1 All vehicle documents are on board

2 Tyres in proper condition

3 Vehicle lighting, brake lights and reversing lights function

4 Oil levels for engine, gearbox and power steering controlled

5 Coolant and fluid for windscreen washers filled up

6 Brakes function

7 Brakes react evenly

8 When braking, the vehicle remains in the lane

Housing body, outside 9 Awning completely retracted

10 Roof free of snow and ice (in winter)

11 External connections and lines disconnected and stored away

12 External supports removed

13 Fitted supports retracted and fixed in place

14 Wheel chocks removed and stored away

15 Entrance step is stored securely or retracted

16 External flaps closed and locked

17 Conversion door locked

18 Overall height of the vehicle including roof rack when loaded measured and noted. Keep the height information close at hand in the driver's cabin

Housing body, inside 19 Windows and skylights closed and locked

20 Television securely stored

21 Flat screen secured

22 Television antenna retracted (if one is built in)

36 T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Before the journey3

23 Loose parts and add-on parts stored away or fixed in position

24 Open storage spaces empty

25 No gas cartridges or other easily flammable materials stored in the roof cupboard of the awning light

26 Store sink and drain basin covers securely

27 Refrigerator door secured

28 Refrigerator set to 12 V operation

29 All drawers and flaps closed

30 All doors secured

31 Pull-down bed secured

32 Children's seats mounted to seats with three-point safety belts

33 Swivel seat locking device for driver's seat and front passen- ger's seat locked

34 Shades in the driver's cabin opened and secured

Gas system 35 Gas bottles firmly fixed in the gas bottle compartment so that they are unable to turn

36 If the gas bottles are not connected to the gas tube, always place the protective cap on top

37 If there is no supplied crash protection unit: Regulator tap on the gas bottle and gas isolator taps are closed

Electrical system 38 Check the battery voltage of the starter and living area battery (see chapter 8). If the panel indicates that the battery voltage is too low, the respective battery will need to be recharged. Observe the notes and instructions in chapter 8

Commence journey with fully charged starter and living area batteries.

No. Checks Checked

37T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

During the journey 4

4During the journey4.1 Chapter overview This chapter contains instructions on how to drive the motorhome. The instructions address the following topics:

reversing camera with LCD monitor driving speed brakes seat belts child restraint system seats and headrests seating arrangement Roman shades in the driver's cabin filling the tank

4.2 Driving the motorhome

The base vehicle is a commercial vehicle (small truck). Adjust your driving technique accordingly. Before commencing the journey and after short interruptions of the journey, ensure that the entrance step is completely retracted. A seat belt is fitted for each seat which is permitted for travel. Please keep your seat belt fastened during the journey. Never open your seat belts when travelling. Passengers must remain in the seats provided. The doors must remain locked. Avoid braking with a jerk. If a navigation system is used, only change the destination when the vehicle is stationary. Drive to a car park or stop in a safe area when changing the destination. Do not play DVDs using the monitor of the navigation system during the journey.

Drive slowly on poor roads. Take extreme care when driving onto ferries, crossing uneven roads and driving in reverse. Because of the relatively large overhang, larger vehicles might swing out and "touch ground" in unfavourable conditions. This can cause damage to the underbody or to parts fitted there.

If an accident occurs as a result of these instructions not being observed, the manufacturer will not be responsible for damages caused. The safety measures stipulated in chapter 2 have to be observed. If a reversing camera is installed in the vehicle, the camera is automatically switched on when driving in reverse gear.

38 T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

During the journey4

4.3 Reversing camera (special equipment)

A reversing camera (Fig. 20,1) is installed in the vehicle. When it is dark, the infrared LEDs of the reversing camera (Fig. 20,1) illumi- nate the field of view.

The image of the reversing camera is fed into the central multimedia/naviga- tion system and shown on the existent LCD monitor (Fig. 21,1 or Fig. 22,1). If the engine is running or the ignition is switched on, the reversing camera and LCD monitor switch themselves on automatically when you engage reverse. If the engine is running or the ignition is switched on, the reversing camera and LCD monitor can also be switched on manually via a pushbutton or a switch on the display. The system can also be switched off via a pushbutton or the "OFF" button on the display.

4.4 Driving speed

Fig. 20 Reversing camera with infrared illumination

Fig. 21 LCD monitor (Pioneer) Fig. 22 LCD monitor (Zenec)

Further information can be obtained in the manufacturer's instruction manual.

The vehicle is equipped with a powerful engine. This means there are sufficient reserves in difficult traffic situations. This high power enables a high maximum speed and requires above-average driving ability. The vehicle provides a large contact surface for wind. A sudden cross- wind can be especially dangerous. Uneven or one-sided loading affects road performance.

39T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

During the journey 4

4.5 Brakes

Before each journey Before each journey, check by means of a braking test:

Do the brakes function? Do the brakes react evenly? Does the vehicle remain in the lane when braking?

4.6 Seat belts 4.6.1 General

The vehicle is equipped with seat belts in the living area on the seats for which seat belts are compulsory by law. National regulations apply seat-belt fas- tening.

Driving on unknown streets, you may encounter hazardous road condi- tions and unexpected driving situations. Therefore, in the interest of safety, make sure your driving speed is appropriate to any given driving situation and environment. Adhere to the national legal speed limits.

Have defects on the braking system immediately remedied by an author- ised specialist workshop.

Avoid block brakings. Block braking gives the tyres "brake plates" of var- ying strength. This reduces driving comfort. It might even make the tyres unserviceable.

Fasten your seat belts before the beginning of the journey and keep them fastened during the journey. Do not damage or trap belts. Have damaged seat belts changed by an authorised specialist workshop. Do not alter the belt fixing devices, automatic seat belt winders and the belt clips. Only use one seat belt for one adult person. Do not belt in objects together with persons. Seat belts are not sufficient for persons who are less than 150 cm tall. In these cases use additional restraining devices. Observe test certificate. Factory-set three-point safety belts must be used when attaching child restraint systems. After an accident, replace the seat belts. During the journey, do not tilt the backrest too far backwards. Otherwise the functionality of the seat belt is no longer guaranteed.

40 T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

During the journey4

4.6.2 Fastening the seat belt correctly

The seat belt is correctly fastened when the lap belt passes below your stomach and across the hip bone. The shoulder belt must pass across the chest and shoulder (not across your neck). The belt must always be taut against your body. Any bulky or padded clothing should therefore be removed before you start your journey.

4.7 Child restraint systems

Child restraint systems are divided into five classes:

Do not twist the belt. The belt must be positioned smoothly against the body. When fastening the seat belt, adopt the correct sitting position.

When travelling, secure children under 13 years of age that are smaller than 150 cm, with a suitable and officially approved child restraint system. Factory-set three-point safety belts must be used when attaching child restraint systems. Fasten the childrens' seat belts before commencing the journey and make sure that their seat belts are kept fastened during the journey. Use a rear-facing child restraint system ("reboard system") only when the front and side air bags on the passenger side are switched off. Observe the separate operating instructions of the chassis manufacturer and the warning notices in the vehicle. If no rear-facing child restraint system is in use, switch the airbags back on again.

Class Body weight Approximate age

0 Up to 10 kg Up to 9 months

0+ Up to 13 kg Up to 18 months

I 9 kg to 18 kg 9 months to 4 years

II 15 kg to 25 kg 3 years to 7 years

III 22 kg to 36 kg 6 years to 12 years

41T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

During the journey 4

The following table shows, which child restraint systems can be used on which seats.

4.8 Pilot seats for the driver's and front passenger's seats

4.9 Seat heater (special equipment)

Depending on equipment levels, the driver's seat and the front passenger's seat may have a 2-level seat heater.

Seats Age groups

< 10 kg (0-9 months)

< 13 kg (0-24 months)

9-18 kg (9-48 months)

15-36 kg (4-12 years)

Front passen- ger's seat

X U 1)

1) This only applies without airbag or with deactivated airbag.

U 1) U 1)

Second and third row of seats

U 2)

2) Only possible in the respective seat if the distance between the seat and the table is large enough or if the table has been removed.

U U U

Here, the following meanings apply:

U: Suitable for "universal" restraint systems which are authorised for this age group.

UV: Suitable for forward-facing "universal" restraint systems which are author- ised for this age group.

X: Seat is not suitable for children in this age group.

Before commencing the journey, rotate all swivel seats in the direction of travel and lock in position. The seats must remain fixed in position during the journey and are not to be rotated.

Before rotating the seats in the pitched vehicle, always apply the hand- brake.

The driver's seat and the front passenger's seat are part of the base vehicle. The adjustment of the seats is described in the instruction manual of the base vehicle. The possibilities of seat adjustment differ according to the model and equipment variants.

The seat heater only works when the ignition is switched on.

42 T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

During the journey4

Switching on the seat heater:

Press the switch (Fig. 23,1) at the back on the left side of the seat console.

For minimal heating: Press the switch so that it is in the down position. For the highest heat level: Press the switch so that it is in the up position.

The LED (Fig. 23,2) comes on when the seat heater is in use.

Switching off the seat heater:

Set switch (Fig. 23,1) to the middle position. The LED goes out.

4.10 Headrests

Before commencing the journey, adjust the headrests (Fig. 24,1) or the head- rest (Fig. 25,1) so that the back of the head is supported at approximately ear height.

Push the headrests upwards or downwards by hand.

Fig. 23 Switch for seat heater

Fig. 24 Bench headrest Fig. 25 Bench headrest (alternative)

Fig. 26 Symbol "Adjust headrests"

43T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

During the journey 4

4.11 Seating arrangement

Seats which may not be used during the journey are equipped with a sticker (Fig. 27).

4.12 Roman shade in the driver's cabin 4.12.1 Pleated Roman shades

Removing the pleated shade:

Open the snap fasteners (Fig. 28,1), loosen the magnetic strips and detach the pleated shade from the window (shown here on the passenger window). Stow away the pleated shades in the living area.

During the journey, persons are only to sit on the permitted seats. The authorised number of seats is stipulated in the vehicle documents. During the journey sitting on the divans is not permitted. Seat belts must be worn by all passengers.

Fig. 27 Symbol "Do not use seat during the journey"

When on the move, the Roman shades for the windscreen, driver's window and the front passenger's window respectively must be com- pletely removed.

Fig. 28 Pleated Roman shades

44 T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

During the journey4

4.12.2 Roman shades, Remis (partially special equipment)

Securing: Use the handle (Fig. 29,2) to pull the two halves of the Roman shade for the windscreen outwards as far as they will go. When doing so, move the handle horizontally in the direction of the locking recess. Allow the release handles (Fig. 29,1) to engage. Use handle (Fig. 30,2) to push in the Roman shades for the driver's and passenger's window as far as possible. Allow the release handles (Fig. 30,1) to engage.

4.13 Refuelling

Refer to the instruction manual for the base vehicle for the position of the fuel filler neck.

While travelling, the Roman shades for the windscreen, driver's window and front passenger's window must be open, in a fixed position and secured.

Fig. 29 Roman shade for the wind- screen

Fig. 30 Roman shade for driver's and passenger's window

All gas-operated devices must be switched off for refuelling (heater, cooker, oven, grill, refrigerator - depending on the equipment). Danger of explosion!

The fuel filler neck is part of the base vehicle. The fuel filler neck is labelled with the word "Diesel".

45T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Pitching the motorhome 5

5Pitching the motorhomeChapter overview This chapter contains instructions on how to pitch the vehicle. The instructions address the following topics:

handbrake entrance step ramps wheel chocks operation of the supports 230 V connection refrigerator aligning the antenna retracting and extending the awning

5.1 Handbrake Firmly apply the handbrake when parking the vehicle.

5.2 Entrance step

In order to exit the vehicle, first fully extend the electrically operated entrance step. Observe the indicator lamp on the dashboard.

5.3 Ramps

To enable the vehicle to be parked on the level, ramps can be used for height compensation when the vehicle is parked on a hill or on uneven ground.

5.4 Wheel chocks When parking the vehicle on slopes or inclines use the wheel chocks. If the maximum permissible gross weight of the vehicle exceeds 4 tonnes, wheel chocks must be used when parking on gradients. The wheel chocks are provided as standard for vehicles with a maximum permissible gross weight exceeding 4 tonnes.

Pitch the vehicle so that it is as horizontal as possible. Use ramps where necessary. Otherwise, the water from the shower tray will not be able to drain properly. Secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling. Animals (especially mice) can cause great damage to the interior of the vehicle. To prevent this from happening, regularly check the vehicle for damages or animal traces after pitching.

Observe the instructions in section 3.6.

Ramps are not included in the scope of delivery. Different models are avail- able from accessory shops.

46 T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Pitching the motorhome5

5.5 Supports 5.5.1 General instructions

5.5.2 Steady legs (SAWIKO) (special equipment)

In order to ensure their correct function, clean and grease the interior tubes of the steady legs regularly. The length of the steady legs can be adjusted according to the model.

Extending: Place the socket spanner on the hexagon nut (Fig. 31,1) and rotate until the steady leg is in a perpendicular downward position. If the length of the steady leg can be adjusted, remove the splint (Fig. 31,4) out of the support foot extension (Fig. 31,5). Pull out the support foot extension until it has reached the required length. Insert the splint in the support foot extension. Rotate the hexagonal nut until the steady leg rests completely on the ground and the vehicle is in a horizontal position.

The steady legs must not be used to jack up the vehicle in order to work beneath it, e.g. to change a wheel or carry out maintenance work. Whilst the vehicle is in a jacked up position, persons must not lie down under it.

Always apply the handbrake before extending the steady legs. Do not use the fitted supports as a vehicle jack. They supports are only for stabilising the parked vehicle to prevent the rear axle from bottoming out. When pitching the vehicle, ensure that the supports are evenly loaded. Before driving away, wind up the supports as far as they can go, fully retract and secure them.

When the ground is soft, place a pad or block under the supports in order to prevent the vehicle from sinking into the ground. Pitch the vehicle so that it is as horizontal as possible. Otherwise, the water from the shower tray will not be able to drain properly.

Depending on the model, the hexagonal nut has a joint, which can be used to bring the attached socket spanner into a more convenient position for turning.

Fig. 31 Steady leg

47T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Pitching the motorhome 5

Retracting: Place the socket spanner on the hexagon nut (Fig. 31,1) and rotate until the steady leg is clear of the ground. If the length of the steady leg can be adjusted, remove the splint (Fig. 31,4) out of the support foot extension (Fig. 31,5). Push in the support foot extension (Fig. 31,5) and insert the splint (Fig. 31,4) in the drilled hole in the support foot extension. Rotate the hexagonal nut (Fig. 31,1) until the steady leg has swung upwards and the guide (Fig. 31,2) has reached the very end of the slot (Fig. 31,3).

5.5.3 Steady legs (AL-KO) (special equipment) In order to ensure their correct function, clean and grease the interior tubes of the steady legs regularly. The length of the steady legs can be adjusted according to the model.

Extending: Place the socket spanner on the hexagon nut (Fig. 32,1) and rotate until the steady leg is in a perpendicular downward position. Remove the splint (Fig. 32,4) out of the support foot extension (Fig. 32,5). Extend the support foot extension until it has reached the required length. Insert the splint in the support foot extension. Rotate the hexagonal nut until the steady leg rests completely on the ground and the vehicle is in a horizontal position.

Retracting: Place the socket spanner on the hexagon nut (Fig. 32,1) and rotate until the steady leg is clear of the ground. Remove the splint (Fig. 32,4) out of the support foot extension (Fig. 32,5). Push in the support foot extension (Fig. 32,5) and insert the splint (Fig. 32,4) in the drilled hole in the support foot extension. Rotate the hexagonal nut (Fig. 32,1) with the socket spanner until the steady leg has swung upwards and the guide disc (Fig. 32,3) has com- pletely retracted into the notch (Fig. 32,2).

Before commencing the journey, observe the following: Are all steady legs and support foot extensions retracted completely and secured with the splint?

Fig. 32 Steady leg

Before commencing the journey, observe the following: Are all steady legs and support foot extensions retracted completely and secured with the splint?

48 T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Pitching the motorhome5

5.6 230 V connection The vehicle can be connected to a 230 V power supply (see chapter 8).

5.7 Refrigerator

For units with an automatic power selection, the 12 V operation of the refriger- ator only functions in the automatic mode when the vehicle engine is running. When the vehicle engine is switched off, switch the refrigerator to 230 V oper- ation or gas operation.

5.8 Satellite unit (special equipment)

5.8.1 Equipment with automatic antenna alignment (Alden) The satellite unit is equipped with an automatic positioning unit. This automatic positioning unit ensures that the antennas are aligned accurately. The flat screen incorporates a digital receiver. The satellite unit is operated via remote control.

If the refrigerator is set to 12 V operation, it will constantly consume cur- rent. Therefore, switch over to gas operation when the vehicle engine is not running, and the vehicle is not connected to the 230 V power supply.

Before commencing the journey, ensure that the antenna is in park posi- tion. Danger of accidents!

The vehicle must be still during the satellite search. Do not walk through the vehicle. Satellite reception is only possible, when the antenna is positioned in direct line of sight of the chosen satellite and the view is not blocked in any way. Further information can be obtained in the device manufacturer's instruc- tion manual.

Fig. 33 Remote control

1 TV button 2 On/Off key 3 Memory buttons 4 Function buttons

49T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Pitching the motorhome 5

Setting up the unit: Switch on the television and receiver.

Press the key " " (Fig. 33,2) on the remote control. The satellite antenna lifts out of the park position and moves to the last used position. As soon as the unit finds the satellite, you will hear two signal tones. Use the memory buttons (Fig. 33,3) or the function buttons (Fig. 33,4) to set the required transmitter.

5.8.2 Equipment with automatic antenna alignment (Oyster)

The satellite unit is equipped with an automatic positioning unit. This automatic positioning unit ensures that the antennas are precisely aligned to the desired satellites. Operation is menu-controlled (TV screen) using the remote control.

Setting up the unit: Switch on the television. Use the mains switch to switch on the receiver. When the green LED on the receiver's infra-red receptor lights up, the receiver is ready to operate. Switch on the receiver with the remote control. The satellite antenna repo- sitions itself out of the park position and into search mode.

When the system finds the satellite, the selected TV programme appears auto- matically.

Satellite mouse Depending on the model, the satellite receiver is equipped with a satellite mouse. The satellite mouses display (Fig. 34,2) shows the current channel. The two buttons can be used to operate the basic functions of the satellite unit (changing channel, switching on/off).

Operating the satellite mouse:

Choosing the previous channel from the list: Press left button (Fig. 34,1). Choosing the next channel from the list: Press right button (Fig. 34,3).

Before commencing the journey, ensure that the antenna is in park posi- tion. Danger of accidents!

The vehicle must be still during the satellite search. Do not walk through the vehicle. Satellite reception is only possible, when the antenna is positioned in direct line of sight of the chosen satellite and the view is not blocked in any way. Also read the manufacturer's instruction manual.

Fig. 34 Satellite mouse

50 T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Pitching the motorhome5

Switching between radio and TV: Press the buttons (Fig. 34,1 and Fig. 34,3) briefly at the same time. Switching the receiver on/off: Press and hold the buttons (Fig. 34,1 and Fig. 34,3) at the same time.

5.9 Awning (special equipment)

Advantages of the awning The advantages of an awning are:

The awning provides shade. The awning creates a covered vestibule and thus expands the space. The vehicle thus becomes more homelike.

Putting up the awning: Use the manual crank to open up the awning (Fig. 35,1). Set up the brackets (Fig. 35,2) when the awning is open.

Retract the awning in strong wind, rain or snow. In the case of light rain, shorten one of the support legs so that water can run off. Only retract the awning when the fabric is dry. When the awning must be retracted while the fabric is still wet: Extend the awning as soon as pos- sible, in order to dry out the fabric. Before retracting, remove leaves and coarse dirt from the awning.

Only use the awning for protection against the sun. Also read the manufacturer's instruction manual.

Fig. 35 Awning

51T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Living 6

6LivingChapter overview This chapter contains instructions about living in the vehicle. The instructions address the following topics:

opening and closing the doors and flaps light switches adjusting the spotlights positioning the television ventilation of the vehicle opening and closing the windows and blinds opening and closing the Roman shades in the driver's cabin opening and closing the skylights modifying the table surfaces converting tables use of the beds use of the external shower

6.1 Central locking system (special equipment)

Unlocking: Press the button (Fig. 36,1) once briefly. The door locks are unlatched.

Locking: Press the button (Fig. 36,2) once briefly. The door locks are locked.

6.2 Conversion door

The central locking mechanism locks the driver's door, the passenger's door and the conversion entrance door. The central locking system has no function, if the battery cut-off switch on the transformer/rectifier is switched off. If, after you press the release button, a door is not opened within 40 seconds, the central locking system automatically locks the doors again.

Fig. 36 Remote control for central locking system

Only drive with locked doors.

52 T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Living6

6.2.1 Conversion door, outside (Hartal M1)

Opening: Insert the key into locking cylinder (Fig. 37,1) and turn until the door lock is unlatched. Return the key to the central position and remove it. Pull on the handle (Fig. 37,2). The door is open.

Locking: Insert the key into locking cylinder (Fig. 37,1) and turn until the door lock is engaged. Return the key to the central position and remove it.

6.2.2 Conversion door, inside (Hartal M1)

Opening: Press lever (Fig. 38,2).

Locking: Push the sliding trap (Fig. 38,1) down.

Locking the doors can prevent them from opening of their own accord, e.g. during an accident. Locked doors also prevent forced entry, e.g. when waiting at traffic lights. However, in an emergency, locked doors make it more difficult for helpers to enter the vehicle. When leaving the vehicle, always lock the doors.

Fig. 37 Door lock of conversion door, outside

Fig. 38 Door lock of conversion door, inside, locked

53T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Living 6

6.2.3 Conversion door, outside (Hartal Premium) (partially special equipment)

Opening: Insert the key into locking cylinder (Fig. 39,1) and turn until the door lock is unlatched. Return the key to the central position and remove it. Pull on the handle (Fig. 39,2). The door is open.

Locking: Insert the key into locking cylinder (Fig. 39,1) and turn until the door lock is engaged. Return the key to the central position and remove it.

6.2.4 Conversion door, inside (Hartal Premium) (partially special equipment)

Opening: Pull on the handle (Fig. 40,2). The door lock is unlatched.

Locking: Press the upper part of the handle (Fig. 40,2) in the direction of the recessed handle (Fig. 40,1).

Fig. 39 Door lock of conversion door, outside

Fig. 40 Door lock of conversion door, inside

54 T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Living6

6.2.5 Conversion door, outside (Hartal)

Opening: Insert the key into locking cylinder (Fig. 41,1) and turn until the door lock is unlatched. Return the key to the central position and remove it. Pull on the handle (Fig. 41,2). The door is open.

Locking: Insert the key into locking cylinder (Fig. 41,1) and turn until the door lock is engaged. Return the key to the central position and remove it.

6.2.6 Conversion door, inside (Hartal)

Opening: Pull on the handle (Fig. 42,2). The door lock is unlatched or opened.

Locking: Press the upper part of the handle (Fig. 42,2) in the direction of the recessed handle (Fig. 42,1). The door lock is locked.

6.2.7 Window of conversion door (partially special equipment) The conversion door window is fitted with a Roman shade.

Fig. 41 Door lock of conversion door, outside

Fig. 42 Door lock of conversion door, inside

55T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Living 6

Closing: Grip the Roman shade (Fig. 43,2) in the middle of the holding bar (Fig. 43,1), pull it upwards and then release it at the desired height. The Roman shade will stay at this height.

Opening: Grip the Roman shade in the middle of the holding bar and push it down.

6.2.8 Folding insect screen on the conversion door (partially special equipment)

Closing: Pull out the insect screen completely by the bar (Fig. 44,1).

Opening: Push the insect screen into its initial position by the bar (Fig. 44,1).

6.3 External flaps

The external flaps fitted to the vehicle are all fitted with identical locking cylin- ders. Therefore, all locks can be opened with a single key.

Fig. 43 Roman shade

Open the insect screen completely before closing the conversion door.

Fig. 44 Insect screen

Before commencing the journey, close all external flaps and lock them. To open and close the external flap, open or close all locks that are fitted to the external flap.

When leaving the vehicle, close all external flaps.

56 T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Living6

6.3.1 Flap lock with recessed handle

Opening: Insert key into locking cylinder (Fig. 45,1) and turn a quarter turn. The flap lock is unlatched. Remove the key. Pull on the lock handle (Fig. 45,2). The external flap is open.

Closing: Firmly close the external flap. Insert key into locking cylinder and turn a quarter turn. The flap lock is locked. Remove the key.

6.3.2 Flap lock, square

Opening: Open the cap (Fig. 46,1). Insert key into locking cylinder (Fig. 46,2) and turn a quarter turn. Remove the key.

Closing: Firmly close the external flap. Insert key into locking cylinder. Turn key one quarter turn. Remove the key.

To open the external flap, pull all the lock handles fitted to that particular external flap at the same time.

Fig. 45 Flap lock with recessed handle

1 Locking cylinder 2 Lock handle

Fig. 46 Flap lock, square

1 Cap 2 Locking cylinder

57T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Living 6

6.3.3 Flap lock with push button Depending on the flap size the service flap is equipped with one or two lock- able push-button locks.

Opening: Insert the key into locking cylinder of the lockable push-button lock (Fig. 47,1) and turn a quarter turn. The push-button lock is unlatched. Remove the key. If equipped, unlock the second lockable push-button lock as well. Press the two push buttons of the push-button locks simultaneously with the thumb and open the service flap.

Closing: Close the service flap and press it shut. The push-button locks are now engaged but not locked. Insert the key into locking cylinder of the lockable push-button lock (Fig. 47,1) and turn a quarter turn. The push-button lock is locked. Remove the key. If equipped, lock the second lockable push-button lock as well.

6.3.4 Flap for the 230 V connection, square (Ixeo)

Opening: Reach into the recessed grip (Fig. 48,1) on the external flap (Fig. 48,2) and swing the external flap upward.

Closing: Swivel the external flap downwards and press it shut.

Fig. 47 Push-button lock service flap

Fig. 48 Flap for the 230 V connection

1 Recessed grip 2 External flap

58 T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Living6

6.3.5 Cap for the drinking water filler neck (Ixeo)

Opening: Insert the key in the locking cylinder (Fig. 49,2) and turn it in an anticlock- wise direction. Remove cap.

Closing: Insert the cap in the drinking water filler neck. Turn key in a clockwise direction. Remove the key.

6.4 Furniture flaps

6.4.1 Furniture flaps with push button

Opening: Press inner part of the lock. The push button jumps out (Fig. 50). Hold push button and open furniture flap.

Fig. 49 Cap for the drinking water filler neck

The drinking water filler neck is indicated by the symbol " " (Fig. 49,1).

Before commencing the journey, close all furniture flaps and inner doors and lock them. The furniture flaps shown in this section are examples. Depending on the model, the locks and handles on the furniture flaps may differ to those dis- played here.

Fig. 50 Furniture flap with push button

59T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Living 6

Closing: Press furniture flap shut. Press push button in until it locks. The furniture flap is closed correctly when the fastener locks into place.

6.4.2 Furniture flaps with unlocking bar

Opening: Press and hold the unlocking bar (Fig. 51,2) on the inside of the furniture flap. Open the flap.

Closing: Press down furniture flap until the lock (Fig. 51,1) snaps into place with a click.

6.4.3 Furniture flaps with handle and push button

Opening: Press the release knob (Fig. 52,1 or Fig. 53,1) on the handle (Fig. 52,2 or Fig. 53,2) and hold it down. Pull handle until furniture flap is open.

Closing: Press the furniture flap down until you can feel the flap hinge close and hear the lock snap into place.

Fig. 51 Furniture flap with unlocking bar

1 Lock 2 Unlocking bar

Fig. 52 Furniture flap with handle (example)

Fig. 53 Furniture flap with handle (alternative)

60 T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Living6

6.4.4 Furniture flaps with handle and unlocking bar

Opening: Press the unlocking bar (Fig. 54,1 or Fig. 55,1) and hold it. Pull the handle (Fig. 54,2 or Fig. 55,2) until the furniture flap is open.

Closing: Press the furniture flap down until you can feel the flap hinge close and hear the lock snap into place.

6.5 Light switch 6.5.1 Entrance area

The entrance area has light switches (Fig. 56,1-3) for the following lamps:

Entrance lights Awning lights Living area lights

Fig. 54 Handle with unlocking bar (example)

Fig. 55 Handle with unlocking bar (alternative)

The light switches shown in this section are examples. Depending on the model, the type and allocation of the light switches may differ to those dis- played here.

Fig. 56 Light switch Fig. 57 Awning light

61T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Living 6

6.5.2 Interior

The light switches in the interior are located either on the lamp itself (Fig. 58,1) or near the lamp (Fig. 59,1).

6.5.3 Recessed light with LED

The light switch is located in the recessed light. To switch on and off, press the interior of the recessed light (Fig. 60,1).

6.5.4 Wardrobe light

The lamps shown in this section are examples. Not all lamps used in the vehicle are shown. The examples are intended to clarify the possible posi- tions for the light switches. The type and appearance of the light switches can deviate from those shown here.

Fig. 58 Spotlight, switch mounted directly on the lamp (example)

Fig. 59 Switch, separate from the lamp (example)

Fig. 60 Recessed light, light switch in the lamp

The wardrobe light can be removed from its holder (Fig. 61,1) and used as a torch. When the wardrobe door is closed, the wardrobe light switches off auto- matically. A brightness sensor ensures that the wardrobe light comes on only when it is dark. This prevents the wardrobe light from being accidentally switched on during daylight hours, which would waste the batteries.

62 T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Living6

The On/Off switch (Fig. 61,2) is located directly on the wardrobe light (Fig. 61,3).

6.6 Spotlight

The spotlight can be rotated, moved or detached.

Rotating: Grasp the housing (Fig. 62,2) and turn it.

The housing can be turned in different directions:

To the left and to the right Up and down

Shifting: Grip holder (Fig. 62,1) and turn by approx. 45. Push spotlight along the rail system to desired position.

Removal: Grip holder (Fig. 62,1) and turn by approx. 90. Remove spotlight from rail.

The spotlight can be installed in any position into the rails.

Fig. 61 Wardrobe light

Bulbs and light fittings can be extremely hot. Allow the light bulbs and lamp holders to cool down before touching them. If the light is switched on or still hot, there must always be a safety dis- tance of at least 30 cm between stores or curtains and flammable objects. Fire hazard!

Fig. 62 Spotlight

63T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Living 6

6.7 Holder for flat screen

6.7.1 Holder on the column The holder for the flat screen is attached to a column.

Positioning: Push the release lever (Fig. 63,2) to the side and turn the holder (Fig. 63,3) with the flat screen to the desired position. Press flat screen slightly upward and swivel it to the desired position. Three different inclination angles may be used.

Storing away: Turn flat screen back until the holder (Fig. 63,3) engages in the lock (Fig. 63,1).

6.7.2 Holder with jointed arm The flat screen is fastened to a jointed arm.

Positioning: Pull the release knob (Fig. 64,2). The jointed arm (Fig. 64,1) is unlocked. Swivel flat screen into the desired position. Take hold of the flat screen at the top and bottom edge with both hands and set the desired angle of inclination.

Storing away: Turn the flat screen back into the original position until you hear the holder (Fig. 64,3) engage in the lock.

Before commencing the journey, place and secure the flat screen and screen support in the initial position. If the screen holder is installed in a TV cabinet: Close TV cabinet.

Fig. 63 Holder on the column

Fig. 64 Holder with jointed arm

64 T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Living6

6.7.3 Holder in the TV cabinet The flat screen is attached to a console in the TV cabinet.

Positioning: Push the unlocking bar (Fig. 65,1) in. Pull out the extension (Fig. 65,2) as far as possible. Swivel flat screen into the desired position.

Storing away: Swing back flat screen into its original position. Push in the extension (Fig. 65,2) until the unlocking bar (Fig. 65,1) engages.

6.7.4 Holder with release lever The holder for the flat screen is attached to the wall.

Positioning: Push the release lever (Fig. 66,2) to the side and turn the holder (Fig. 66,1) with the flat screen to the desired position. Press flat screen slightly upward and swivel it to the desired position. Three different inclination angles may be used.

Storing away: Turn flat screen back until the holder (Fig. 66,1) engages in the lock.

Fig. 65 Holder in the TV cabinet

Fig. 66 Holder with release lever

65T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Living 6

6.7.5 Holder behind wall-mounted cupboard The flat screen is attached to an extension behind a wall-mounted cupboard.

Positioning: Use handle (Fig. 67,1) to pull extension downwards to the stop. Swivel flat screen into the desired position.

Storing away: Swing back flat screen into its original position. Push extension with flat screen upwards to the stop.

6.8 Ventilation

Condensation Ensure that there is a continuous exchange of air by providing frequent and efficient ventilation. This is the only method for ensuring that condensation and resulting mould is not formed during cool weather. During the colder season, a pleasant living climate is created if heating output, air distribution and venti- lation are synchronised. To avoid draft close the air outlet nozzles on the dash- board and set the air distribution of the base vehicle to air circulation. If the vehicle is laid up for a longer period, occasionally ventilate it well, espe- cially in summer as heat accumulation can occur. Do not only air the interior, but also the storage compartments which are accessible from the outside. Air the parking place as well if the vehicle is parked in a closed space (e.g. garage). The occurrence of condensation could lead to the formation of mould.

Fig. 67 Holder behind wall-mounted cupboard

The oxygen in the vehicle interior is used up by breathing and the use of gas operated appliances. That is why the oxygen needs to be replaced on a constant basis. For this purpose, forced ventilation options (e.g. skylights with forced ventilation, mushroom-shaped vents or floor vents) are fitted to the vehicle. Never cover or block forced ventilations from the inside or outside with objects such as e.g. a winter mat. Keep forced ven- tilations clear of snow and leaves. There is a danger of suffocation due to increased CO2 levels.

Although sufficient ventilation is provided, in certain weather conditions, condensation can form on metal objects (e.g. screwed connections in the floor). Additional cold spots can occur at thermal "bridges" (e.g. mushroom- shaped vents, skylight edges, sockets, filler necks, flaps, etc.).

66 T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Living6

6.9 Windows The windows are fitted with a blind or Roman shade and with an insect screen or folding insect screen. After the latch has been released, the blind and insect screen automatically spring back to the initial position by tensile force. In order not to damage the tension mechanics, hold onto the blind or insect screen and allow it to slowly return to the initial position. The Roman shade and folding insect screen are made of thin woven fabric. In order not to damage the Roman shade or the insect screen, grasp the respective handle and carefully return it to the initial position. Do not keep blinds closed over a longer period of time as that can cause increased material wear. If the blind or the Roman shade is completely closed, exposure to direct sunlight can cause heat to accumulate between the blind/the Roman shade and the window. The window could be damaged. Therefore, if the shade is installed in the bottom blind box, close the shade only 2/3 when sunlight is intense. This allows the heat to escape between the window and the shade. If the shade is installed in the top blind box, close the shade fully and open it regularly. Also move the window into the "continuous ventilation" position. Before commencing the journey, close the windows. Depending on the weather, close the windows far enough to prevent mois- ture from entering. To open and close the window, open or close all catch levers which are fitted to the window.

When leaving the vehicle, always close the windows. In extreme weather conditions or if the temperature fluctuates strongly, a light condensation film can form on the double-glazed acrylic glass. The glass is designed in such a way that condensation can evaporate when the external temperature increases. There is no danger of the double-glazed acrylic glass being damaged by condensation.

67T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Living 6

6.9.1 Hinged window with rotary hinges

Opening: Press and hold the security button (Fig. 68,1), if present. Turn the catch lever (Fig. 68,2 or Fig. 69,3) a quarter turn towards the centre of the window.

Open the hinged window until the required position has been reached and use knurled knob (Fig. 70,1) to secure in position.

The hinged window remains locked in the required position.

Closing: Turn knurled knob (Fig. 70,1) until the latch is released. Close the hinged window. Press and hold the security button (Fig. 68,1), if present. Turn the catch lever (Fig. 68,2 or Fig. 69,3) a quarter turn towards the window frame. The locking catch (Fig. 68,3 or Fig. 69,2) on the catch lever is entirely on the inner side of the window catch (Fig. 68,4 or Fig. 69,1).

When opening the hinged windows, ensure that there are no torsional forces. Open and close the hinged windows evenly. If the catch lever is equipped with a safety knob, press the safety knob when operating the catch lever.

Fig. 68 Catch lever with safety knob in "closed" position

Fig. 69 Catch lever in "closed" position

Fig. 70 Hinged window with rotary hinges

68 T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Living6

Continuous ventilation With the catch lever, the hinged window can be placed in two positions:

"Continuous ventilation" (Fig. 71 and Fig. 72) Firmly closed (Fig. 68 and Fig. 69)

To place the hinged window into the "continuous ventilation" position:

Press and hold the security button (Fig. 71,1), if present. Turn the catch lever (Fig. 71,2 or Fig. 72,3) a quarter turn towards the centre of the window. Slightly open the hinged window outwards. Return the catch lever to its initial position. Move the locking catch (Fig. 71,3 or Fig. 72,2) on the catch lever into the recess of the window catch (Fig. 71,4 or Fig. 72,1). Press and hold the security button (Fig. 71,1), if present. Make certain that the safety knob is not pushed in but rather that it secures the catch lever.

During the journey, the hinged window may not be in "continuous ventilation" position. If it rains, the "continuous ventilation" hinged window position could lead to splashing water penetrating the living area. Therefore, close the hinged win- dows completely.

Fig. 71 Catch lever with safety knob in "continuous ventilation" posi- tion

Fig. 72 Catch lever in the "continuous ventilation" position

69T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Living 6

6.9.2 Hinged window with automatic hinges

Opening: Press and hold the security button (Fig. 73,1), if present. Turn the catch lever (Fig. 73,2 or Fig. 74,3) a quarter turn towards the centre of the window.

Open the hinged window to the desired latched position. The automatic hinge (Fig. 75,1) locks in place automatically.

The hinged window remains locked in the required position.

Closing: Open the hinged window as wide as is necessary to release the lock. Close the hinged window. Press and hold the security button (Fig. 73,1), if present. Turn the catch lever (Fig. 73,2 or Fig. 74,3) a quarter turn towards the window frame. The locking catch (Fig. 73,3 or Fig. 74,2) on the catch lever is entirely on the inner side of the window catch (Fig. 73,4 or Fig. 74,1).

Open the window completely, to release the lock. If the locking device is not released and the window is closed nevertheless, there is the danger of the window breaking due to the massive counter-pressure. When opening the hinged windows, ensure that there are no torsional forces. Open and close the hinged windows evenly. If the catch lever is equipped with a safety knob, press the safety knob when operating the catch lever.

Fig. 73 Catch lever with safety knob in "closed" position

Fig. 74 Catch lever in "closed" position

Fig. 75 Hinged window with automatic hinges

70 T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Living6

Continuous ventilation With the catch lever, the hinged window can be placed in two positions:

"Continuous ventilation" (Fig. 76 and Fig. 77) Firmly closed (Fig. 73 and Fig. 74)

To place the hinged window into the "continuous ventilation" position:

Press and hold the security button (Fig. 76,1), if present. Turn the catch lever (Fig. 76,2 or Fig. 77,3) a quarter turn towards the centre of the window. Slightly open the hinged window outwards. Return the catch lever to its initial position. Move the locking catch (Fig. 76,3 or Fig. 77,2) on the catch lever into the recess of the window catch (Fig. 76,4 or Fig. 77,1). Press and hold the security button (Fig. 76,1), if present. Make certain that the safety knob is not pushed in but rather that it secures the catch lever.

During the journey, the hinged window may not be in "continuous ventilation" position. If it rains, the "continuous ventilation" hinged window position could lead to splashing water penetrating the living area. Therefore, close the hinged win- dows completely.

Fig. 76 Catch lever with safety knob in "continuous ventilation" posi- tion

Fig. 77 Catch lever in the "continuous ventilation" position

71T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Living 6

6.9.3 Blind and insect screen

The windows are fitted with a blind and an insect screen. The blind and insect screen are adjusted separately.

Blind The blind is located in the upper blind box.

Closing: Pull blind at the handle (Fig. 78,2) downwards. If the blind is to be com- pletely closed, it is suspended into the locking devices (Fig. 78,3) situated on both sides of the window frame.

Opening: If the blind is completely closed: Press handle (Fig. 78,2) downwards and, at the same time, tilt it slightly inward. The blind can be taken out of the locking devices situated on both sides of the window frame. If the blind is in an intermediate position: Pull the handle (Fig. 78,2) slightly downwards until the locking device releases. Use handle to return blind slowly to its initial position.

Insect screen The insect screen is located in the upper blind box.

Closing: Pull insect screen at the handle (Fig. 78,1) down and hang it into the locking devices (Fig. 78,3) situated on both sides of the window frame.

Opening: Press handle (Fig. 78,1) downwards and, at the same time, tilt it slightly inward. The insect screen can be taken out of the locking devices situated on both sides of the window frame. Use handle to return the insect screen slowly to its initial position.

Open blinds before commencing the journey. When the blinds are closed, vibrations can damage the spring shaft.

Fig. 78 Hinged window

72 T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Living6

6.9.4 Roman shade and insect screen The windows are fitted with a Roman shade and an insect screen. The insect screen can only be moved together with the Roman shade.

Roman shade The Roman shade is located in the bottom blind box.

Closing: Grip the Roman shade in the centre of the holding bar (Fig. 79,3), pull it from the bottom to the top and then release it at the desired height. The Roman shade will stay at this height.

Opening: Grip the Roman shade in the centre of the holding bar and push it down.

Insect screen The insect screen is located in the upper blind box.

Closing: Pull the insect screen down using the holding bar (Fig. 79,2), until it touches the holding bar of the Roman shade (Fig. 79,3). Clip the catch (Fig. 79,1) on the insect screen into the handle of the Roman shade.

Opening: Push the catch (Fig. 79,1) on the insect screen inwards. Move the insect screen back slowly on the holding bar (Fig. 79,2).

6.9.5 Roman shades for windscreen, driver's window and front passenger's window Depending on the model, the driver's cabin is shaded either with pleated shades or with Remis Roman shades (special equipment).

Pleated shades The pleated shades are standard equipment on the vehicle.

Fig. 79 Hinged window

73T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Living 6

The pleated shades (Fig. 80,2) are fixed with snap fasteners (Fig. 80,1 and Fig. 81,1).

Remis Roman shades (special equipment)

The Roman shades are fixed with magnetic strips and are permanently fitted to the vehicle inside the frame. Proceed as described below to open or close permanently installed Roman shades.

Windscreen

Shading: Press the release handles (Fig. 82,1) and hold them down. Use the handle (Fig. 82,2) to pull the Roman shade for the windscreen towards the centre of the window. Close the second Roman shade for the windscreen in the same way. A magnetic catch holds both parts of the Roman shade together in the centre.

Opening the Roman shade: Press the release handles (Fig. 82,1) and hold them down. Use the handle (Fig. 82,2) to pull the two halves of the Roman shade for the windscreen outwards as far as they will go. As you do so, lift the handle up as high as the locking recess. Let go of the release handles (Fig. 82,1) and let them engage.

Fig. 80 Pleated shades on passenger window

Fig. 81 Fixing of pleated shades

Fig. 82 Roman shade for the wind- screen

74 T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Living6

Driver's window and front passenger's window

Shading: Press the release handles (Fig. 83,1) and hold them down. Using the handle (Fig. 83,2), draw the Roman shades for the driver's and passenger's window to the other side of the window and secure them to the magnetic strips.

Opening the Roman shade: Press the release handles (Fig. 83,1) and hold them down. Use handle (Fig. 83,2) to push in the Roman shades for the driver's and passenger's window as far as possible. Let go of the release handles (Fig. 83,1) and let them engage.

6.10 Skylights Depending on the model, skylights with or without forced ventilation are fitted to the vehicle. If a skylight is fitted without forced ventilation, the forced venti- lation is performed using mushroom-shaped vents.

Fig. 83 Roman shade for driver's and passenger's window

The apertures for forced ventilation must always be kept open. Never cover or block forced ventilations with objects such as e.g. a winter mat. Keep forced ventilations clear of snow and leaves.

The skylights are fitted with a blind or Roman shade and with an insect screen or folding insect screen. After the latch has been released, the blind and insect screen automatically spring back to the initial position by tensile force. In order not to damage the tension mechanics, hold onto the blind or insect screen and allow it to slowly return to the initial position. The Roman shade and folding insect screen are made of thin woven fabric. In order not to damage the Roman shade or the insect screen, grasp the respective handle and carefully return it to the initial position. Do not keep blinds closed over a longer period of time as that can cause increased material wear. If the blind or the Roman shade is completely closed, exposure to direct sunlight can cause heat to accumulate between the blind/the Roman shade and the skylight. The skylight could be damaged. For that reason, close the blind/Roman shade only 2/3 of the way in direct sunlight. Open the skylight slightly or move it to ventilation position. Depending on the weather, close the skylights far enough to prevent mois- ture from entering. Do not climb on the skylights.

75T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Living 6

6.10.1 Skylight with snap latch

The skylight can be pushed upwards either from one side or from both sides.

Opening: Use handle (Fig. 84,1) to swing down the insect screen (Fig. 84,2). Push the snap latch (Fig. 85,1) towards the inside of the skylight (Fig. 85,3). At the same time use the handle (Fig. 85,2) to press the skylight upwards. Swing insect screen upwards until it latches in place.

Closing: Use handle (Fig. 84,1) to swing down the insect screen (Fig. 84,2). Using both handles (Fig. 85,2), pull down the skylight (Fig. 85,3) with force until the two snap latches (Fig. 85,1) lock into place. Swing insect screen upwards until it latches in place.

Blind Depending on the equipment, there will be a blind installed.

Closing: Use handle (Fig. 84,1) to swing down the insect screen (Fig. 84,2). Using the handle (Fig. 86,1), pull out the blind (Fig. 86,2) and hook the retainer (Fig. 86,3) into the hook (Fig. 86,4) on the insect screen. Swing insect screen upwards until it latches in place.

Before commencing the journey, close the skylights. Before commencing the journey, check that the skylights are closed and locked.

When leaving the vehicle, always close the skylights.

Fig. 84 Skylight with snap latch Fig. 85 Handles with snap latches

Fig. 86 Blind

76 T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Living6

Opening: Use handle (Fig. 84,1) to swing down the insect screen (Fig. 84,2). Release the retainer (Fig. 86,3) from the hook (Fig. 86,4) and, using the handle (Fig. 86,1), slowly return the blind (Fig. 86,2). Swing insect screen upwards until it latches in place.

6.10.2 Heki skylight (mini and midi) (partially special equipment)

The Heki skylight is opened on one side only.

Opening: Press the safety knob (Fig. 87,2) and pull the bar (Fig. 87,1) down with both hands. Pull the bar (Fig. 88,1) in the guides (Fig. 88,2) to the rearmost position (Fig. 88,3).

Closing: Use both hands to push the bar (Fig. 88,1) slightly upwards. Push the bar back in the guides. Push the bar upwards with both hands until it is above the safety knob (Fig. 87,2).

Ventilation position The Heki skylight can be put in two ventilation positions: Bad weather position (Fig. 89,1) and central position (Fig. 89,2). Depending on the model, the sky- light can be locked in the central position with both left and right latches (Fig. 90,1) on the skylight frame.

Fig. 87 Safety knob on the Heki sky- light

Fig. 88 Heki skylight, guide

Fig. 89 Heki skylight in ventilation position

Fig. 90 Ventilation position locking mechanism

77T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Living 6

Press the safety knob (Fig. 87,2) and pull the bar (Fig. 87,1) down with both hands. Pull the bar in the guides (Fig. 88,2) to the desired position. Push the bar slightly upwards and into the selected guide (Fig. 89,1 or 2) and lock if necessary.

Roman shade To close and open the Roman shade:

Closing: Pull out Roman shade at the handle and release in the required position. The Roman shade will stay in that position.

Opening: Slowly push the Roman shade at the handle to its initial position.

Insect screen To close and open the insect screen:

Closing: Pull the insect screen by the handle to the opposite handle of the Roman shade.

Opening: Press the rear part of the handle of the insect screen. The latch is released. Use handle to return the insect screen slowly to its initial position.

6.10.3 Wind-up skylight (special equipment)

The wind-up skylight can be opened using the manual crank.

Opening: Rotate the hand crank (Fig. 91,2) until a resistance can be felt.

Closing: Rotate the hand crank until the wind-up skylight is closed. The wind-up sky- light can be locked after rotating two or three more times. Check the locking mechanism. To do so, press your hand against the acrylic glass.

Roman shade The Roman shade can be closed in any position, as desired. If the Roman shade is locked with the insect screen, the insect screen is also moved along on closing the Roman shade.

Closing: Pull the handle of the Roman shade (Fig. 91,3) and release in the desired position. The Roman shade will stay in that position.

Opening: Slowly push the Roman shade at the handle to its initial position.

Fig. 91 Wind-up skylight

78 T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Living6

Insect screen If the insect screen is locked with the Roman shade, the Roman shade is also moved along on closing the insect screen.

Closing: Pull insect screen at the handle (Fig. 91,1) to the opposite handle of the Roman shade (Fig. 91,3) and allow to engage.

Opening: Press the handle of the insect screen (Fig. 91,1) at the back upwards and detach the insect screen from the Roman shade (Fig. 91,3). Slowly push insect screen at the handle to its initial position.

6.10.4 Omni-Vent skylight with fan (special equipment)

The skylight is equipped with an insect screen, blind and an adjustable fan for ventilation.

Opening: Turn the knob (Fig. 92,1) until the desired opening angle is reached.

Closing: Turn the knob (Fig. 92,1) until the skylight is fully closed.

Insect screen To close and open the insect screen:

Closing: Using the handle (Fig. 92,4) pull the insect screen across to the other side of the frame.

Opening: Press the handle of the insect screen together. The latch is released. Use handle to return the insect screen slowly to its initial position.

Shade To close and open the shade:

Closing: Press together the handle (Fig. 92,5) of the shade. Pull out the shade to the desired position and release. The shade will stay in that position.

Opening: Press together the handle of the shade. Slowly return the shade to its initial position.

To save the battery, after one hour the fan automatically switches from level 6 down to level 1.

Fig. 92 Skylight Omni-Vent Fig. 93 Control panel for fan

79T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Living 6

Fan If the skylight is open, the interior can be ventilated with the 6-speed fan (Fig. 92,3). The fan is operated via the operating panel (Fig. 92,2).

Switching on: Press the On/Off button (Fig. 93,2). The fan runs in comfort mode (venting at slowest fan speed).

Venting: To increase the fan speed: Press the Vent button (Fig. 93,1). The fan speed in the venting direction increases by one level. LEDs (Fig. 93,4) show the operating levels. To lower the fan speed: Press the Aerate button (Fig. 93,3). The fan speed decreases by one level.

Aerating: To increase the fan speed: Press the Aerate button (Fig. 93,3). The fan speed in the aerating direction increases by one step. LEDs (Fig. 93,4) show the operating levels. To lower the fan speed: Press the Vent button (Fig. 93,1). The fan speed decreases by one level.

Boost function: Press and hold the Aerate button for approx. 3 seconds. The fan switches to the maximum aeration level and then, after approximately 5 minutes, automatically switches back to the previously selected level. Press and hold the Vent button for approx. 3 seconds. The fan switches to the maximum venting level and then, after approximately 5 minutes, auto- matically switches back to the previously selected level.

Switching off: Press the On/Off button (Fig. 93,2). The fan stops, the LEDs go out.

6.10.5 Skyroof skylight (partially special equipment)

Opening: Press and hold the security button (Fig. 94,1), if present. Turn all catch levers (Fig. 94,2 or Fig. 95,3) a quarter turn towards the centre of the skylight. Press and hold the security button, if present.

When opening the skylight, ensure that there are no torsional forces. Open and close the skylight evenly. If the catch lever is equipped with a safety knob, press the safety knob when operating the catch lever.

Fig. 94 Catch lever with safety knob in "closed" position

Fig. 95 Catch lever in "closed" position

80 T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Living6

Open the skylight until the required position has been reached and use knurled knob (Fig. 96,1) to secure in position.

The skylight remains locked in the desired position.

Closing: Turn knurled knob (Fig. 96,1) until the latch is released. Close the skylight. Press and hold the security button (Fig. 94,1), if present. Turn all catch levers (Fig. 94,2 or Fig. 95,3) a quarter turn towards the frame. The locking catch (Fig. 94,3 or Fig. 95,2) is located on the inside of the skylight lock (Fig. 94,4 or Fig. 95,1). Press and hold the security button, if present.

Continuous ventilation With the catch levers, the skylight can be placed in 2 different positions:

"Continuous ventilation" (Fig. 97 and Fig. 98) "Firmly closed" (Fig. 94 and Fig. 95)

To place the skylight into the "continuous ventilation" position:

Press and hold the security button (Fig. 97,1), if present. Turn all catch levers (Fig. 97,2 or Fig. 98,3) a quarter turn towards the centre of the skylight. Slightly push the skylight outwards. Return all catch levers to their initial position. The locking catch (Fig. 97,3 or Fig. 98,2) has to be moved into the recess of the skylight lock (Fig. 97,4 or Fig. 98,1). Press and hold the security button, if present.

Fig. 96 Skylight with rotary hinges, open

Fig. 97 Catch lever with safety knob in "continuous ventilation" posi- tion

Fig. 98 Catch lever in "continuous ven- tilation" position

81T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Living 6

During the journey, the skylight may not be in the "continuous ventilation" posi- tion. If it rains, the "continuous ventilation" skylight position could lead to splashing water penetrating the living area. Therefore, close the skylight completely.

Roman shade The Roman shade is fitted in the frame, at the bottom.

Closing: Hold the Roman shade in the centre of the bottom rod and carefully draw it upwards. Release the Roman shade at the desired position. The Roman shade will stay in that position.

Opening: Carefully return the bottom rod of the Roman shade downwards to the limit stop on the frame.

Insect screen The insect screen is fitted in the frame, at the top.

Closing: Hold the insect screen in the centre of the bottom rod and carefully pull it down. Continuous adjustment of the insect screen may be made by moving the bottom rod.

Opening: Carefully return the bottom rod of the insect screen upwards to the limit stop on the frame.

If the Roman shade is completely closed, heat can accumulate between the Roman shade and the glass windows when exposed to direct sunlight. The skylight could be damaged. For that reason, close the Roman shade only 2/3 of the way in direct sunlight. Open the skylight slightly or move it to ventilation position.

Fig. 99 Skyroof skylight

82 T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Living6

6.11 Tables Depending on the model and equipment, various types of tables may be installed. The tables' features differ in the following ways:

The tables' main operation is described below. The type and position of the operating controls may vary slightly.

6.11.1 Fixed table

Table leg The table leg is screwed into the floor. The fixed table cannot be used as a bed foundation.

Table-top Depending on the model, the table-top can be slid or rotated.

Adjusting the table-top Depending on the model, the table-top can be rotated, slid in one direction or slid both lengthwise and crosswise.

Moving the table-top: Fold lever (Fig. 100,1) downward. Move the table-top to the desired position. Fold the lever back upwards.

Table leg Table-top Conversion to bed foun- dation

Fixed table Screwed into the floor Moveable

Rotatable

Not possible

Suspension table Changeable

Foldable

Divisible

Extendible Hang the table-top from the top into the bottom mount- ing rail

Fold in the table leg

Change the table leg

Divide the table leg

Lift-off table Lifting mechanism Moveable

Rotatable

Lower the table

Depending on the model, the tables can be adjusted in one or more of the aforementioned ways.

Fig. 100 Unlocking of the table top Fig. 101 Unlocking the table leg

83T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Living 6

Rotating the table-top: Press the release knob (Fig. 101,1) with your foot. Rotate the table-top over the table leg into the desired position (locks in place depending on the model). Lock release knob in place.

Moving in a lengthways direction:

Loosen knurled screw (Fig. 102,1). Push the table-top (Fig. 102,2) into the desired position. Tighten the knurled screw.

Moving in a crossways direction:

Loosen knurled screw (Fig. 102,3). Push the table-top (Fig. 102,2) into the desired position. Tighten the knurled screw.

6.11.2 Suspension table

Table leg The table leg can be set up at two different heights:

Normal table height Decreased table height (when converting to a bed foundation)

To lower the table, there are the following possibilities (depending on model):

Replacing the long table leg with a short one Folding in one part of the table leg Removing one part of the table leg

Table top Depending on the model, the table top can be extended.

Extending: Pull the knob (Fig. 103,3) of the lock down and swing out the table exten- sion (Fig. 103,2).

Fig. 102 Moving the table-top (alterna- tive)

Fig. 103 Swing-out table extension

84 T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Living6

Reducing size: Swing the table extension (Fig. 103,2) under the table top (Fig. 103,1) until the lock latches in place audibly.

Conversion to bed foundation:

Lift the front of the table top by approx. 45. Depending on the model, shorten the table leg to the conversion level. Release the lock (Fig. 104,1) on the table top. Take the table top out of the upper retainer. Hook the table top at a 45 angle to the supports into the lower retainer and place on the floor with the shortened table leg. Lock the table top.

6.11.3 Lift-off table

Table leg The table leg is screwed into the floor. The table can be lowered via a lifting mechanism to become a bed foundation.

Adjusting the table-top Depending on the model, the table-top can be rotated, slid in one direction or slid both lengthwise and crosswise.

Moving in a lengthways direction:

Fold lever (Fig. 105,1) downward. Move the table-top to the desired position. Fold the lever back upwards.

Moving in a crossways direction:

Fold lever (Fig. 105,1) downward. Move the table-top to the desired position. Fold the lever back upwards.

Fig. 104 Lock

Fig. 105 Adjustment of lift-off table

85T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Living 6

Rotating the table-top: Press the release knob (Fig. 106,1) with your foot. Rotate the table-top over the table leg into the desired position (locks in place depending on the model). Lock release knob in place.

Conversion to bed foundation:

Swivel the lever (Fig. 105,2) underneath the table-top by 180 in an anti- clockwise direction. The lifting mechanism in the table leg is unlocked. Push the table-top downwards as far as possible and hold it in that position. In doing so, press from the centre of the table-top. Swivel back the lever by 180 in a clockwise direction. The table-top remains in the lowest position.

Moving the table-top upwards:

Swivel the lever (Fig. 105,2) underneath the table-top by 180 in an anti- clockwise direction. The table-top moves upwards to the limit stop. Swivel back the lever by 180 in a clockwise direction. The table-top remains in the uppermost position.

6.12 Beds 6.12.1 Fixed bed (gas-pressure springs)

A storage compartment is underneath the bed. Lift up the slatted frame to place items in the storage compartment or to empty it from the inside of the vehicle.

Fig. 106 Rotating the table-top

Before lowering the table top, remove the cushions from the benches or adjust the table top depending on the installation dimensions.

Fig. 107 Fixed bed

86 T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Living6

Opening: Lift the mattress forwards. Lift slatted frame. The gas-pressure springs (Fig. 107,1) hold the slatted frame open.

Closing: Press the slatted frame downwards against the resistance of the gas-pres- sure springs.

6.12.2 Fixed bed (adjustable head section)

Depending on the configuration, the head section of the slatted frame can be adjusted in several stages.

Raising the head section: Raise the head section (Fig. 108,2) of the slatted frame to the desired posi- tion. The support (Fig. 108,1) locks automatically into place.

The head section remains locked in the required position.

Lowering the head section: Raise the head section (Fig. 108,2) of the slatted frame until the lock is released. Guide the head section downwards slowly.

6.12.3 Fixed bed, electrically adjustable (special equipment)

The fixed bed (Fig. 109) can be adjusted in length via a manual control unit. This simplifies passage around the bed. When the foot section of the bed is shortened, the head sections are positioned at the same time (Fig. 110).

Do not let the slatted frame fall down when closing the bed!

Fig. 108 Adjustable head section

Fig. 109 Fixed bed, pulled out Fig. 110 Fixed bed, retracted

87T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Living 6

Retracting: On the manual control unit (Fig. 111,3) push the " " button (Fig. 111,2) and keep it pressed. The foot section is retracted. The head sections are raised.

Extending: On the manual control unit (Fig. 111,3) push the " " button (Fig. 111,1) and keep it pressed. The foot section is extended. The head sections are lowered.

Adjusting the head sections: On the manual control unit (Fig. 111,3), press the " " button (Fig. 111,2) or " " button (Fig. 111,1) until the desired position is reached.

The head sections remain in the desired position.

Emergency operation Proceed as follows if the bed can no longer be adjusted via the manual control unit:

Remove the connection (e.g. pin and cotter pin (Fig. 112,1 and 3)) between the push rod (Fig. 112,2) and the slatted frame (Fig. 112,4). Slowly push the slatted frame all the way forward. When doing this, hold onto the head sections of the slatted frames. Contact customer service.

6.12.4 Bunk bed

Fig. 111 Manual control unit

Fig. 112 Drive

Only use the upper bunk bed if the safety guard is fitted. The maximum permitted bunk bed load is 100 kg. The upper bunk bed must not be used by children under 6 years of age. Never allow small children to remain in the bunk bed without supervision.

88 T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Living6

Depending on the model, the vehicle is fitted with a bunk bed. The bunk bed can be used immediately, without additional conversion. Always use the access ladder provided to climb up to the top bed.

6.12.5 Pull-down bed, manually operated (lxeo)

The pull-down bed is located above the front seating group. The pull-down bed has two locking positions in the uppermost position. The pull-down bed is securely locked in both locking positions.

Lowering the pull-down bed: Remove obstacles from the space into which the pull-down bed extends (e.g. push the seats forward and rotate, remove or move cushions). Switch off the lamps underneath the pull-down bed.

But in particular with regard to small children less than 6 years of age, users should ensure that they cannot fall out of the bunk bed. Use separate children's beds or travel cots suitable for children.

Switch off the reading lamps in the pull-down bed before the bed is pushed up. Fire hazard! Switch off the reading lamps on the underside of the pull-down bed when the bed is lowered. Fire hazard! The maximum permitted pull-down bed load is 200 kg. Before commencing the journey, secure the pull-down bed. To do this, lock the pull-down bed. Before use, pull the pull-down bed into the lower end position. Ensure that the pull-down bed is not resting on obstacles such as headrests, cushions or similar. Only use the pull-down bed, if the safety net is set up. Never allow small children to remain in the pull-down bed without super- vision. But in particular with regard to small children less than 6 years of age, users should ensure that they cannot fall out of the pull-down bed. Use separate children's beds or travel cots suitable for children.

You must be able to close the pull-down bed without any great effort, so that there is no tension in the locking position. Objects on the pull-down bed can distort the lifting mechanism on one side, resulting in damage.

Fig. 113 Release Fig. 114 Pull-down bed complete with applied safety net

89T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Living 6

Pull out the release area (Fig. 113,1) at the bottom. The lock is released. With both hands, pull the pull-down bed down as far as it will go. If the pull-down bed was in the uppermost locking position: Pull the release area out again to override the second locking position. With both hands, pull the pull-down bed down as far as it will go. Make sure that the pull-down bed is in the lower end position and is not resting on obstacles such as headrests or cushions.

Lifting the pull-down bed: Switch off the reading lamps in the pull-down bed. Using both hands, push the pull-down bed upwards as far as the first locking position. If necessary, push the pull-down bed further upwards as far as the uppermost locking position. When doing this, ensure that the snap latch engages audibly in the locking bracket. Check that the pull-down bed is locked correctly. To do this, pull down the pull-down bed firmly.

Safety net The safety net (Fig. 114,2) and the retaining belts are located underneath the mattress in the pull-down bed. Only use the safety net if persons are already in the pull-down bed.

Setting up: Attach the retaining belts (Fig. 114,1) to the hooks on the ceiling.

Access ladder Always use the provided access ladder (Fig. 114,5) to climb up to the pull- down bed.

Attaching: Hook access ladder (Fig. 114,5) to the pull-down bed by attaching the two hooks (Fig. 114,4) in the holding bar (Fig. 114,3).

Storing away: Hang the access ladder (Fig. 114,5) from the holding bar (Fig. 114,3) on the pull-down bed. Store the access ladder securely.

6.12.6 Pull-down bed, electrically operated (special equipment, Ixeo)

When closing the pull-down bed, pull the side fabric panels inwards. This prevents the fabric from getting trapped in the lock of the pull-down bed.

Switch off the reading lamps in the pull-down bed before the bed is pushed up. Fire hazard! Switch off the reading lamps on the underside of the pull-down bed when the bed is lowered. Fire hazard! The maximum permitted pull-down bed load is 200 kg. Do not reach into the area between the bed and the side wall when low- ering or raising. Danger of bruises! Do not lower or lift the bed when there are people using the pull-down bed. Only lower the bed if the lowering area is clear. Bring the pull-down bed into the lower end position before use. Ensure that the pull-down bed is not resting on obstacles such as headrests, cushions or similar.

90 T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Living6

Making ready for operation

After every power interruption (e.g. lay-up over winter), the electrical drive must be made ready for operation again. To do so carry out a reference run.

Do not allow children to play with the pull-down bed. Store the remote control in a safe place inaccessible to children. Only use the pull-down bed, if the safety net is set up. Use separate children's beds or travel cots suitable for children. Never allow small children to remain in the pull-down bed without super- vision. But in particular with regard to small children less than 6 years of age, users should ensure that they cannot fall out of the pull-down bed.

Only raise or lower the pull-down bed if it is loaded with a maximum of 15 kg. This maximum load includes the contents of the wall-mounted cup- board at the base of the pull-down bed. If the pull-down bed is overloaded, the overload protection switches off the lifting motor. However, the lifting mechanism can still be damaged. Before starting a journey, the pull-down bed must be brought into the uppermost end position. No objects must be stuck between the roof and the pull-down bed.

In order to ensure that the pull-down bed functions correctly, the living room temperature must be at least 5 C.

Fig. 115 Manual control unit Fig. 116 Pull-down bed complete with applied safety net

When making ready for operation, overload protection is not in use.

If the pull-down bed is at an angle during the reference run: Immediately end the reference run. Proceed as described under "Emergency operation" (see below).

91T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Living 6

Carrying out a reference run:

Using the arrow key (Fig. 115,3) on the manual control unit, bring the pull- down bed down as far as it will go or into any intermediate position. Press button "R" (Fig. 115,2) five times in a row in 10 seconds. Bring the pull-down bed upwards using the arrow key (Fig. 115,4) and hold down the arrow key in the uppermost position for 2 seconds. When the end position is reached, a beeping noise is emitted. Release the arrow key.

Lowering the pull-down bed: Remove obstacles from the space into which the pull-down bed extends (e.g. push the seats forward and rotate, remove or move cushions). Switch off the lamps underneath the pull-down bed. On the manual control unit (Fig. 115,1), press the arrow key (Fig. 115,3) and keep it pressed until the pull-down bed has moved downwards to its end position. Make sure that the pull-down bed is in the lower end position and is not resting on obstacles such as headrests or cushions.

Lifting the pull-down bed: Switch off the reading lamps in the pull-down bed. On the manual control unit (Fig. 115,1), press the arrow key (Fig. 115,4) and keep it pressed until the pull-down bed has moved up into its end posi- tion. Ensure that there are no objects stuck between the roof and the pull-down bed.

Overload protection If the pull-down bed meets an obstacle during opening or closing (e.g. a person or a headrest), the overload protection stops the movement. For release, move the pull-down bed with the arrow key in the opposite direction.

Safety net The safety net (Fig. 116,2) and the retaining belts are located underneath the mattress in the pull-down bed. Only use the safety net if persons are already in the pull-down bed.

Setting up: Attach the retaining belts (Fig. 116,1) to the hooks on the ceiling.

Access ladder Always use the provided access ladder to climb up to the pull-down bed.

Attaching: Hook access ladder (Fig. 116,5) to the pull-down bed by attaching the two hooks (Fig. 116,4) in the holding bar (Fig. 116,3).

Storing away: Hang the access ladder (Fig. 116,5) from the holding bar (Fig. 116,3) on the pull-down bed. Store the access ladder securely.

92 T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Living6

Emergency operation If the pull-down bed can no longer be moved using the manual control unit (e.g. loss of the vehicle's power supply or misalignment of the pull-down bed), the pull-down bed must be manually operated. To do this, proceed as follows:

Depending on the model, open the flap of the wall-mounted cupboard (Fig. 117,1) and remove the cover from the access port (Fig. 117,2). Remove the pull-down bed mattress and reduce loading the storage cup- boards as much as possible (to avoid the pull-down bed from swinging back and forth) Detach the pin and cotter pin (Fig. 118,2) between the push rod (Fig. 118,1) and lever (Fig. 118,3). Move the pull-down bed manually into the upper park position and tempo- rarily secure it. Contact customer service.

6.12.7 Pull-down bed, electrically operated (Ixeo Time)

Fig. 117 Access to drive Fig. 118 Drive

The maximum permitted pull-down bed load is 200 kg. Do not reach into the area between the bed and the side wall when low- ering or raising. Danger of bruises! Do not lower or lift the bed when there are people using the pull-down bed. Only lower the bed if the lowering area is clear. Only lower the pull-down bed so far that it does not lie on any obstacles such as headrests, cushions or anything similar. If possible, remove such obstacles before lowering. Do not allow children to play with the pull-down bed. Store the key for the control unit such that children have no access to it. Only use the pull-down bed, if the safety net is set up. Use separate children's beds or travel cots suitable for children. Never allow small children to remain in the pull-down bed without super- vision. But in particular with regard to small children less than 6 years of age, users should ensure that they cannot fall out of the pull-down bed.

93T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Living 6

Control unit The pull-down bed is raised or lowered using the buttons (Fig. 119,1 and 4) on the control unit (Fig. 119,3). The control unit is protected against unauthorized use with the key switch (Fig. 119,2). The pull-down bed's height may be adjusted steplessly.

Lowering the pull-down bed: Remove obstacles from the space into which the pull-down bed extends (e.g. push the seats forward and rotate, remove or fold cushions, remove curtains and net curtains). Switch off the lamps underneath the pull-down bed. Turn key in the key switch (Fig. 119,2). The control unit (Fig. 119,3) is acti- vated. Press the arrow key (Fig. 119,4) and keep it pressed until the pull-down bed has moved down into the desired position. Ensure that the pull-down bed is not resting on obstacles such as head- rests, cushions or similar.

Lifting the pull-down bed: Switch off the reading lamps in the pull-down bed. Press the arrow key (Fig. 119,1) and keep it pressed until the pull-down bed has moved down into the final upper position. Ensure that there are no objects stuck between the roof and the pull-down bed.

Overload protection If the pull-down bed meets an obstacle during opening or closing (e.g. a person or a headrest), the motor's overload protection stops any further move- ment of the pull-down bed. If the overload protection has triggered, check the fuse of the motor control at the belt drive (see section 8.10.1).

Fig. 119 Control unit

94 T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Living6

Safety net The three safety nets (Fig. 120,2) with their retaining belts are located under- neath the mattress in the pull-down bed. Only use the safety nets if persons are already in the pull-down bed.

Setting up: Attach retaining belts (Fig. 120,1) to the hooks on the ceiling.

Access ladder If the pull-down bed is raised over 1 m, only access the pull-down bed using the access ladder provided.

Attaching: Hook both bows (Fig. 120,4) of the access ladder (Fig. 120,5) into the holders (Fig. 120,3).

Storing away: Release the access ladder (Fig. 120,5) from the holders (Fig. 120,3). Store the access ladder securely.

Emergency operation If the pull-down bed can no longer be moved via the control unit (e.g. due to loss of the vehicle's power supply), it must be operated manually. To do this, proceed as follows:

Remove the cap of the access orifice (Fig. 122,1). Remove mattress from pull-down bed and reduce the load of the storage cupboards to a minimum. Insert the crank (Fig. 123,1) provided or an Allen wrench into the accom- modation on the motor (Fig. 123,2).

Fig. 120 Pull-down bed complete with applied safety net

Fig. 121 Pull-down bed, completely lowered

If the pull-down bed is lowered below 1 m (Fig. 121), it will not be possible to set up the safety nets.

Fig. 122 Access to drive Fig. 123 Mechanical operation, drive

95T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Living 6

Turn crank or Allen wrench manually until the pull-down bed has reached the upper parking position. Contact customer service.

6.13 Converting seating groups for sleeping The seating groups installed in the vehicles can be divided into two categories:

Individual benches which can be converted into the guest bed including the driver's seat. Seating groups with a lateral individual seat or lateral bench seat, which can be converted into a transverse bed.

The following table gives an overview of the seating groups installed in the dif- ferent models and names the section in which the bed conversion is described.

The ground plans for the individual models are shown in chapter 16.

Model Seating group Table type Bed Section

T 569 Individual bench Suspension ta- ble with rotating platform

Guest bed 6.13.1

T 569 L-seating group Lift-off table Guest bed 6.13.2

T 590 G Individual bench with lateral seat

Suspension ta- ble with rotating platform

Guest bed 6.13.1

T 620 G Individual bench with lateral seat

Suspension ta- ble with rotating platform

Guest bed 6.13.1

T 660 Individual bench with lateral seat

Suspension ta- ble with rotating platform

Transverse bed

6.13.3

T 660 L-seating group with lateral bench seat

Lift-off table Transverse bed

6.13.4

T 665 Individual bench with lateral seat

Suspension ta- ble with rotating platform

Transverse bed

6.13.3

T 665 L-seating group with lateral seat

Lift-off table Transverse bed

6.13.4

T 670 G Individual bench with lateral seat

Suspension ta- ble with rotating platform

Transverse bed

6.13.3

T 670 G L-seating group with lateral seat

Lift-off table Transverse bed

6.13.4

T 685 Individual bench with lateral seat

Suspension ta- ble with rotating platform

Transverse bed

6.13.3

T 685 L-seating group with lateral seat

Lift-off table Transverse bed

6.13.4

T 690 G Individual seat with lateral seat

Suspension ta- ble with rotating platform

Guest bed 6.13.1

96 T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Living6

T 690 G Individual bench Suspension ta- ble with rotating platform

Guest bed 6.13.1

T 690 G L-seating group Lift-off table Guest bed 6.13.2

T 720 Individual bench with lateral bench seat

Suspension ta- ble with rotating platform

Transverse bed

6.13.3

T 720 L-seating group with lateral bench seat

Lift-off table Transverse bed

6.13.4

T 728 G Individual bench with lateral bench seat

Suspension ta- ble with rotating platform

Transverse bed

6.13.3

T 728 G L-seating group with lateral bench seat

Lift-off table Transverse bed

6.13.4

T 729 Individual bench with lateral bench seat

Suspension ta- ble with rotating platform

Transverse bed

6.13.3

T 729 L-seating group with lateral bench seat

Lift-off table Transverse bed

6.13.4

T 740 Individual bench with lateral seat

Suspension ta- ble with rotating platform

Transverse bed

6.13.3

T 740 L-seating group with lateral seat

Lift-off table Transverse bed

6.13.4

T 745 Individual bench with lateral bench seat

Suspension ta- ble with rotating platform

Transverse bed

6.13.3

T 745 L-seating group with lateral bench seat

Lift-off table Transverse bed

6.13.4

IT 586 L-seating group with lateral bench seat

Lift-off table Transverse bed

6.13.6

IT 590 L-seating group with lateral bench seat

Lift-off table Transverse bed

6.13.6

IT 664 Individual bench with lateral bench seat

Suspension ta- ble with rotating platform

Transverse bed

6.13.7

IT 700 L-seating group with lateral bench seat

Fixed table - -

IT 710 G Individual bench with lateral bench seat

Suspension ta- ble with rotating platform

Transverse bed

6.13.3

IT 710 G L-seating group with lateral bench seat

Lift-off table Transverse bed

6.13.4

IT 726 G Individual bench with lateral bench seat

Suspension ta- ble with rotating platform

Transverse bed

6.13.3

IT 726 G L-seating group with lateral bench seat

Lift-off table Transverse bed

6.13.4

IT 734 Individual bench with lateral bench seat

Suspension ta- ble with rotating platform

Transverse bed

6.13.3

Model Seating group Table type Bed Section

97T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Living 6

6.13.1 Conversion of semi-dinette into guest bed

Rotate the driver's seat towards the table. Push driver's seat fully forward (away from the table). Convert the suspension table into a bed foundation (see section 6.11). Remove the back cushion of the bench and lay it aside. Place the rectangular additional cushion on the table (in front of the seat cushion of the bench, see Fig. 125). When doing so, the cutout in the addi- tional cushion is located on the frontal supporting wall. Push the driver's seat towards the table until a closed lying surface is cre- ated.

IT 734 L-seating group with lateral seat

Lift-off table Transverse bed

6.13.4

IT 735 Individual bench with lateral seat

Suspension ta- ble with rotating platform

Transverse bed

6.13.5

IT 735 L-seating group with lateral seat

Lift-off table Transverse bed

6.13.4

IT 745 Individual bench with lateral bench seat

Suspension ta- ble

Transverse bed

6.13.3

IT 745 L-seating group with lateral bench seat

Lift-off table Transverse bed

6.13.4

The following representations are partly valid for different vehicles. There- fore, the length, width and form of individual cushions may differ from the ones shown here.

Fig. 124 Prior to conversion Fig. 125 After conversion

Model Seating group Table type Bed Section

98 T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Living6

6.13.2 Conversion of L-seating group into guest bed

Rotate the driver's seat towards the table. Push driver's seat fully forward (away from the table). Convert the lift-off table to a bed foundation (see section 6.11). Lay aside the back cushions of the bench. Place the rectangular additional cushion on the table (in front of the seat cushions of the bench, see Fig. 127). Push the driver's seat towards the table until a closed lying surface is cre- ated.

6.13.3 Conversion semi-dinette into transverse bed (with additional cushion table)

Convert the suspension table into a bed foundation (see section 6.11). Remove the back cushion of the bench and lay it aside. Place the rectangular additional cushion on the table (in front of the seat cushion of the bench). When doing so, the cutout in the additional cushion is located on the frontal supporting wall. Place the back cushion of the lateral seat/lateral bench on the table (between the seat cushion of the lateral seat/lateral bench and the addi- tional cushion, see Fig. 129). Fully unfold the support underneath the additional cushion with reinforce- ment plate. Hook the hooks on the additional cushion with reinforcement plate into the holders on the bench seat and place the support on the floor.

Fig. 126 Prior to conversion Fig. 127 After conversion

Fig. 128 Prior to conversion Fig. 129 After conversion

99T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Living 6

6.13.4 Conversion L-seating group into transverse bed (with additional cushion table)

Convert the suspension table into a bed foundation (see section 6.11). Lay aside the back cushions of the benches. Place the rectangular additional cushion on the table (in front of the seat cushions of the benches, see Fig. 131). Fully unfold the support underneath the additional cushion with reinforce- ment plate. Hook the hooks on the additional cushion with reinforcement plate into the holders on the bench seat and place the support on the floor.

6.13.5 Conversion semi-dinette into transverse bed (without additional cushion table)

Convert the suspension table into a bed foundation (see section 6.11). Place the back cushion of the bench on the table (in front of the seat cushion of the bench, see Fig. 133). Place the seat cushion of the lateral bench on the table. Place the back cushion of the lateral bench between the seat cushion of the lateral bench and the wall (see Fig. 133). Fully unfold the support underneath the additional cushion with reinforce- ment plate. Hook the hooks on the additional cushion with reinforcement plate into the holders on the bench seat and place the support on the floor.

Fig. 130 Prior to conversion Fig. 131 After conversion

Fig. 132 Prior to conversion Fig. 133 After conversion

100 T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Living6

6.13.6 Conversion L-seating group into transverse bed (without additional cushion table)

Convert the lift-off table to a bed foundation (see section 6.11). Place the back cushion of the bench longitudinally on the table. Place the back cushion of the lateral bench longitudinally on the table (see Fig. 135). Fully unfold the support underneath the additional cushion with reinforce- ment plate. Hook the hooks on the additional cushion with reinforcement plate into the holders on the bench seat and place the support on the floor.

6.13.7 Conversion semi-dinette into transverse bed (without bed widening)

Convert the suspension table into a bed foundation (see section 6.11). Place the back cushion of the bench on the table (in front of the seat cushion of the bench, see Fig. 137). Place the back cushion of the lateral bench on the table (between the seat cushion of the lateral bench and the cushions of the bench, see Fig. 137).

Fig. 134 Prior to conversion Fig. 135 After conversion

Fig. 136 Prior to conversion Fig. 137 After conversion

101T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Living 6

6.14 Shower connection point for external shower (special equipment)

Connecting an external shower:

Unlock and open the cover (Fig. 138,4). Attach hose of the external shower to the quick closure (Fig. 138,3).

Using the shower: Switch on the water pump using the switch (Fig. 138,2). Adjust the water temperature with the rotary knob (Fig. 138,1) as desired. Switch off the water pump using the switch (Fig. 138,2).

Shutting off the shower connection point:

Switch off the water pump using the switch (Fig. 138,2). Disconnect the hose from the quick closure. The quick closure is equipped with a check value to prevent any further water from escaping. Close the cover (Fig. 138,4) and lock with key.

Emptying: Attach hose of external shower to quick closure. The check valve is opened and the connections can run dry. Turn knob (Fig. 138,1) to the centre position. Empty the water system (see section 10.2.7).

Only use the external shower if there is a gap of at least 1.20 m between the shower and the nearest electrical device or connection. Risk of elec- tric shock!

If decommissioned for a longer time or if there is a risk of frost, drain the water system.

Fig. 138 External shower connection point

102 T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Living6

103T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Gas system 7

7Gas systemChapter overview This chapter contains instructions regarding the gas system of the vehicle. The instructions address the following topics:

safety changing the gas bottles gas isolator taps external gas connection automatic switching facility

The operation of the gas operation appliances of the vehicle is described in chapter 9.

7.1 General

Before commencing the journey, when leaving the vehicle or when gas equipment is not in use, close all gas isolator taps and the main isolator tap on the gas bottle. All gas-operated devices (heater, cooker, oven, grill, refrigerator - depending on the equipment) must be switched off for refuelling, on fer- ries or in the garage. Danger of explosion! Do not use gas-operated devices in closed spaces (e.g. garages). Danger of poisoning and suffocation! Only have the gas system maintained, repaired or altered by an author- ised specialist workshop. Have the gas system checked by an authorised specialist workshop according to the national regulations before commissioning. This also applies for not registered vehicles. For modifications to the gas system have the gas system immediately checked by an authorised specialist workshop. The gas pressure regulator and exhaust gas pipes must also be inspected. The gas pressure regulator has to be replaced after 10 years at the latest. The vehicle owner is responsible for seeing that this is car- ried out. In case of a defect of the gas system (gas odour, high gas consumption) there is danger of explosion! Close regulator tap on the gas bottle imme- diately. Open doors and windows and ventilate well. If the gas system is defective: Do not smoke; do not ignite any open flames, and do not operate electric switches (light switches etc.). Only the stipulated devices may be connected to internal connections. Do not operate any device outside the vehicle if it is connected to an internal connector. Before using the cooker make sure that there is sufficient ventilation. Open windows or the skylight. Do not use the gas cooker or gas oven for heating purposes. If there are several gas devices, each gas device must have its own gas isolator tap. If individual gas devices are not in use, close the respective gas isolator tap. Ignition safety valves must close within 1 minute after the gas flame has extinguished. A clicking sound is audible. Check function from time to time.

104 T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Gas system7

7.2 Gas bottles

The built-in gas devices are exclusively meant for use with propane or butane gas or a mixture of both. The gas pressure regulator as well as all built-in gas devices are designed for a gas pressure of 30 mbar. Propane gas is capable of gasification up to -42 C, whereas butane gas gasifies at 0 C. Below these temperatures no gas pressure is available. Butane gas is unsuitable for use in winter. Regularly inspect the gas tube fitted to the gas bottle connection for tightness. The gas tube must not have any tears and must not be porous. Have the gas tube replaced by an authorised specialist work- shop no later than ten years after the manufacturing date. The operator of the gas system must see to it that the parts are replaced. Due to its function and construction, the gas bottle compartment is a space which is open to the exterior. Never cover or block up the standard forced ventilations. Otherwise gas that is emitted can not be diverted to the outside. The gas bottle compartment must not be used as storage space. Secure the gas bottle compartment against unauthorised access. To do this, lock the compartment. The regulator tap on the gas bottle must be accessible. Only connect gas-operated devices (e.g. gas grill) which have been designed for a gas pressure of 30 mbar. The exhaust gas pipe must be fitted tightly to the heating system and to the vent and must be sealed. The exhaust gas pipe must not show any evidence of damage. Exhaust fumes must be able to escape into the atmosphere unhindered and fresh air must be able to enter unhindered. For this reason, keep the exhaust pipe and intake openings clean and unobstructed (e.g. free from snow and ice). For this reason, no snow walls or aprons may lie against the vehicle.

Gas bottles are only to be transported within the designated gas bottle compartment. Place the gas bottles in vertical position in the gas bottle compartment. Fasten the gas bottles so that they are unable to turn or tilt. Connect the gas tube to the gas bottle without tension. If the gas bottles are not connected to the gas tube, always place the protective cap on top. Close the regulator tap on the gas bottle before the gas pressure regu- lator or gas tube are removed from the gas bottle. Use your hands only to connect the gas pressure regulator or the gas tube to the gas bottles. Do not use any tools. Only use special gas pressure regulators with a safety valve designed for vehicle use. Other gas pressure regulators are not permitted and cannot meet the demanding requirements. Use the gas pressure regulator defroster if the temperature falls below 5 C.

105T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Gas system 7

7.3 Changing gas bottles

Open external gas bottle compartment (see chapter 6). Close the regulator tap (Fig. 139,1) on the gas bottle (Fig. 139,2). Pay attention to the direction of the arrow. Unscrew the gas tube (Fig. 139,3) by hand from the gas bottle. Release the fixing belts and remove the gas bottle. Place a filled gas bottle in the gas bottle compartment. Fix gas bottle in place with the fixing belts. Screw gas tube on gas bottle by hand.

Use only 11 kg or 5 kg gas bottles. Camping gas bottles with built-in check valve (blue bottle with max. 2.5 or 3 kg content) are can be used in exceptional cases with a safety valve. Use the shortest possible tube lengths (150 cm max.) for external gas bottles. Never block the floor ventilation openings below the gas bottles.

With some models, the gas bottle compartment is located right next to the conversion door. With these models, only open the gas bottle compartment when the conversion door is closed. Danger from damages.

For gas-operated units the gas pressure must be reduced to 30 mbar. Connect gas pressure regulator complete with safety valve directly to bottle valve. The gas pressure regulator reduces the gas pressure in the gas bottle down to the operating pressure of the gas devices. For filling and connecting the gas bottles in Europe the accessories shops have corresponding Euro filling sets and Euro bottle sets. Information available at the dealers or service centre. For information on the gas supply in Europe see chapter 17.

When changing gas bottles, do not smoke or create any open fire. When you have changed the gas bottle, check whether gas escapes at the connection points and unions. Use a leakage search spray to spray the relevant connection point or union. These agents are available at the accessories shop.

Fig. 139 Gas bottle compartment

106 T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Gas system7

7.4 Gas isolator taps

A gas isolator tap (Fig. 140) for every gas device is built into the vehicle. The gas isolator taps are located in the vehicle at different positions, and can also be fitted separately. Generally, you will have access to the gas isolator taps in the kitchen unit opening a door or a drawer.

Opening: Position the gas isolator tap of the corresponding gas device parallel (Fig. 141,1) to the pipe (Fig. 141,3) leading to the device.

Closing: Position the gas isolator tap of the corresponding gas device transverse to the pipe leading to the gas device.

7.5 External gas connection (special equipment)

Fig. 140 Possible symbols for the gas isolator taps

1 Cooker 2 Hot water 3 Refrigerator 4 Oven/grill 5 Heater 6 Hot water/heating

HYW08720

1 2 3

5 46

Fig. 141 Gas shut-off valves position (example)

1 Gas isolator tap open 2 Gas pipe 3 Pipe to the appliance

If the external gas connection is not in use, always close the gas isolator tap. Only gas appliances with a suitable adapter should be connected to the external gas connection. Connect only external gas appliances which are designed for an opera- tion pressure of 30 mbar. Once you have made the connection and opened the gas isolator tap, make sure that no gas is escaping at the connection point. If there is a leak in the external gas connection, gas will escape into the open air. Immediately close the gas isolator tap and the regulator tap on the gas bottle. Have the external gas connection checked by an authorised spe- cialist workshop.

107T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Gas system 7

The external gas connection (Fig. 142) is located at the rear or to the left or right of the vehicle depending on the model.

Connect the external gas device to the connection point (Fig. 142,1). Open the gas isolator tap (Fig. 142,2).

7.6 Crash protection unit switching facility (special equipment)

The crash protection unit is an automatic switching facility with a control unit for a two-bottle gas system. The switching facility automatically switches gas supply from the primary bottle to the reserve bottle as soon as the primary bottle is either empty or no longer ready for operation. The gas appliances may still continue operation. The switching facility is suitable for all commercial gas bottles from 3 kg to 33 kg. In the event of an accident or a too high angle of the vehicle the gas supply will automatically be interrupted.

When connecting an external gas appliance, make sure that there is nothing near the external gas connection that could cause a spark. Do not use the external gas connection to fill gas bottles. Observe the information stickers on the external gas connection.

Fig. 142 External gas connection, gas isolator tap closed

Do not use the switching facility in closed spaces.

When the vehicle is equipped with the crash protection unit the living area heater may be operated during the journey. If the vehicle is equipped with a panel of the DT series and the switching facility is operated via this panel, the operating unit is redundant. Also read the manufacturer's instruction manual.

108 T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Gas system7

Construction of the unit The crash protection unit consists of two flow restrictors with manual release button (Fig. 143,6) a reversing valve (Fig. 143,4) with pressure regulator (Fig. 143,2), an electrovalve (Fig. 143,5) and the operating unit with tricol- oured LED. The reversing valve is installed between the two gas tubes (Fig. 143,1). Use the knob (Fig. 143,3) on the reversing valve to select which of the gas bot- tles is to be used as a primary bottle and which is to be used as a reserve bottle.

Only the electrical functions can be switched at the operating unit (Fig. 144). The regulator taps on the gas bottles (Fig. 143,7) and the release buttons (Fig. 143,6) must be opened manually. The reversing valve provides a constant gas pressure, regardless of which gas bottle is being drawn upon. The display in the reversing valve shows the filling level of the primary bottle. The gas supply comes from the primary bottle when the display is green. When the display is red the primary bottle is empty. In this case, the reserve bottle is used for the gas supply.

Without remote display The indicator lamp on the operating unit shows the condition of the gas system. The system is okay when the indicator lamp (Fig. 144,1) lights up green. When the indicator lamp lights up or flashes red a fault has occurred. The gas supply is interrupted.

With remote display The indicator lamp on the operating unit (Fig. 145,1) shows the condition of the gas system:

Fig. 143 Crash protection unit switching facility

Fig. 144 Operating unit Fig. 145 Operating unit with remote dis- play

109T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Gas system 7

Putting into operation: Open the regulator taps of the gas bottles (Fig. 143,7). Press the release buttons (Fig. 143,6) successively for 10 seconds. Use the knob (Fig. 143,3) on the reversing valve (Fig. 143,4) to select the gas bottle which is to be the primary source of gas (primary bottle). Always turn the knob as far as it will go. Switch on the switching facility on the operating unit. For this, set the rocker switch (Fig. 144,2 or Fig. 145,2) to "ON". The reversing valve is now deaerated. The indicator lamp (Fig. 144,1 or Fig. 145,1) flashes yellow (system test) and lights up green.

Switching off: Set the rocker switch (Fig. 144,2 or Fig. 145,2) to "OFF". The indicator lamp (Fig. 144,1 or Fig. 145,1) goes out. Close the regulator taps of the gas bottles (Fig. 143,7).

Changing gas bottles: Turn the knob on the reversing valve. The display is green again. Should the display stay red the reserve bottle is also empty and has to be changed as well. Close regulator tap on the empty gas bottle. Unscrew the gas tube of the gas bottle. Release the fixing belts and remove the gas bottle. Place a new gas bottle in the gas bottle compartment. Fix gas bottle in place with the fixing belts. Connect the full gas bottle to the gas tube. Open regulator tap on the gas bottle. Press the release button for 10 seconds. Turn the knob on the reversing valve to the changed bottle. Open the release button when the display is green. Set the knob on the reversing valve with a half-turn, so that the newly replaced gas bottle will serve as a reserve bottle.

Indicator lamp Signification

Off System switched off, gas supply switched off

Green System switched on, gas supply switched on

Red Gas supply switched off, triggered by sloping position or excessive acceleration, e.g. in the event of an accident

Yellow System switched on, gas supply switched on, primary bot- tle empty

Flashes yellow Self-check, for approx. 2 seconds, after switching on

Flashes red once Valve not connected to control unit or internal error

Flashes red twice Overvoltage determined, gas supply interrupted

Flashes red three times

Undervoltage determined, gas supply interrupted

When changing gas bottles, do not smoke or create any open fire.

110 T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Gas system7

111T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Electrical system 8

8Electrical systemChapter overview This chapter contains instructions regarding the electrical system of the vehicle. The instructions address the following topics:

safety explanations of terms relating to the battery USB socket 12 V power supply the radio selector switch starter battery living area battery transformer/rectifier panel fuel cell solar installation 230 V power supply connection to the 230 V power supply fuse rating external socket electrical wiring

The operation of the electrical appliances of the housing body is described in chapter 9.

8.1 General safety instructions

Only allow qualified personnel to work on the electrical system. All electronic devices (e.g. mobile telephones, radios, televisions or DVD players) which have been retrofitted to the vehicle and are operated during the journey must have certain features: These are the CE certifi- cation, the EMC inspection (electromagnetic compatibility) and the "e"-inspection. Only in this way can the functional reliability of the vehicle be ensured. Otherwise the airbag may be triggered or interference to the on-board electronics may result.

After the vehicle is started, delays to the output or forwarding of electrical impulses are possible. The control unit of the basic vehicle does not release the D+ signal until the engine has reached full performance. In the event of a cold start in winter, this can take up to 15 seconds. For this reason, output of warning signals (such as "entrance step extended") may sometimes be delayed. The automatic retraction of a SAT antenna can also be delayed. During a storm, to protect the electrical devices disconnect the 230 V con- nection and retract the antennae.

112 T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Electrical system8

8.2 Terms

Off-load voltage The off-load voltage is the voltage of the battery in idle condition, i.e. no current is consumed and the battery is not being charged.

Closed circuit current Some electrical appliances, such as the clock and the indicator lamps, require continuous electric current, for this reason they are referred to as inactive appliances. This closed circuit current flows even if the device has been switched off.

Total discharge Total discharge of the battery is imminent, if a battery is completely discharged by an active appliance and by closed circuit current and the off-load voltage falls below 12 V.

Capacity Capacity refers to the amount of electricity which can be stored in a battery. The capacity of a battery is given in ampere hours (Ah). The so-called K20 value is normally used. The K20 value indicates how much current a battery is able to dispense over a time period of 20 hours without causing damage, or how much current is required to charge a flat battery within 20 hours. For example, if a battery can dispense 4 amps for 20 hours, then it has a capacity of 4 A x 20 h = 80 Ah. If more current flows, the capacity of the battery reduces proportionately. External influences, such as temperature and age may alter the storage capacity of the battery. Capacity details refer to new batteries operating at room temperature.

The battery must remain idle for a while before measuring. After charging the last time, or after the last current has been drained by consumers, wait approximately 2 hours before measuring the idle voltage.

Total discharge damages the battery.

Depending on battery technology, capacity details have a conversion factor of 1.3 to 1.7, which lowers the real capacity by this value.

113T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Electrical system 8

8.3 USB socket

The vehicle is equipped with a charging station with USB socket in the front part of the living area. All USB devices can be connected and charged at this socket.

8.4 12 V power supply

The charging current is maximum 1 amp.

Fig. 146 USB socket

Only connect devices with a maximum of 10 A to the sockets (Fig. 147,1) of the 12 V power supply.

Fig. 147 12 V/10 A socket

114 T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Electrical system8

8.4.1 Selector switch for radio (special equipment)

Switching the radio on and off with the ignition:

Set the selector switch to the "0" position. The radio will be switched on and off with the ignition.

Operating the radio from the living area battery:

Set the selector switch to the "1" position. The radio will be powered at all times from the living area battery.

8.4.2 Starter battery The starter battery serves for starting the engine and supplies the electrical appliances of the base vehicle with voltage. See the instruction manual of the base vehicle for the position of the starter battery.

Discharging This section contains information regarding the discharge of the starter bat- tery.

The starter battery will be totally discharged via a closed circuit current (inac- tive appliances). Inactive appliances are optional devices such as a radio, alarm system, navigation system or a central locking system. Inactive appli- ances discharge the starter battery when the vehicle engine is switched off. Low temperatures outside reduce the capacity available.

Depending on the equipment level, a radio with integrated navigation device or a multimedia station will be present, referred to below simply as a "radio". The radio selector switch is installed in vehicles with Pioneer LCD display.

Fig. 148 Selector switch for operating behaviour

The radio device in the drivers cabin is connected to the living area battery.

Total discharge damages the battery. Once a battery with acid is discharged, it can freeze in temperatures of below zero. This damages the battery. Recharge battery in good time.

115T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Electrical system 8

Charging This section contains information regarding the charging of the starter battery.

The starter battery can only be fully charged with an external charger. When the vehicle is connected to the 230 V power supply, the transformer/rectifier charges the starter battery with a float charge only. Even in mobile operation, the vehicle engine alternator has a limited capability of completely charging the starter battery. When charging the starter battery with an external charger, proceed as fol- lows:

Turn off the vehicle engine. Switch off the 12 V power supply on the panel. The indicator lamps or the displays on the panel go out. Switch off all gas appliances, all gas isolator taps and close the regulator tap on the gas bottle. Disconnect the starter battery from the vehicle (e.g. remove the battery ter- minals). There is a danger of short circuit when disconnecting the battery poles. For this reason, first disconnect the negative terminal on the starter battery and then the positive. Check that the external charger is turned off. Connect the external charger to the starter battery. Pay attention to the polarity: First connect the positive terminal "+" to the positive terminal of the starter battery, then connect the negative terminal "" to the negative pole of the starter battery. Switch on the external charger. See the instructions for use of the connected charger for information con- cerning charge period required for the battery. See the specifications on the battery for information concerning its strength. Disconnect the charger in reverse order (the negative terminal first). Connect the battery terminals again (first the positive terminal).

The acid in the battery is poisonous and corrosive. Any contact with the skin or the eyes is to be avoided. In the case of charging with an external charger there is danger of explo- sion. Sparks can be caused by attaching the battery terminals. Only charge the battery in a well ventilated area and away from naked flames or possible sources of sparks. Batteries can develop and release gases.

Before a temporary lay-up, charge the battery fully. Do not connect the battery cables to the wrong poles. If the starter battery or living area battery are disconnected, do not apply the ignition. There is a danger of short circuit from exposed cable ends. Before disconnecting or connecting the terminals of the battery, switch off the vehicle engine as well as the 230 V and 12 V power supplies and all appliances. Danger of short circuit! Observe the instruction manuals for the base vehicle and the charger.

116 T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Electrical system8

8.4.3 Living area battery

When the vehicle is not connected to the 230 V power supply or the 230 V power supply is switched off, the living area battery supplies the living area with 12 V DC. The living area battery has a limited power supply only. For this reason, electrical appliances such as the radio and the lights should not be operated for a long time without using the 230 V power supply.

Position See chapter 16.

Discharging The living area battery is discharged by the closed circuit current which some electrical appliances continuously require.

Even a fully charged living area battery can, after an extended period, be fully discharged via a closed-circuit current (inactive appliances). Low temperatures outside reduce the capacity available. The self-discharge rate of the battery is also dependant on temperature. At 20 to 25 C the self-discharge rate is approx. 3 % of the capacity per month. The self-discharge rate will increase with rising temperatures: At 35 C the self-dis- charge rate is approx. 20 % of the capacity per month. An older battery no longer has the complete capacity available.

Use only the built-in transformer/rectifier to load the living area battery. After the trip, charge the living area battery fully. Before a temporary lay-up, charge the battery fully. When the living area battery is changed, only use batteries of the same type and the same capacity. If there are several living area batteries, always change all the batteries together. The batteries must always be the same age and have the same capacity. When changing the living area battery, use only batteries which meet the minimum capacity of the charger. Observe the separate instruction manual for the charger. Lower-capacity batteries will generate a great deal of heat when they are charged. Danger of explosion! If the living area battery is replaced and the charging unit does not provide at least 10 % of the rating of a new battery, install an auxiliary charging unit. Example: With a battery capacity of 80 Ah, the charging unit must supply at least 8 A charging current. Before disconnecting or connecting the terminals of the battery, switch off the vehicle engine as well as the 230 V and 12 V power supplies and all appliances. Danger of short circuit! If the starter battery or living area battery are disconnected, do not apply the ignition. There is a danger of short circuit from exposed cable ends.

If possible, begin the trip with a fully charged living area battery. Therefore, charge the living area battery before starting the trip. During the trip, use every available opportunity to charge the living area battery. The radio device in the drivers cabin is connected to the living area battery.

Total discharge damages the battery. Recharge battery in good time.

117T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Electrical system 8

The higher the number of active electrical appliances, the faster the energy of the living area battery is consumed.

Charging The living area battery is charged via the transformer/rectifier. If the vehicle engine is not running and the vehicle is connected to an external 230 V power supply, the living area battery will be charged via the external 230 V power supply. When the vehicle engine is running, a relay in the transformer/rectifier con- nects the living area battery and the starter battery and charges them via the vehicle generator.

8.5 Transformer/rectifier (EBL 99)

Charge the battery for at least 48 hours after a total discharge.

Do not cover the ventilation slots. Danger of overheating!

Depending on the model, not all slots for the fuses are occupied. If there are several living area batteries, use an auxiliary charging unit. Further information can be obtained in the manufacturer's instruction manual.

Fig. 149 Transformer/rectifier (EBL 99)

1 Main supply socket 230 V~ 2 Block 1: Refrigerator output (D+, heating cartridge) 3 Block 2: Refrigerator output from starter battery, alternator D+ 4 Block 4: Heating output, basic light (lighting in the entrance area), entrance step 5 Block 3: Panel outlet 6 Block 5: Reserve output 2, reserve 3, reserve 4, appliance with constant positive

(e.g. satellite device, defroster) 7 Block 6: Solar charge regulator input (if fitted) 8 Block 7: Auxiliary charging unit input, fuel cell 9 Block 8: Appliance circuit output 1, appliance circuit 2, TV, water pump, reserve 1,

reserve 5, reserve 6 10 Battery selector switch ("Blei-Sure/Blei-Gel" (lead acid/dryfill)) 11 Fuses 12 Battery cut-off switch ("Batterie Ein/Aus" (battery On/Off))

118 T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Electrical system8

Functions The transformer/rectifier has the following functions:

The transformer/rectifier charges the living area battery. The transformer/ rectifier charges the starter battery with a float charge only. The transformer/rectifier monitors the voltage in the living area battery. The transformer/rectifier distributes the current to the 12 V circuits and secures them. Devices with a maximum of 10 A can be connected to the sockets. The transformer/rectifier provides connections for a solar charge regulator, an auxiliary charging unit, as well as other control and monitoring functions. When the engine is turned off, the transformer/rectifier separates the starter battery electrically from the living area battery. This prevents the 12 V living area appliances from discharging the starter battery. The battery cut-off switch in the transformer/rectifier separates all the appli- ances from the living area battery.

The transformer/rectifier only works in conjunction with a panel. The power in the transformer/rectifier (> 18 A) is divided into charging current and current to the appliances. The charging current is always just the portion that is not being used by any appliances. If the current to the appliances exceeds the current available, then the living area battery is discharged.

Position See chapter 16.

8.5.1 Battery cut-off switch The battery cut-off switch switches off all the appliances in the living area, even inactive ones. Even appliances such as the entrance step, basic lighting or the refrigerator will stop working. This prevents the living area battery from slowly discharging if the vehicle is not used for a longer period of time (e.g. temporary lay-up). If the vehicle is connected to the 230 V power supply, the batteries can then be charged from the transformer/rectifier, even if the battery cut-off switch is switched off. This also applies for charging via a solar installation or fuel cell.

8.5.2 Battery selector switch

If the battery selector switch is set incorrectly, there is the danger of the formation of detonating (oxy-hydrogen gas). Danger of explosion!

Incorrect setting of the battery selector switch damages the living area bat- tery. The factory settings of the battery selector switch must not be changed.

119T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Electrical system 8

8.5.3 Battery monitor

The battery monitor in the transformer/rectifier monitors the voltage in the living area battery. If the battery voltage falls below 10.5 V, the battery monitor in the transformer/ rectifier switches off all the 12 V appliances.

Measures: Switch off all electrical appliances that are not absolutely essential at the corresponding switch. If necessary, use the 12 V main switch to switch the 12 V power supply back on for a short while. This is only possible, however, when the battery voltage is above 11 V. If the voltage is below this level, the 12 V power supply cannot be switched on again until the living area battery has been recharged.

8.5.4 Charging the battery When the vehicle engine is running, a relay in the transformer/rectifier alter- nator switches on the living area battery and the starter battery together and recharges them with the vehicle generator. When the vehicle engine is switched off, the batteries are automatically disconnected from one another again by the transformer/rectifier. This prevents the starter battery from being run down by electrical appliances in the living area. The starting capability of the vehicle is thus preserved. The terminal voltage of the living area battery or the starter battery can be read on the panel. If the vehicle is connected to the 230 V power supply, the living area battery and the starter battery are automatically charged by the charger module on the transformer/rectifier. The starter battery is only charged with a float charge. The charging current is adapted to suit the charging condition of the battery. This ensures that it is not possible to overload the battery. To make use of the maximum output from the charger module on the trans- former/rectifier, switch off all electrical appliances during charging.

You must fully recharge a discharged living area battery as soon as pos- sible.

120 T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Electrical system8

8.6 Panel IT 96-2

8.6.1 12 V main switch The 12 V main switch (Fig. 150,7 and 9) switches the panel and the 12 V power supply to the living area on and off. Exception: Depending on the model, heater, basic light (lighting in the entrance area), entrance step, spare 4 and a refrigerator with automatic power selection system (AES) remain ready to operate.

Switching on: Press switch (Fig. 150,9) "12 V": The 12 V living area power supply is switched on. The indicator lamp (Fig. 150,8) lights up green.

Switching off: Press switch (Fig. 150,7) "O": The 12 V living area power supply is switched off. The indicator lamp (Fig. 150,8) goes out.

8.6.2 V/tank gauge for battery voltage and water or waste water levels

Battery voltage The V/tank gauge is for the indication of the battery voltage of the starter bat- tery or the living area battery. With the V/tank gauge (Fig. 150,2), note the top scale. The gauge automati- cally lights up as soon as a switch is pressed.

Displays: Press switch (Fig. 150,11) " ": The battery voltage of the starter battery is displayed.

Press switch (Fig. 150,10) " ": The battery voltage of the living area bat- tery is displayed.

Fig. 150 Panel IT 96-2

1 "ALARM" warning light for the living area battery

2 V/tank gauge 3 230 V indicator lamp 4 Rocker switch for water pump On/

Off 5 Switch for reading the filling level in

the water tank 6 Switch for reading the filling level in

the waste water tank 7 12 V main switch OFF 8 12 V indicator lamp 9 12 V main switch ON

10 Switch for reading the battery voltage of the living area battery

11 Switch for reading the battery voltage of the starter battery

When leaving the vehicle, switch off the main 12 V power supply at the panel. This prevents any unnecessary discharge of the living area battery. Appliances, such as control units (e.g. solar charge regulator, defroster or panel) or fitted appliances (e.g. heating, refrigerator or step) continue to take power from the battery capacity, even if the 12 V power supply on the panel is switched off. Therefore disconnect the living area battery from the 12 V power supply via the switch on the transformer/rectifier if the vehicle will not be used for a long period of time.

121T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Electrical system 8

The following tables will help you correctly interpret the battery voltage of the living area battery displayed on the panel IT 96.

Battery voltage (values during operation)

Mobile operation (vehicle moving, no 230 V con- nection)

Battery opera- tion (vehicle station- ary, no 230 V connection)

Power operation (vehicle station- ary, 230 V con- nection)

Danger of total discharge (battery

alarm)

11 V or less 1)

1) The battery guard switches all the appliances off (at 10.5 V).

12 V power sup- ply overload

If appliances are switched off: Bat- tery flat If appliances are switched on: Bat- tery overload

12 V power sup- ply overload

The battery is not charged by the al- ternator, the alter- nator's regulator is defective

The battery is not charged by the transformer/rectifi- er, the transform- er/rectifier is defective

11.5 V to 13.2 V 12 V power sup- ply overload 2)

2) If the voltage does not exceed this range for several hours.

Normal range 12 V power sup- ply overload 2)

The battery is not charged by the al- ternator, the alter- nator's regulator is defective

The battery is not charged by the transformer/rectifi- er, the transform- er/rectifier is defective

13.3 V to 13.7 V Battery is being charged (main charge)

Occurs only brief- ly after charging

Battery is being charged (main charge)

13.8 V to 14.4 V Battery being charged (float charge)

Battery being charged (float charge)

Over 14.5 V Battery is over- charged, defec- tive alternator control

Battery is over- charged, defec- tive transformer/ rectifier

Values for off-load voltage Charging condition of the battery

Less than 11 V Totally discharged

12.0 V 0 %

12.2 V 25 %

12.3 V 50 %

12.5 V 75 %

More than 12.8 V 100 %

Total discharge causes irreparable damage to the battery.

Measure the off-load voltage preferably several hours after the previous charging (e.g. in the morning) and not directly after a current drain.

122 T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Electrical system8

Volume of water/waste water

The V/tank gauge is for the indication of the quantity of water or waste water. With the V/tank gauge (Fig. 150,2), use the bottom scale. The gauge automat- ically lights up as soon as a switch is pressed.

Displays: Press switch (Fig. 150,5) " ": The volume of water is displayed.

Press switch (Fig. 150,6) " ": The volume of waste water is displayed.

8.6.3 Switch for water pump

Switching on: Press the upper part of the rocker switch (Fig. 150,4) "I": The water supply is ON.

Switching off: Press the lower part of the rocker switch (Fig. 150,4) "O": The water supply is OFF.

8.6.4 Battery alarm for the living area battery The red "ALARM" warning light (Fig. 150,1) flashes as soon as the voltage of the living area battery falls below 11 V (measured under operation) and there is a risk of a total discharge.

Measures: When the battery alarm comes on, switch off the appliances and charge the living area battery, either by mobile operation or by connection to a 230 V power supply.

8.6.5 12 V indicator lamp The 12 V indicator lamp (Fig. 150,8) illuminates whenever the 12 V main switch (Fig. 150,9) is switched on.

8.6.6 230 V indicator lamp The yellow 230 V indicator lamp (Fig. 150,3) illuminates whenever line voltage is available at the transformer/rectifier input.

Only read the tank levels briefly. Keeping the reading option on for a long time can damage the transducers.

If the vehicle is not connected to the 230 V power supply and the water pump is not used for a longer period of time: Switch off the power supply for the water pump. The pump relay uses around 4 Ah current each day.

Total discharge damages the battery.

If the battery voltage falls below 10.5 V, the battery monitor in the trans- former/rectifier switches off all the 12 V appliances. The battery cut-off switch is activated.

Further information can be obtained in the manufacturer's instruction manual.

123T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Electrical system 8

8.7 Fuel cell (EFOY) (special equipment)

The fuel cell consists of several components that are installed in the rear storage space (Fig. 151) and of an operating unit (Fig. 153) in the living area.

Methanol is toxic. Avoid inhaling, swallowing or any contact with the skin or the eyes. If methanol leaks, there is a danger of fire. Keep away from sources of ignition and ventilate well. Methanol evaporates without residue. Always adhere to the safety data sheet from the manufacturer. The fuel cell must not be opened. The tank cartridge must not be opened with force or refilled. Keep fuel cell and tank cartridges including empty or half-empty tank cartridges out of the reach of children. When used in vehicles, the fuel cell and the tank cartridges must be secured to avoid accidents.

Do not store the fuel cell at temperatures above 45 C or below 1 C. Do not operate the fuel cell at temperatures above 40 C or below -20 C. When the appliance is connected to an intact battery, the frost protection switches on automatically if the ambient temperature drops below 3 C, even if the fuel cell is switched off. Therefore always connect a full tank car- tridge and a sufficiently charged battery, if it is stored below 3 C. If the fuel cell freezes despite taking all precautions, leave the appliance to defrost at room temperature for approx. 24 hours in a switched off state. Then it can be used again. Do not cover the ventilation holes on the fuel cell. Danger of overheating! The fuel cell is not waterproof. Clean casing only with a slightly damp cloth and ensure that water does not enter the device.

The minimum running time of the fuel cell is 30 minutes. If the On/Off button is pressed during this period, the fuel cell only shuts down when this min- imum operating time expires. The LEDs light up on during this time. Further information can be obtained in the instruction manual for the fuel cell.

Fig. 151 Fuel cell with tank cartridge Fig. 152 Connector panel of the fuel cell

124 T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Electrical system8

The following components are on the fuel cell (Fig. 151,6):

The connector for the air discharge hose (Fig. 151,4) or the filling hole for the service fluid the off-heat tube (Fig. 151,5) electrical connections (Fig. 151,3) with data interface (Fig. 152,2), device connection (Fig. 152,3) and connection for the operating panel (Fig. 152,1)

A tank cartridge belongs to the fuel cell (Fig. 151,6). It is connected to the fuel cell via a tank connection (Fig. 151,2). The tank cartridge is firmly fixed in the tank cartridge holder (Fig. 151,1). The fuel cell automatically charges the living area batteries if their voltage falls below 12,3 V and if the fuel cell is switched on using the On/Off key (Fig. 153,8).

Operating unit The display (Fig. 153,1) of the operating unit has four lines. The first line displays the selected operating mode:

Automatic On Off

The second line displays the current operating status:

Standby Charging mode Shutdown procedure Battery protection Antifreeze

The other two rows show information such as battery voltage, charging current and filling level of the tank cartridge. The main menu can be accessed with the menu key (Fig. 153,7):

Operating mode Fuel cartridge System information Language System reset

In the event of faults, the red fault indicator (Fig. 153,5) lights up and a mes- sage appears on the display. The message consists of an error code and infor- mation on how to rectify the fault. After rectifying the fault, carry out a system reset. If the tank cartridge needs to be changed or service fluid replenished, this will also be indicated.

Fig. 153 Operating unit fuel cell

1 Display 2 Scroll upwards through menu 3 Scroll downwards through menu 4 Confirmation/OK 5 Fault display (red LED) 6 Back 7 Menu 8 On/Off

125T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Electrical system 8

Switching on: Press the On/Off key. Select the desired operating mode and confirm with "OK".

Switching off: Press the On/Off key. Select the "Manual Off" operating mode and confirm with "OK". The fuel cell switches itself off in a controlled way. This procedure can take a while. "Shutdown procedure" appears on the display.

Automatic mode Automatic mode starts as soon as the device is attached to the power supply. The device monitors the battery voltage independently. The fuel cell switches itself on automatically when the battery voltage falls below 12.3 Volts. The battery is then charged to reach the switch-off threshold (14.2 Volts). When started, the device runs through a start phase lasting up to 20 minutes. Only after this period is its full nominal power reached.

Battery protection This function prevents the battery from discharging completely when the oper- ating mode is set to "Off". Battery protection is activated automatically when the battery voltage falls below 11.2 Volts for more than 15 minutes. The "Battery protection" charge mode ends when the voltage of 12.8 Volts is reached.

Frost protection This mode is triggered automatically as soon as the temperature falls below 3 C. It prevents the device from freezing.

Replacing the tank cartridge:

Unscrew the tank cartridge connection from the empty tank cartridge. Loosen the securing belt on the tank cartridge. Remove empty tank cartridge from the tank cartridge holder. After use, firmly close the cap of the tank cartridge. Insert a new, sealed original tank cartridge into the tank cartridge holder. Secure the tank cartridge with the securing belt. Open cap and keep safe. Screw tank cartridge connection onto the new tank cartridge. In the "Main Menu > Fuel Cartridge" menu, specify the tank cartridge size used and confirm with "OK".

8.8 Solar installation (special equipment)

Observe the safety instructions for methanol.

Protect the solar collectors (solar module) against mechanical overload.

The solar installation supplies the most current under optimal sunlight con- ditions. Provide the solar collectors (solar module) open access to sunlight. Sunlight is greater in the open air than under trees and bridges.

126 T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Electrical system8

The solar installation provides an environmentally compatible power supply independent of the mains. It converts energy from sunlight into electric current. The solar installation supplies additional current for the battery and appli- ances. The solar charge regulator has an integrated overload protection and back flow valve. The charging current is automatically reduced or the solar collec- tors (solar modules) are switched off if the solar power is not sufficient (e.g. at night).

Solar installation 100 W Two LEDs (Fig. 154,1 and 2) indicate the current operating status by means of different brightness. The higher the charge status of the battery, the brighter the LED lights "100 % " (Fig. 154,1) and, the lower the charge status of the battery, the lower the LED lights "20 % " (Fig. 154,2).

Tarpaulins block out sunlight. Always keep collector surfaces free of contamination. Also read the manufacturer's instruction manual.

Fig. 154 Solar charge regulator 100 W

LED Status Signification

100 % 20 %

Off Off

Solar power insufficient

100 % 20 %

Lights Lights

Battery being charged

100 % Lights brightly Charging current limited to trickle charging current

20 % Glows weakly

127T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Electrical system 8

140/200 W solar installation

Two LEDs (Fig. 155,1 and 2) indicate the current operating status by means of different brightness. The higher the charge status of the battery, the brighter the "Batt. Full" LED (Fig. 155,2) lights up and the weaker the "Charge" LED lights up (Fig. 155,1).

8.9 230 V power supply

The 230 V power supply provides electricity for:

sockets with earth contact for appliances with maximum 16 A refrigerator transformer/rectifier an auxiliary charging unit air conditioning unit

The electrical appliances connected to the 12 V power supply of the living area are supplied with voltage by the living area battery. Connect the vehicle to an external 230 V power supply system as often as possible. The charger module in the transformer/rectifier automatically charges the living area battery. In addition to this, the starter battery is charged with a float charge of approx. 2 A. Depending on the equipment, the air conditioning unit and other optional devices are fuse-protected by their own safety cut-out (16 A).

Fig. 155 140/200 W solar charge regu- lator

LED Status Signification

Batt. Full Charge

Off Off

Solar power insufficient

Batt. Full Charge

Lights Lights

Battery being charged

Batt. Full Lights brightly Charging current limited to trickle charging current

Charge Glows weakly

Only allow qualified personnel to work on the electrical system. Have the vehicle's electrical system checked by a qualified electrician at least once every 3 years. If the vehicle is used frequently, an annual check is recommended.

128 T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Electrical system8

8.9.1 230 V connection

Requirements concerning the 230 V connection

The connection cable, the plug connectors at the point of supply and the plug connector to the vehicle must comply with IEC 60309. The standard designation for the plug connectors is "CEE blue". Use H07RN-F rubber sheathed cable with a minimum cable cross-section of 2.5 mm and a maximum length of 25 m. Earth contact connectors (safety) are not permitted. The interconnection of CEE/safety adapters is also prohibited.

8.9.2 Connecting the 230 V power supply

The vehicle can be connected to an external 230 V power supply.

Connecting the vehicle: Check whether the power supply device is suitable regarding connection, voltage, frequency and current. Check whether the cables and connections are suitable. Check the plug connectors and cables for visible damage. Switch off the safety cut-out (Fig. 156,1 and 2) in the fuse box (Fig. 156,3).

Overvoltage can damage connected devices. Overvoltage can be caused by lightning, irregular voltage sources (e.g. petrol-operated generators) or power connections on ferries for example.

The external 230 V power supply must be protected by fuse with a fault current protection switch (FI-switch, 30 mA). To prevent overheating, the cable must be fully uncoiled from the cable reel. In case of doubt or if the 230 V supply is not available or is faulty, contact the operator of the power supply device.

The 230 V connection in the vehicle is equipped with a fault current protec- tion switch (FI-switch). For the connection points on camp sites (camping distributors) fault current protection switches (FI-switches, 30 mA) are obligatory.

Fig. 156 230 V fuse box with safety cut- out and FI-switch

129T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Electrical system 8

In vehicles with central supply unit: Open the flap of the cable feedthrough (Fig. 157,2), lead the cable through the cable feedthrough into the vehicle, and connect the plug connector into the 230 V connection of the vehicle (Fig. 157,1). In vehicles without central supply unit: Open the cover of the 230 V connection on the vehicle (Fig. 158) and insert the plug connector. Ensure that the detent of the spring-mounted pivoting cover is engaged in position. Plug the connector of the connecting cable into the socket of the power supply device. Ensure that the detent of the spring-mounted pivoting cover is engaged in position. Switch on the safety cut-out in the fuse box.

Checking the fault current protection switch:

When the vehicle is connected to the 230 V supply, press the check button (Fig. 156,5) of the fault current protection switch (FI switch) (Fig. 156,4) in the fuse box (Fig. 156,3). The fault current protection switch must trip. Switch the fault current protection switch back on again.

Unplugging the connection: Switch off the safety cut-outs (Fig. 156,1 and 2) in the fuse box (Fig. 156,3). Loosen the detent on the power supply device and unplug the connection cable from the socket. Loosen the detent on the vehicle, unplug the plug connector and close the cover of the 230 V connection.

8.10 Fuses

8.10.1 12 V fuses The appliances connected to the 12 V power supply in the living area are fused individually. The fuses can be accessed in the driver's cabin, on the batteries, on or next to the transformer/rectifier and on the appliances.

Fig. 157 230 V connection in the vehicle (with central supply unit)

Fig. 158 230 V connection in the vehicle (without central supply unit)

Only replace defective fuses when the cause of the defect is known and has been remedied. Replace defective fuses only after the power supply has been turned off. Never bridge or repair fuses. Only replace faulty fuses with a new fuse with the same rating.

130 T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Electrical system8

An intact 12 V fuse can be detected by the unbroken fuse element (Fig. 159,1). If the fuse element is broken (Fig. 159,2), change the fuse. Before changing fuses, take the function, value and colour of the relevant fuses from the following specifications. When changing fuses, only use flat fuses with the values shown below.

Fuses on the starter battery

The fuses are installed in the vicinity of the starter battery. The starter battery is on the floor between the seats in the driver's cabin and can be accessed under a cover.

Fuses on the living area battery

The fuses are fitted next to the living area battery.

Fuses on the relay box AD01

A relay box (AD01) is installed in one of the two seat consoles. The relay box helps generate the signals for the chassis lighting not provided by the base vehicle. The relay box can be used anywhere. The circuit used by us can vary from the circuit provided by the manufacturer. Consequently, the circuit can also vary from the display on the relay box type plate, which the manufacturer affixed.

Fig. 159 12 V fuse

1 Unbroken fuse element 2 Broken fuse element

Fig. 160 Fuses on the starter battery

1 Flat fuse 20 A/yellow (for the refrigerator)

2 Jumbo flat fuse 50 A/red

Fig. 161 Fuses on the living area battery

1 Jumbo flat fuse 50 A/red (for the transformer/rectifier)

2 Flat fuse 2 A/grey (for battery sensor, living area bat- tery)

131T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Electrical system 8

Fuse for the Thetford toilet (swivel toilet)

The fuse is located in the locker wall of the Thetford cassette.

Changing: Open the flap for the Thetford cassette on the outside of the vehicle. Pull out the Thetford cassette completely. Replace fuse (Fig. 162,1).

FuNo Function Value/colour

B2 Cl. 15 (ignition on) 15 A blue

B3 Cl. 30 (constant positive) 15 A blue

B5 Signal D+ Internal Polyswitch (2 A)

B6 Spare 15 A blue

B7 Front side marker lights (white/red) 5 A light brown

Function Value/colour

Fuses on the transformer/rectifier

(EBL 99)

Internal charger module 20 A yellow

Compressor/AES refrigerator 20 A yellow

Heater 10 A red

Basic light/electrically operated entrance step/radio 25 A white

Spare 4 25 A white

Spare 3 25 A white

Spare 2 15 A blue

Spare 1 15 A blue

Solar 15 A blue

Spare 5 15 A blue

Spare 6 15 A blue

Auxiliary charging unit 20 A yellow

Circuit 1 10 A red

Circuit 2 10 A red

TV 10 A red

Water pump 5 A light brown

Fig. 162 Fuse for the Thetford toilet

1 Flat fuse 3 A/purple

132 T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Electrical system8

Fuse for the Thetford toilet (fixed seat)

The fuse is located in the locker wall of the Thetford cassette.

Changing: Open the flap for the Thetford cassette on the outside of the vehicle. Remove the Thetford cassette and swing out the flap in the housing panel. Replace fuse (Fig. 163,1).

Fuses for heater for waste water pipes

The fuses are located on the regulator (Fig. 164,1).

Changing: Switch the heater off. Replace fuse (Fig. 164,2).

Fuel cell fuse (special equipment)

Two fuses are located next to the living area battery.

Fig. 163 Fuse for the Thetford toilet

1 Flat fuse 3 A/purple

Fig. 164 Heater regulation for waste water pipes

Fig. 165 Fuses for fuel cell

1 Flat fuse 2 A/grey 2 Flat fuse 15 A/blue

133T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Electrical system 8

Fuse on the solar charge regulator (special

equipment)

The fuse is located on the solar charge regulator.

Replacing the fuse on the solar charge regulator

100 W:

Disconnect all 12 V appliances. Replace flat fuse 5 A/light brown (Fig. 166,1).

Replacing the fuse on the solar charge regulator

140/200 W:

Disconnect all 12 V appliances. Replace flat fuse 15 A/blue (Fig. 167,1).

Fuses for the pull-down bed

The fuses for the pull-down bed are located on the motor control at the belt drive.

Fig. 166 Fuse of the 100 W solar charge regulator

Fig. 167 Fuse of the 140/200 W solar charge regulator

Fig. 168 Fuses for the pull-down bed

1 Flat fuse 2 A/grey 2 Flat fuse 20 A/yellow

134 T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Electrical system8

8.10.2 230 V fuse

A fault current protection switch (FI-switch) (Fig. 169,4) in the fuse box (Fig. 169,3) protects the complete vehicle from fault current (0.03 A). The downstream safety cut-out (10 A) (Fig. 169,2) secures the 230 V sockets, the power supply unit, the auxiliary charging unit and the refrigerator. For vehicles with special equipment, e.g. air conditioning unit, an additional safety cut-out (16 A) (Fig. 169,1) secures the device.

Position See chapter 16.

Checking the fault current protection switch:

When the vehicle is connected to the 230 V power supply, press the test button (Fig. 169,5). The fault current protection switch (FI-switch) must be activated.

8.11 External socket (special equipment)

The 230 V socket and the 12 V socket can be used to power electrical devices in the awning.

Check the fault current protection switch for each connection to the 230 V power supply, at least once every 6 months.

Fig. 169 230 V fuse box with safety cut- out and FI-switch

Fig. 170 External socket

1 TV socket 2 12 V socket 3 SAT socket 4 230 V socket

135T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Electrical system 8

Connection possibilities TV socket and SAT socket offer various possibilities for TV operation:

TV inside the vehicle (Fig. 171,4): Connection to roof antenna (Fig. 171,1) with connection cable (Fig. 171,2) TV inside the vehicle (Fig. 171,4): Connection to external antenna (Fig. 171,3) TV inside the awning (Fig. 172,4): Connection to roof antenna (Fig. 172,1) with connection cable (Fig. 172,2) TV inside the awning (Fig. 172,4): Connection to external antenna (Fig. 172,3)

Fig. 171 TV inside the vehicle Fig. 172 TV in the awning

136 T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Electrical system8

8.12 Circuit diagrams 8.12.1 Circuit diagrams, interior

Fig. 173 Circuit diagram, interior (EBL 99)

137T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Electrical system 8

Fig. 174 Connection diagram, panel (IT 96-2)

A 1 2

2 x AMP flat pins 4.8 x 0.8 + 12 V Pump

B 1 2 3 4 5

Lumberg MSFQ 5-pin Full 3/4 1/2 1/4 Base waste water tank

C 1 2 3 4 5 6

Lumberg MSFQ 6-pin Full 3/4 1/2 1/4 Base water tank n. c.

D 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Lumberg MSFQ 9-pin 12 V indicator 12 V main switch off 12 V main switch on + Starter battery 12 V + Living area battery sensor Negative living area battery sensor 230 V indicator n. c. n. c.

138 T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Electrical system8

8.12.2 Circuit diagram, exterior

Fiat

Fig. 175 Circuit diagram, exterior

Brstner colours Connection

Left side Grey Left direction indicator

Blue Fog tail light

White Earth return

Green Back-up light

Red Brake light

Black Left rear light

Right side Grey Right direction indicator

Blue Fog tail light

White Earth return

Green Back-up light

Red Brake light

Black Right rear light

139T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Appliances 9

9AppliancesChapter overview This chapter contains instructions regarding the appliances of the vehicle. The instructions refer exclusively to the operation of the appliances. Further information about the appliances can be found in the instruction man- uals for the appliances, included separately with the vehicle. The instructions address the following topics:

heater air conditioning unit boiler gas cooker gas oven microwave oven extractor hood refrigerator

9.1 General

The heater, air conditioning unit, boiler, cooker and refrigerator are fitted depending on the model of the vehicle. In this instruction manual a description is given only for the operation of the appliances and their particular features. To operate gas appliances, first open the regulator tap on the gas bottle and the gas isolator tap corresponding to the appliance.

The heat exchanger of the Truma hot-air heater has to be replaced after 30 years. The heat exchanger of the Alde hot-water heater has to be replaced after 10 years. Only the manufacturer of the heater or an author- ised specialist workshop is allowed to replace the heat exchanger. The operator of the heater must see to it that the parts are replaced. For safety reasons, spare parts for pieces of heating appliances must cor- respond with manufacturer's instructions and be permitted by the manufac- turer as a spare part. These spare parts may only be fitted by the manufacturer or an authorised specialist workshop.

Further information can be obtained in the instruction manual for the respective appliance.

Fig. 176 Symbols for the gas isolator taps

1 Cooker 2 Hot water 3 Refrigerator 4 Oven/grill 5 Heater 6 Hot water/heating

HYW08720

1 2 3

5 46

140 T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Appliances9

9.2 Heater

Initial start-up When lighting the heater for the first time a small amount of smoke and odour will occur. Immediately set the operating switch of the heater to its highest position. Open doors and windows and ventilate well. Smoke and odour will disappear by themselves after a while.

9.2.1 Models with waste gas vent on the right-hand side of the vehicle

9.2.2 To heat properly

Hot air distribution Several air outlet nozzles (Fig. 177) are built into the vehicle. Pipes conduct the warm air to the air outlet nozzles. Turn the air outlet nozzles in a suitable position so the air can escape as required. To avoid draft close the air outlet nozzles on the dashboard and set the air distribution of the base vehicle to air circulation.

Adjusting the air outlet nozzles

Fully open: Full hot air stream Half or partially open: Reduced hot air stream

When five air outlet nozzles are completely opened, less warm air escapes through each nozzle. However, if only three air outlet nozzles are opened, more warm air flows out of each nozzle.

Never let gas escape unburned due to danger of explosion. Never run the heater in gas operation when refuelling, on ferries or in the garage. Danger of explosion! Never operate the heater in gas operation in closed spaces (e.g. garages). Danger of poisoning and suffocation! The waste gas vent may neither be closed nor blocked. Do not use the space behind the heater as a storage compartment.

If the awning is put up and the heater is running in gas operation, exhaust gases from the heater can escape into the awning area. Danger of suffocation! Make sure the area is sufficiently ventilated.

Fig. 177 Air outlet nozzle of the hot air distribution

141T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Appliances 9

9.2.3 Truma Combi hot-air heater

Depending on the equipment, different heaters are installed in the vehicles. The heaters differ with regard to the energy type with which they can be oper- ated.

Operating modes All heaters have two operating modes:

Winter operation Summer operation

It is only possible to heat the vehicle in the "Winter" operating mode. With the "Summer" operating mode only water in the boiler is heated. It is not possible to heat the vehicle in this operating mode.

Selecting operating mode: Set the operating mode using the rotary switch (Fig. 178,3).

The power supply of the heater cannot be interrupted by means of the 12 V main switch.

Variant: Heater with gas operation

The heater is operated exclusively with gas.

Winter operation The heater selects the necessary burner setting according to the required room temperature. When the required room temperature is reached, the burner is switched off. In "Heater and boiler" operating mode (Fig. 178,6) water in the boiler is also heated. In the operating mode "Heater without boiler" (Fig. 178,5) the heater can be operated with an empty boiler.

Switching on: Open the regulator tap on the gas bottle and the gas isolator tap "Heater/ boiler". Turn the temperature control knob (Fig. 178,1) on the operating unit to the desired heating level. Set rotary switch (Fig. 178,3) to winter operation "Heater without boiler" (Fig. 178,5) or to winter operation "Heater and boiler" (Fig. 178,6).

Green indicator lamp (Fig. 178,7) is on. The circulation fan automatically switches on when the heater is activated.

If there is a risk of frost and the heater is not in operation, empty the boiler. The circulation fan of the hot-air heater automatically goes on when the hot-air heater is activated and is automatically switched off and on during operation by means of a thermostat control. This puts an immense strain on the living area battery, if the vehicle is connected to an external 230 V power supply. Take into consideration that the living area battery only has limited reserves of energy.

Fig. 178 Operating unit for heater/boiler

1 Temperature control knob 2 Summer operation water tempera-

ture 40 C or 60 C 3 Rotary switch 4 Off 5 Winter operation "Heater without

boiler" 6 Winter operation "Heater and boiler" 7 Green indicator lamp "Heating opera-

tion" 8 Red indicator lamp "Fault" 9 Yellow indicator lamp "Boiler heating-

up phase"

142 T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Appliances9

Switching off: Set the rotary switch (Fig. 178,3) to " " (Fig. 178,4). Close the gas isolator tap "Heater/boiler" and the regulator tap on the gas bottle.

After switching off the heater, the circulation fan may still run for a moment to use up the residual heat.

Summer operation It is not possible to heat the vehicle in "Summer" operating mode. In "Summer" operating mode, only the water in the boiler is heated.

Variant: Heater with gas and 230 V electrical

operation

The heater can be operated with different types of energy:

Gas operation (Fig. 179,3) 230 V electrical operation with the output levels 900 W (Fig. 179,2) or 1800 W (Fig. 179,1) Gas and 230 V electrical operation (mixed operation) with the output levels 900 W (Fig. 179,4) or 1800 W (Fig. 179,5)

The combination gas operation and 230 V electrical operation reduces the heating-up time of the vehicle (only possible when the heater on the operating unit (Fig. 178) is set to winter operation). When 230 V electrical operation is selected, the yellow indicator lamp (Fig. 179,6) illuminates.

230 V electrical operation is only possible when the vehicle is connected to the 230 V power supply. Select the output level for 230 V electrical operation so that it corresponds to the fuse protection of the 230 V connection (900 W for 3.9 A fuse, 1800 W for 7.8 A fuse). When the heater on the operating unit is set to summer operation and the energy selector switch is set to mixed operation, the heater will only heat the water in the boiler. For this, the heater only runs in 230 V operation. The gas burner is not switched on. The vehicle is not heated.

Fig. 179 Energy selector switch for heater/boiler

1 230 V electrical operation (1800 W) 2 230 V electrical operation (900 W) 3 Gas operation 4 Gas and 230 V electrical operation

(900 W) 5 Gas and 230 V electrical operation

(1800 W) 6 Yellow indicator lamp "230 V elec-

trical operation"

Further information can be obtained in the manufacturer's instruction manual. For further information about the use of the boiler see section "Boiler".

143T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Appliances 9

9.2.4 Hot-air heater with CP plus digital operating unit

Operating unit The operating unit is divided into two sections:

Display Control buttons

After being switched on, the most recently set values/operating parameters are activated. If no button is pressed, the operating unit switches to stand-by mode after a few minutes. If the time is set, the display in stand-by mode alternates between the time and the room temperature set. After being switched off, the display in the control unit may remain active for several minutes since the heater is still running.

Control buttons The control buttons have the following functions:

If there is a risk of frost and the heater is not in operation, empty the boiler. The circulation fan is automatically switched on when the hot-air heater is activated, and it stays on. This puts an immense strain on the living area battery, if the vehicle is not connected to an external 230 V power supply. Take into consideration that the living area battery only has limited reserves of energy.

The hot-air heater can even run on an empty boiler. If the power supply to the heater was interrupted, the time must be reset.

Fig. 180 Operating unit

1 Display 2 Rotary push button 3 Back button

Button Button operation Function

Rotary push button (Fig. 180,2)

Turn to the right Menu is run through from left to right

Values are increased

Turn to the left Menu is run through from right to left

Values are decreased

Press briefly Selected value is saved

Menu item is selected for changing values (selected menu item flashes)

Press (3 seconds) Switch on or switch off

Back button (Fig. 180,3)

Press Return from a menu item without sav- ing values

144 T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Appliances9

Display The display is divided into four sections:

Status line (Fig. 181,2) Upper menu line (Fig. 181,3) Display area (Fig. 181,8) Lower menu line (Fig. 181,5)

Switching operating unit on/off:

Press and hold the rotary push button (Fig. 181,6) for approx. 3 seconds. Both menu lines (Fig. 181,3 and Fig. 181,5) are displayed. The first symbol flashes.

Carrying out settings: Turn rotary push button (Fig. 181,6) until the required menu symbol flashes. Press rotary push button. Turn rotary push button until the required value is displayed. Press rotary push button to save the value set. If you do not wish to change the value originally set: Press back button (Fig. 181,7).

Switching on the heater: Open the regulator tap on the gas bottle and the gas isolator tap "Heater/ boiler". Turn rotary push button (Fig. 181,6) until the heater menu symbol (Fig. 182,1) flashes. Press rotary push button. Turn rotary push button until required value is displayed. Press rotary push button to save the value set. The symbol in the status line (Fig. 181,2) flashes until the room temperature set is reached. If you do not wish to change the value originally set: Press back button (Fig. 181,7).

Fig. 181 Operating unit with displays

1 Display 2 Status line 3 Upper menu line 4 Display line voltage 230 V 5 Lower menu line 6 Rotary push button 7 Back button 8 Settings and values display area 9 Timer display

Switching the operating mode on/off means switching between stand-by and setting mode. In stand-by mode, the display alternates between the room temperature and the time that have been set.

Fig. 182 Display

1 Heater 2 Hot water 3 Operating mode 4 Fan 5 Service menu 6 Timer 7 Warning symbol 8 Lighting (not used here) 9 Setting the time

145T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Appliances 9

Switching the heater off: Turn temperature value back until OFF is displayed. Press rotary push button to save.

Obtaining hot water The operation of the hot water supply is described in the "Boiler" section.

Selecting operating mode: Turn rotary push button (Fig. 181,6) until the menu symbol operating mode (Fig. 182,3) flashes. Press rotary push button. Turn rotary push button until the desired operating mode is displayed:

Gas operation

Electrical operation (900 W)

Electrical operation (1800 W) Gas and electrical operation (900 W)

Gas and electrical operation (1800 W)

Press the rotary push button to save the set operating mode. To revert to the original setting: Press back button (Fig. 181,7).

The combination of gas operation and 230 V electrical operation shortens the time required to heat up the vehicle.

Setting the fan: Turn rotary push button (Fig. 181,6) until the fan menu symbol (Fig. 182,4) flashes. Press rotary push button. Turn rotary push button until the required value is displayed:

OFF: Fan is switched off. VENT: Air circulation ECO: Low fan setting HIGH: High fan setting BOOST: Fast room heating. Boost is available if the current room tem- perature is at least 10 C below the selected room temperature.

Press rotary push button to save the value set. If you do not wish to change the value originally set: Press back button (Fig. 181,7).

Setting the timer: Turn rotary push button (Fig. 181,6) until the timer menu symbol (Fig. 182,6) flashes. Press rotary push button. The start time is displayed and the hour display flashes. Turn rotary push button until the hour of the selected start time is displayed. Press rotary push button. The minute display flashes. Turn rotary push button until the minute of the selected start time is dis- played.

The required room temperature can also be changed in stand-by mode by turning the rotary push button.

230 V electrical operation is only possible when the vehicle is connected to the 230 V power supply. Select the output level for 230 V electrical operation so that it corresponds to the fuse protection of the 230 V connection (900 W for 3.9 A fuse, 1800 W for 7.8 A fuse).

146 T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Appliances9

Press rotary push button. Proceed in the same way to set the switch-off time, the required room tem- perature, the hot water setting and the fan setting. Press rotary push button. The timer is activated. The timer symbol (Fig. 182,6) flashes when the timer is programmed and active.

Fault display The warning symbol (Fig. 182,7) flashes in the event of a warning. The heater continues to operate. In the event of only a temporary fault, the warning symbol goes out automatically. In the event of a warning, the control unit displays the error code for the fault. The heater is switched off. Press rotary push button to restart the heater.

9.2.5 Alde hot-water heater (special equipment Nexxo)

The hot-water heater is installed at the bottom of the wardrobe or under the beds.

Operating unit The operating unit is divided into two sections:

Display (touch screen) Control buttons

The service menu contains items that generally only need to be set once (language, background brightness, calibration), as well as information for service centres (version numbers).

Further information can be obtained in the manufacturer's instruction manual. For further information about the use of the boiler see section "Boiler".

Never run hot-water heater without heating fluid. Observe notes in chapter 12. Never drill holes in the floor. This might damage the hot-water pipes.

The circulating pump must always be turned on when the hot-water heater is in operation. We recommend to bleed the heating system after the initial heater opera- tion and to check the glycol content. Observe notes in chapter 12. When the heater is turned on, it starts with the last settings used. For further information, see the separate manufacturer's instruction manual and observe the maintenance instructions found in chapter 12. For further information about the use of the boiler see section "Boiler".

Fig. 183 Operating unit for hot-water heater

1 Display (touch screen) 2 "Menu" button 3 On/Off button

147T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Appliances 9

Control buttons The control buttons have the following functions:

Display The display (Fig. 183,1) is designed as a touch screen. Touching the symbols calls up the relevant function.

Start screen The Start screen appears on the display after the heater is switched on. The Start screen contains the following information:

When no button is pressed, the operating unit automatically switches to home position after two minutes. Changes to the settings are saved automatically after 10 seconds.

Pos. in Fig. 183

Button Function

2 MENU Open adjustment menu

3 Activate heating

Fig. 184 Start screen

Symbol Signification

This symbol appears when the circulating pump is activated

This symbol appears when a switching facility for gas cylinders is activated

This symbol appears when a voltage of 230 V is present at the heater

The internal temperature is displayed next to this symbol

The external temperature is displayed next to this symbol if an external sensor is fitted

148 T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Appliances9

Adjustment menu The "MENU" button calls up the adjustment menu. The meanings of the indi- vidual symbols are described in the following table.

The values can be increased or reduced via the "+" or "-" symbols.

Tool menus The various heater functions can be called up and adjusted via the tool menus. The arrow symbols are used to change between the menus. The meanings of the individual symbols are described in the manufacturer's instruction manual.

Selecting the operating mode

The hot-water heater can be operated with the following energy sources:

Gas operation 230 V electrical operation Gas and 230 V electrical operation

The operating mode is selected from the operating unit.

Selecting gas operation: Press " " pushbutton. The pushbutton lights up green. The gas operation is activated.

Press " " pushbutton again. The pushbutton lights up blue. The gas oper- ation is switched off.

Selecting 230 V electrical operation:

Press the "+" button next to the " " symbol until the desired heat output is reached.

Fig. 185 Adjustment menu

Symbol Signification

Set the desired temperature of +5 C to +30 C

Set the water temperature in the boiler

Set the heat output in electrical operation

Button for heating in gas operation on/off

Tool menu button

AC button for switching on the automatic air conditioning (only visible when the Truma Aventa air conditioning system is in- stalled)

Button for activated functions

149T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Appliances 9

Selecting gas and 230 V electrical operation:

Select gas operation and 230 V electrical operation on the operating unit.

When the heater is turned on, it starts with the last set operating mode.

Switching on the heater: Press " " button. The Start screen appears in the display. The heater starts automatically.

Switching the heater off: Press " " button. The heater is turned off.

Heat distribution Depending on the model, the temperature of the convectors in the rear area can be controlled separately. A stopcock is located in the rear of the vehicle for this purpose. The flow to the convectors in the rear area is controlled with the stopcock.

Opening the line to the convectors:

Set the lever (Fig. 186,1) of the stopcock parallel to the pipe (Fig. 186). The wider the stopcock is opened, the higher is the heat output.

Closing the line to the convectors:

Set the lever (Fig. 187,1) of the stopcock at right angles to the pipe.

Setting the rotational speed of the circulating

pump

Select the output level during 230 V electrical operation in such a way that it corresponds to the 230 V connection protection: Level 1 (1 kW) at 6 A Level 2 (2 kW) at 10 A Level 3 (3 kW) at 16 A

If gas and 230 V electrical operation is selected and if the vehicle is con- nected to the 230 V power supply, then the hot-water heater at first only operates in 230 V electric operation. Only if the heat output is insufficient does the gas operation also automatically switch on. The gas operation is only possible when the regulator tap on the gas bottle and the gas isolator tap are opened. 230 V electrical operation is only possible when the vehicle is connected to the 230 V power supply.

Fig. 186 Stopcock is open Fig. 187 Stopcock is closed

The hot-water heater is equipped with a very powerful pump. In smaller vehicles, the pump can only be operated at full power if the pipes are bled. Otherwise, this will increase wear; loud operating noises are the result.

150 T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Appliances9

The rotational speed of the circulating pump can be set with the control knob (Fig. 188,2). At a lower rotary speed, the operating sounds of the pump are quieter. The control knob is located on the circulating pump (Fig. 188,1).

Setting the output: Turn the control knob (Fig. 188,2) in an anticlockwise direction. The output is reduced. Rotate the control knob in a clockwise direction. The output is increased.

Alde heat exchanger (special equipment)

The heat exchanger can be used to heat the living area of the vehicle during travel without operating the hot-water heater in the living area. The heat exchanger is connected to the vehicle engine's cooling circuit and thus has the same function as the vehicle heater. Heat output is set with the living area's heating regulator. The heat exchanger stopcock is located directly on the exchanger.

Turning on the vehicle heating by heat exchanger:

Make sure the heat exchanger stopcock is open.

Press the " "" button (Fig. 183,3) on the operating unit (Fig. 183). The Start screen appears in the display. That turns on the heating control system and makes the circulating pump run. Press "MENU" button (Fig. 183,2). Turn off gas operation or 230 V electrical operation (if turned on). Set the desired room temperature. To do that, press the "+" or "-" button

next to the " " symbol.

Turning off the vehicle heating by heat exchanger:

Press the " "" button (Fig. 183,3) on the operating unit (Fig. 183).

Fig. 188 Speed reduction

The heat exchanger only works when the vehicle engine is running. If the heat exchanger is not being used (as in the summer), the heat exchanger on the stopcock should be shut off.

151T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Appliances 9

Turning on: Set stopcock handle (Fig. 189,1) parallel to the pipe.

Shutting off: Set drain cock handle (Fig. 189,1) at a right angle to the pipe.

Position The heat exchanger is installed in the rear bench seat of the central seating group.

Alde auxiliary circulating pump (special equipment)

The auxiliary circulating pump (Fig. 190,1) can be used to heat the vehicle engine when parked. The auxiliary circulating pump is connected to the vehicle engine's cooling cir- cuit and thus functions as an engine heater.

Fig. 189 Alde heat exchanger

The auxiliary circulating pump works only if the heat exchanger has been installed and started, and the hot-water heater is running.

Fig. 190 Auxiliary circulating pump

152 T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Appliances9

The auxiliary circulating pump switch (Fig. 191) is located next to the hot-water heater operating unit. The yellow indicator lamp illuminates when the pump is operated.

9.2.6 Auxiliary heat exchanger (partially special equipment)

The auxiliary heat exchanger is built into the bench seat. The auxiliary heat exchanger may be used to provide the vehicle's living area with additional heat during the journey. The auxiliary heat exchanger is integrated into the heat circulation of the base vehicle and is therefore only in operation when the vehicle engine is running.

Switching on: Push the sliding regulator (Fig. 192,1) of the flow control downward to the desired position. The water circulation is open. Turn the fan switch (Fig. 192,2) for the circulation fan in a clockwise direc- tion.

Switching off: Turn the fan switch (Fig. 192,2) to " ". Push the sliding regulator (Fig. 192,1) of the flow control upward as far as it goes.

Fig. 191 Operating switch for auxiliary circulating pump

The fan on the auxiliary heat exchanger can be used for ventilation. The heat output is continuously adjusted.

Fig. 192 Operating controls for auxiliary heat exchanger

153T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Appliances 9

9.2.7 Electrical floor warming unit (special equipment)

The transformer (Fig. 193,1) for the electrical floor warming unit is installed either in the bench seat or in the bedding box, depending on the model.

Switching on: Connect the vehicle to the 230 V power supply (see chapter 8). Press the rocker switch (Fig. 194,2). The indicator lamp (Fig. 194,1) on the switch is illuminated.

Switching off: Press the rocker switch (Fig. 194,2). The indicator lamp (Fig. 194,1) on the switch goes off.

After switching off, the floor remains warm for a while, due to residual heat. If the transformer is overloaded, the overload protection is actuated. The pin (Fig. 193,2) jumps out.

Switching on overload protection:

Press the pin (Fig. 193,2) on the overload protection when the transformer is cooled.

9.2.8 Independent vehicle heater (special equipment)

The inside and the engine can be heated with the independent vehicle heater. The heating of the engine can be switched off.

On models with electrical floor warming unit, never drill holes in the floor or screw in any screws. Careful with sharp objects. There is danger of a power cut or a short circuit due to damage to a heater wire.

Do not cover the transformer. Danger of overheating!

The electrical floor warming unit only operates if the vehicle is connected to the 230 V power supply. The output of the electrical floor warming unit alone is not sufficient to heat the living area.

Fig. 193 Transformer for electrical floor warming unit

Fig. 194 Switch for electrical floor warming unit

Do not operate the heater in closed spaces. Danger of suffocation! Do not operate the heater at petrol stations. Danger of explosion!

154 T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Appliances9

The independent vehicle heater can be turned on and off manually or with a timer. The time for the heating to start can be exactly preselected from 1 minute to 24 hours. It is possible to program three switching on times, of which only one can be activated. The maximum permitted operation time is 60 minutes.

Switching on the heater for the base vehicle:

Set the heater control to "Warm". Switch on the fan. For continuous operation: Set the fan to the lowest fan setting (due to bat- tery capacity). To quickly heat up the vehicle: Set the fan to a higher fan setting. Open and close the base vehicle's air outlet nozzles as desired.

Switching on the independent vehicle heater

manually:

Press the button (Fig. 195,7). The heating mode is displayed by the symbol (Fig. 195,9). The fan will only be switched on when there is a coolant tem- perature of 30 C.

Switching off the independent vehicle heater

manually:

Press the button (Fig. 195,7). The symbol (Fig. 195,9) goes off.

Switching on the engine heating:

Press the lower part of the switch (Fig. 195,4). Engine is preheated. The fan is switched on immediately.

Switching off the engine heating:

Press the upper part of the switch (Fig. 195,4). Engine stays cold.

Setting the time: Press the button (Fig. 195,2). The time setting is displayed by the symbol (Fig. 195,8). Set the time with the buttons (Fig. 195,3 and 6).

Programming heating start: Press the button (Fig. 195,5). Set the switching on time within ten seconds, with the buttons (Fig. 195,3 and 6).

Selecting programmed switching on time:

Keep pressing the button (Fig. 195,5) until the selected programme number (Fig. 195,1) appears in the display.

Fig. 195 Operating unit for independent vehicle heater

155T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Appliances 9

9.3 Air conditioning unit (special equipment) 9.3.1 Dometic

To execute the individual switching commands, always point the remote con- trol in the direction of the ceiling unit.

Operating modes The air conditioning unit has the following operating modes:

Automatic Ventilation, manual Cooling, manual Heating, manual

Switching on: Press the ON/OFF button (Fig. 196,9). Press the "Mode" button (Fig. 196,11) as often as required until the required mode (Fig. 196,1, 2, 3 or 4) is indicated on the display (Fig. 196,20). Use the "+" (Fig. 196,19) and "" (Fig. 196,18) buttons to set the desired temperature. Use the fan speed button (Fig. 196,10) to select the desired fan level.

Switching off: Press the ON/OFF button (Fig. 196,9).

If the unit is operating, always open at least one ventilation flap.

In the winter, vehicle heating can be supported but not replaced by the air conditioning unit. Also read the manufacturer's instruction manual.

Fig. 196 Remote control

1 Symbol for automatic mode 2 Symbol for cold mode 3 Symbol for warm mode 4 Symbol for ventilation mode 5 Symbol for discharged batteries 6 Time 7 Temperature display 8 Fan speed display 9 ON/OFF button

10 Fan speed button 11 "MODE" button 12 "CLOCK" button 13 Reset key 14 Interior temperature display button

"ROOM" 15 Store button "SET" 16 Light button "LIGHT"(optional) 17 Temperature unit change button "F/

C" 18 Temperature decrease button "-" 19 Temperature increase button "+" 20 Display

156 T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Appliances9

LED The LED (Fig. 197,4) on the ceiling unit (Fig. 197,1) displays the operating status of the air conditioning unit:

Air current The air current can be directed in different directions. The distribution of the air current toward the front or back is continuously adjustable.

Adjusting air current: Align the two deflectors (Fig. 197,3 and 5) in the desired position. Rotate knob (Fig. 197,2) on sliding regulator in an anticlockwise direction. The sliding regulator for air distribution is released. Slide the sliding regulator forwards or backwards to the desired position. The side on which the sliding regulator is located is closed. Turn the knob tight in the clockwise direction.

9.3.2 Telair

Fig. 197 Air conditioning unit (Dometic)

Status LED Signification

Off Air conditioning unit off

Orange Air conditioning unit ready to operate

Green Air conditioning unit in operation

Red (continuous) No 230 V power connection

Red (flashes once intermit- tently)

Fault in the interior temperature gauge

Red (flashes twice intermit- tently)

Fault in the exterior temperature gauge

Always wait at least 2 minutes between switching off and switching on again. Otherwise the compressor will be damaged. If the unit is operating, always open at least one ventilation flap.

The air conditioning unit only runs if the vehicle is connected to a 230 V power supply. In the winter, vehicle heating can be supported but not replaced by the air conditioning unit. Following switch-on the air conditioning unit needs approx. 3 minutes until the compressor starts to run and cold air or hot air is output. Also read the manufacturer's instruction manual.

157T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Appliances 9

To execute the individual switching commands, always point the remote con- trol in the direction of the receiver.

Operating modes Automatic Cooling Heater

Switching on: Press the "ON/OFF" button (Fig. 198,7). Press the "Mode" button (Fig. 198,10) as often as required until the required mode (Fig. 198,1, 2 or 3) is indicated on the display. The corre- sponding indicator lamp on the diffusor display (Fig. 199,3) lights up. Use the temperature increase button (Fig. 198,6) or temperature reduction button (Fig. 198,8) to set the required temperature. Use the ventilation speed button (Fig. 198,9) to select the required ventila- tion level.

Switching off: Press the "ON/OFF" button (Fig. 198,7).

9.4 Boiler

Fig. 198 Remote control

1 Symbol for automatic 2 Symbol for cooling 3 Symbol for heater 4 Temperature (set) display 5 Fan speed display 6 Temperature increase button 7 "ON/OFF" button 8 Temperature reduction button 9 Ventilation speed button

10 "Mode" button 11 Display

Fig. 199 Display on the diffusor

1 Mains connection indicator lamp 2 Temperature (current) display 3 Mode indicator lamp

Green: Cooling Red: Heater

If the air conditioning unit has run in heating mode, the blower will run on for some minutes in order to dissipate the heat completely.

Never let gas escape unburned due to danger of explosion. Never run the boiler in gas operation when refuelling, on ferries or in the garage. Danger of explosion! Never operate the boiler in gas operation in closed spaces (e.g. garages). Danger of poisoning and suffocation! The water in the boiler can be heated up to 65 C. Risk of scalding!

158 T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Appliances9

9.4.1 Models with waste gas vent on the right-hand side of the vehicle

9.4.2 Truma Combi boiler

The boiler is integrated into the heater and is operated with gas (gas opera- tion) or with gas and/or electricity (gas and 230 V electrical operation). The boiler is switched on by turning the rotary switch (Fig. 200,2) on the operating unit (Fig. 200). The type of energy is pre-selected (gas and 230 V electrical operation) with the energy selector switch (Fig. 202). In winter operation "Heater and boiler" (Fig. 200,3) the water in the boiler is automatically heated up when the heater is switched on. If the heater switches off after the required room temperature has been reached, the boiler will con- tinue to heat up until the set water temperature has been reached. In summer operation (Fig. 200,1) only the water in the boiler is heated up to either 40 C or 60 C. The water is heated to 60 C in approx. 25 minutes. The yellow indicator lamp (Fig. 200,5) illuminates during the boiler heating-up period. The power supply for the appliance cannot be interrupted by means of the 12 V main switch. When there is a fault, the red indicator lamp (Fig. 200,4) on the operating unit illuminates (see chapter 14).

Safety/drainage valve The boiler is equipped with a safety/drainage valve (Fig. 201). The safety/ drainage valve prevents water in the boiler from freezing, when there is frost and the heater is not switched on.

Never use boiler when empty. If the boiler is not being used, empty it if there is any risk of frost. Only operate the boiler with the maximum temperature setting if you require a large quantity of warm water. This protects the boiler against the build-up of limescale.

Do not use the water from the boiler as drinking water.

If the awning is put up and the boiler is running in gas operation, exhaust gases from the boiler can escape into the awning area. Danger of suffo- cation! Make sure the area is sufficiently ventilated.

Fig. 200 Operating unit for heater/boiler

1 Summer operation water tempera- ture 40 C or 60 C

2 Rotary switch 3 Winter operation "Heater and boiler" 4 Red indicator lamp "Fault" 5 Yellow indicator lamp "Boiler heating-

up phase"

159T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Appliances 9

Position See chapter 16.

Variant: Boiler with gas operation

The boiler is operated exclusively with gas.

Winter operation In the "heater and boiler" switch setting in winter operation, the boiler is already switched on.

Summer operation In summer operation the water can be heated up to 40 C or 60 C.

Switching on: Open the regulator tap on the gas bottle and the gas isolator tap "Heater/ boiler". Set the rotary switch (Fig. 200,2) on the operating unit (Fig. 200) to "Summer operation" (Fig. 200,1).

The yellow indicator lamp (Fig. 200,5) is illuminated during the heating up period. When the set water temperature is reached, the period of heating up is finished and the yellow indicator lamp fades.

Switching off: Set the rotary switch (Fig. 200,2) on the operating unit (Fig. 200) to " ". Close the gas isolator tap "Heater/boiler" and the regulator tap on the gas bottle.

When the vehicle is not used for a long period of time, open the safety/ drainage valve and empty the boiler. At temperatures below 2 C the safety/drainage valve opens automatically. Only if the temperature of the safety/drainage valve lies above 6 C can it be shut again. The water pump and the water fittings are not protected against freezing by the safety/drainage valve.

The drainage neck of the safety/drainage valve has to be free of dirt (e.g. leaves, ice) at all times.

Fig. 201 Safety/drainage valve of the boiler

160 T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Appliances9

Variant: Boiler with gas and 230 V electrical

operation

The boiler can be operated with different types of energy:

Gas operation (Fig. 202,3) 230 V electrical operation with the output levels 900 W (Fig. 202,2) or 1800 W (Fig. 202,1) Gas and 230 V electrical operation (mixed operation) with the output levels 900 W (Fig. 202,4) or 1800 W (Fig. 202,5)

The combination gas operation and 230 V electrical operation reduces the heating-up time for the boiler (only possible when the boiler the operating unit (Fig. 200) is set to winter operation). When 230 V electrical operation is selected, the yellow indicator lamp (Fig. 202,6) illuminates.

Filling/emptying the boiler The boiler can be supplied with water from the water tank.

Filling the boiler with water: Switch on 12 V power supply on the panel. Close the safety/drainage valve. Turn the knob (Fig. 201,1) perpendicular to the safety/drainage valve and push the push button (Fig. 201,2) in. Set all the water taps to "Hot" and open them. The water pump is turned on. The warm water pipes are filled with water. Keep the taps open until the water flowing out of the taps has no bubbles in it. This is the only way to ensure that the boiler is full of water. Close all water taps.

230 V electrical operation is only possible when the vehicle is connected to the 230 V power supply. Select the output level for 230 V electrical operation so that it corresponds to the fuse protection of the 230 V connection (900 W for 3.9 A fuse, 1800 W for 7.8 A fuse). When the boiler on the operating unit is set to summer operation and the energy selector switch is set to mixed operation, the heater will only heat the water in the boiler. For this, the heater only runs in 230 V operation. The gas burner is not switched on.

Fig. 202 Energy selector switch for heater/boiler

1 230 V electrical operation (1800 W) 2 230 V electrical operation (900 W) 3 Gas operation 4 Gas and 230 V electrical operation

(900 W) 5 Gas and 230 V electrical operation

(1800 W) 6 Yellow indicator lamp "230 V elec-

trical operation"

161T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Appliances 9

Emptying the boiler: Set the rotary switch (Fig. 200,2) on the operating unit (Fig. 200) to " ". Open the safety/drainage valve. To do this turn the knob (Fig. 201,1) par- allel to the safety/drainage valve. The push button (Fig. 201,2) jumps out. The boiler is drained to the outside by the safety/drainage valve. Check whether the water has been drained completely from the boiler (approx. 12 litres).

9.4.3 Truma boiler with operating unit CP plus The boiler for producing hot water is integrated into the heater and is gas oper- ated, or operated with gas and/or electricity (gas and 230 V electrical opera- tion). The boiler is operated with the operating unit (Fig. 181). 230 V electrical operation is only possible if the vehicle is connected to the 230 V power supply. The operating unit is described in the "Hot-air heater with operating unit CP plus" section.

Switching on hot water production:

Open the regulator tap on the gas bottle and the gas isolator tap "Heater/ boiler". Turn rotary push button (Fig. 181,6) until the hot water menu symbol (Fig. 203,2) flashes. Press rotary push button. Turn rotary push button until the required value is displayed:

OFF: Hot water production is switched off. 40: Hot water is heated to 40 C. 60: Hot water is heated to 60 C. BOOST: Fast heating of hot water (boiler priority) for max. 40 minutes. The water temperature is then held at a higher level for two reheating cycles (approximately 62 C).

Press rotary push button to save the value set. The symbol in the status line (Fig. 181,2) flashes until the hot water temperature set is reached. If you do not wish to change the value originally set: Press back button (Fig. 181,7).

Switching off hot water production:

Turn rotary push button until OFF is displayed. Press rotary push button to save.

Further information can be obtained in the manufacturer's instruction manual.

Fig. 203 Display

1 Heater 2 Hot water 3 Operating mode 4 Fan 5 Service menu 6 Timer 7 Warning symbol 8 Lighting (not used here) 9 Set time

162 T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Appliances9

Safety/drainage valve The boiler is equipped with a safety/drainage valve (Fig. 204). The safety/ drainage valve prevents water in the boiler from freezing, when there is frost and the heater is not switched on.

Position See chapter 16.

Filling/emptying the boiler The boiler can be supplied with water from the water tank.

Filling the boiler with water: Switch on 12 V power supply on the panel. Close the safety/drainage valve. Turn the knob (Fig. 204,1) perpendicular to the safety/drainage valve and push the push button (Fig. 204,2) in. Set all the water taps to "Hot" and open them. The water pump is turned on. The warm water pipes are filled with water. Keep the taps open until the water flowing out of the taps has no bubbles in it. This is the only way to ensure that the boiler is full of water. Close all water taps.

Emptying the boiler: Switch off hot water production. Open the safety/drainage valve. To do this turn the knob (Fig. 204,1) par- allel to the safety/drainage valve. The push button (Fig. 204,2) jumps out. The boiler is drained to the outside by the safety/drainage valve. Check whether the water has been drained completely from the boiler (approx. 10 litres).

When the vehicle is not used for a long period of time, open the safety/ drainage valve and empty the boiler. At temperatures below 2 C the safety/drainage valve opens automatically. Only if the temperature of the safety/drainage valve lies above 6 C can it be shut again. The water pump and the water fittings are not protected against freezing by the safety/drainage valve.

The drainage neck of the safety/drainage valve has to be free of dirt (e.g. leaves, ice) at all times.

Fig. 204 Safety/drainage valve of the boiler

Further information can be obtained in the manufacturer's instruction manual. For more information about operation, see the "Hot-air heater with oper- ating unit CP plus" section.

163T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Appliances 9

9.4.4 Alde boiler (special equipment Nexxo)

Switching the boiler on/ off

The boiler is integrated in the hot-water heater. A separate operation is not possible. For operating the hot-water heater, see section 9.2.5.

Filling/emptying the boiler The boiler can be supplied with water from the water tank.

Filling the boiler with water: Close the drain cock(s). Position the rocking lever (Fig. 205,1) horizontally. Switch on 12 V power supply on the panel. Set all the water taps to "Hot" and open them. The water pump is turned on. The warm water pipes are filled with water. Keep the taps open until the water flowing out of the taps has no bubbles in it. This is the only way to ensure that the boiler is full of water. Close all water taps.

Emptying the boiler: Switch off boiler. Open all water taps and set to the central position. Open drain cock(s) (Fig. 205). To do so, set the rocking lever (Fig. 205,1) in a vertical position. The boiler is drained to the outside. Check whether the water has been drained completely from the boiler (approx. 10 litres).

Position of the drain cock(s)

See chapter 16.

Depending on the model, the vehicle is fitted with one or two drain cocks.

Fig. 205 Drain cock

For further information, see the separate manufacturer's instruction manual and observe the maintenance instructions found in chapter 12.

164 T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Appliances9

9.5 Cooker

9.5.1 Gas cooker

The vehicle kitchen unit is fitted with a three-burner gas cooker. The operating controls for the gas cooker are located directly at the gas cooker.

Manual ignition The gas cooker must be lit manually.

Never let gas escape unburned due to danger of explosion. Before using the cooker make sure that there is sufficient ventilation. Open windows or the skylight. Do not use gas cooker or gas oven for heating. Do not fit any curtains in the immediate proximity of the cooker. Fire hazard! Always protect your hands with cooking gloves or potholders when han- dling hot pots, pans and similar items. There is a risk of injury.

During activation and operation of the gas cooker, no flammable objects or highly inflammable objects such as dishcloths, napkins etc. must be near the gas cooker. Fire hazard! The process of ignition must be visible from above and must not be cov- ered by cooking pans placed on the cooker. If there is a flame protection, always put it up when using the gas cooker. The gas cooker lid is held closed by a spring. When closing there is danger of getting injured!

Do not place hot objects such as cooking pans on the sink cover. The plastic can become deformed. Do not use the glass gas cooker lid as a hob. Do not close the gas cooker lid while the gas cooker is in operation. Do not apply pressure on the gas cooker lid when it is closed. Do not place hot cooking pans on the gas cooker lid. Keep the gas cooker lid open after cooking until the burners are cool. Oth- erwise the glass plate could shatter.

Only use pots and pans whose diameter is appropriate for the gas cooker burners. When the flame goes out, the thermocouple automatically cuts the gas supply. Further information can be obtained in the device manufacturer's instruc- tion manual.

165T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Appliances 9

Switching on: Open the regulator tap on the gas bottle and the gas isolator tap "Cooker". Open the gas cooker lid (Fig. 206,1). Turn the control knob (Fig. 206,2) on the burner you wish to use to the igni- tion position (large flame). Press the control knob down and hold it. Light the burner with a gas lighter, a match or other suitable means of lighting. Once the flame is burning, the control knob must be held down for 10 to 15 seconds, until the thermocouple automatically keeps the gas supply open. Release the control knob and turn to the desired setting. If ignition is unsuccessful, repeat the entire procedure.

Switching off: Turn the control knob to the 0-position. The flame fades. Close the gas isolator tap "Cooker" and the regulator tap on the gas bottle.

Electronic ignition The gas cooker is equipped with a lighting knob.

Switching on: Open the regulator tap on the gas bottle and the gas isolator tap "Cooker". Open the gas cooker lid. Press the control knob (Fig. 207,1) of the desired burner and turn it to the ignition position (large flame). Press the control knob down and hold it. Press the rocker switch (Fig. 207,2). Ignition sparks are generated at the burner. Once the flame is burning, the control knob must be held down for 10 to 15 seconds, until the thermocouple automatically keeps the gas supply open.

Fig. 206 Gas cooker

Fig. 207 Operating controls for gas cooker

166 T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Appliances9

Release the control knob and turn to the desired setting. If ignition is unsuccessful, repeat the entire procedure.

Switching off: Turn the control knob to the 0-position. The flame fades. Close the gas isolator tap "Cooker" and the regulator tap on the gas bottle.

9.5.2 Gas oven (Dometic) (special equipment)

The gas oven is equipped with electronic ignition.

Keep the ventilation openings on the gas oven open at all times. There must be no flammable or highly inflammable objects such as dish- cloths, clothes, etc. near the gas oven when it is being lit or during oper- ation. Fire hazard! If ignition has not taken place, repeat the entire procedure. If necessary, check if there is gas and/or current in the gas oven. If the gas oven still does not work, close the gas isolator tap and notify your service centre. If the burner flame is accidentally extinguished, turn the control knob to " " and leave the burner off for at least 1 minute. Then ignite it again. Parts of the gas oven become very hot during operation. Never touch hot parts with bare hands. Place the meals, wire rack and drip pan into the gas oven so that they do not come into contact with the flame. Only ignite the oven and grill when the oven door is open. Always leave the oven door half open when grilling. Do not use the grill for longer than 25 minutes.

There are two different versions of the gas oven, depending on the model. Although their appearance is not identical, operation is the same for both. Depending on the model the gas oven may come equipped with a grill. Before using the gas oven for the first time run it for 30 minutes at max- imum temperature without any contents. When the flame goes out, the thermocouple automatically cuts the gas supply. A safety switch prevents ignition when the oven door is closed. If the ignition procedure fails repeatedly, turn the control knob to " ". Wait at least 1 minute and then ignite the gas oven manually. If necessary, check if there is gas and/or current in the gas oven. If the gas oven still does not work, close the gas isolator tap and notify your service centre. Further information can be obtained in the manufacturer's instruction manual.

167T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Appliances 9

The meaning of the symbols on the control knobs (Fig. 208,1 and Fig. 209,1) of the two gas ovens is identical:

and mean oven and mean grill.

Switching the oven on: Open the regulator tap on the gas bottle and the gas isolator tap "Oven". Open oven door completely. The safety switch then releases the ignition. Press and hold control knob and turn it anti-clockwise to the required set- ting. Keep control knob pressed for a further 5-10 seconds. Ignition will take place automatically. Release control knob. Close oven door.

Switching the grill on: Open the regulator tap on the gas bottle and the gas isolator tap "Oven". Open the oven door to at least the first locking position (approx. 45). Press and hold control knob and turn it clockwise to the grill symbol. Keep control knob pressed for a further 5-10 seconds. Ignition will take place automatically. Release control knob.

Switching off: Turn the control knob to " ". The flame fades. Close the gas isolator tap "Oven" and the regulator tap on the gas bottle.

9.5.3 Microwave oven (special equipment)

Fig. 208 Gas oven (Dometic TecTower) Fig. 209 Gas oven (Dometic)

Do not close the oven door when grilling.

Only qualified personnel may repair the microwave oven. Improper repairs can cause major risks to the user. The protection device against the escape of microwave energy should never be removed. Use the microwave oven only if it has been properly installed. Only use the microwave oven when the door seal is free of damage. Never leave the microwave oven unattended when it is in operation. If there is smoke, keep the microwave oven closed, switch it off and interrupt the power supply.

168 T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Appliances9

Switching on: Press the key (Fig. 210,3) to open the door and place food into the cooking area. Close the door. A clicking noise can be heard when it engages. Select the output on the control knob (Fig. 210,1). Select the cooking time with the control knob (Fig. 210,2). Cooking begins.

The end of the cooking process is signaled by a signal tone. The microwave oven will switch off automatically.

Switching off: Press the key (Fig. 210,3) to open the door and take out the food.

9.5.4 Extractor hood (special equipment)

The cooking area is equipped with an extractor hood. The powerful fan blows the cooking steam directly outside. To switch on the extractor hood, press the right flip switch (Fig. 211,2). Use the left flip switch (Fig. 211,1) to switch on the two lights in the extractor hood.

Operate the microwave oven only with the rotary plate and the rotary cross in place. Use only crockery suitable for microwave use. Only operate the microwave with appropriate contents and never run it empty.

For cooking times under 2 minutes: First twist the cooking time control knob past "2" and then twist it back to the desired cooking time. Further information can be obtained in the manufacturer's instruction manual.

Fig. 210 Operating controls for micro- wave oven

Fig. 211 Extractor hood

169T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Appliances 9

9.6 Refrigerator During the journey, only operate the refrigerator via the 12 V power supply. At high ambient temperatures the refrigerator is unable to reach its full cooling power. At high external temperatures, the full cooling power of the cooling unit is only guaranteed if the refrigerator is ventilated sufficiently. In order to achieve a better ventilation the refrigerator ventilation grill can be removed. If the refrigerator is to be operated at low external temperatures, the manufac- turer recommends the use of a winter cover for the refrigerator ventilation grills. In this, the following applies:

9.6.1 Refrigerator ventilation grill

Removal: Depending on the design, push the sliding trap (Fig. 212,1) upwards or turn the screw (Fig. 213,1) a quarter turn using a coin. Remove refrigerator ventilation grill.

Temperature Cover

Below 10 C Winter cover (only lower ventilation grill for refrigerators with capacity below 130 litres)

Below -5 C Isolated winter cover (only lower ventilation grill)

If the temperatures are higher than the indicated values, it is absolutely necessary to remove the winter cover. Otherwise the vehicle could be dam- aged.

When leaving the vehicle, always mount the refrigerator ventilation grill. Otherwise water can enter during rain. The cooling power of the refrigerator depends on the vehicle setup. The cooling power can decrease if the vehicle is inclined by 5 or more. There- fore, always park the vehicle on level ground. Absorption refrigerators operate at normal room temperature (approx. 21 C) within the specified temperature range. At significantly higher ambient temperatures (> 30 C), the cooling power is reduced. This is because the "evaporating temperature" of the refrigerant is lower in absorption refrigerators than it is in compressor refrigerators.

Fig. 212 Refrigerator ventilation grill (with sliding trap)

Fig. 213 Refrigerator ventilation grill (with screw)

170 T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Appliances9

Removal: Move the locking device (Fig. 214,1 or Fig. 215,1) to the middle. Remove refrigerator ventilation grill.

9.6.2 Operation (Dometic 8 series with manual power selection MES)

Operating modes The refrigerator has 3 operating modes:

Gas operation 230 V AC 12 V DC

The operating mode is set with the operating controls on the refrigerator panel.

Gas operation

Fig. 214 Refrigerator ventilation grill (Thetford large)

Fig. 215 Refrigerator ventilation grill (Thetford small)

Select only one energy source. The refrigerator always requires a 12 V control voltage, regardless of which type of energy it is using. The control voltage is present as soon as the transformer/rectifier is switched on. Therefore the closed circuit current always flows even if the refrigerator is switched off. Always switch off the transformer/rectifier for a temporary lay-up.

Never let gas escape unburned due to danger of explosion.

171T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Appliances 9

Switching on: Open the regulator tap on the gas bottle and the gas isolator tap "Refriger- ator". Press and hold the On/Off button (Fig. 216,1) for about 2 seconds. The refrigerator switches itself on. The button of the operating mode chosen most recently lights up. If necessary, press the button for the operating mode "Gas" (Fig. 216,3). The button lights up. Gas supply is open. Ignition will take place automati- cally. A ticking sound can be heard until ignition has been completed suc- cessfully. Use the temperature range selection button (Fig. 216,5) to set the refriger- ating temperature.

Switching off: Press and hold the On/Off button for about 2 seconds. Refrigerator is switched off. Close the gas isolator tap "Refrigerator" and the regulator tap on the gas bottle.

Electrical operation

The refrigerator can be operated with the following voltages:

230 V AC 12 V DC

Switching the 230 V operation on:

Press and hold the On/Off button (Fig. 216,1) for about 2 seconds. The refrigerator switches itself on. The button of the operating mode chosen most recently lights up. If necessary, press the button for the operating mode "230 V" (Fig. 216,2). The button lights up. Use the temperature range selection button (Fig. 216,5) to set the refriger- ating temperature.

Fig. 216 Operating controls for the refrigerator (Dometic 8 series with MES)

1 On/Off button 2 Illuminated button for "230 V" mode 3 Illuminated button for "Gas" mode 4 Illuminated button for "12 V" mode 5 Temperature range selection button 6 Temperature ranges display 7 Illuminated "Fault" button

Close the gas isolator tap "Refrigerator" when the refrigerator is operated electrically.

172 T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Appliances9

Switching the 230 V operation off:

Press and hold the On/Off button for about 2 seconds. Refrigerator is switched off.

Switching the 12 V operation on:

Press and hold the On/Off button (Fig. 216,1) for about 2 seconds. The refrigerator switches itself on. The button of the operating mode chosen most recently lights up. If necessary, press the button for the operating mode "12 V" (Fig. 216,4). The button lights up. Use the temperature range selection button (Fig. 216,5) to set the refriger- ating temperature.

Switching the 12 V operation off:

Press and hold the On/Off button for about 2 seconds. Refrigerator is switched off.

When operated with 12 V, the refrigerator draws power only from the starter battery of the vehicle. The starter battery only supplies the refrigerator with 12 V when the vehicle engine is running. When the vehicle engine is not run- ning, the refrigerator is cut off from the power supply in the living area. For this reason, change over to gas operation during prolonged driving breaks.

9.6.3 Operation (Dometic RMD 8 series with automatic power selection and frame heater)

Operating modes The refrigerator is equipped with automatic power selection (AES). If the selector switch is set to "AES", the AES automatically selects the optimum energy source and regulates the refrigerator operation. Manual intervention to select the type of power is possible but not required. The AES selects from the following types of power:

12 V solar (special equipment) 230 V AC Gas 12 V DC

Choosing the available energy source highest on the list.

Further information can be obtained from the separate instruction manual "Refrigerator".

The refrigerator always requires a 12 V control voltage, regardless of which type of energy it is using. The control voltage is drawn from the living room area battery. Therefore the closed circuit current always flows even if the refrigerator is switched off. Always disconnect the refrigerator from the bat- tery for a temporary lay-up.

173T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Appliances 9

230 V operation If the "AES" operating mode is set and the 230 V supply is connected, the AES selects this energy source first.

12 V operation If the "AES" operating mode is set, the AES only selects 12 V operation if the vehicle engine is running (alternator signal D+).

Gas operation

If the "AES" operating mode is set, the 230 V supply is not connected and the vehicle engine is switched off, the AES selects the gas supply. When selecting gas operation the ignition fuse is opened automatically so gas can get into the burner. At the same time the electronic ignition is activated. If the gas flame is extinguished, e.g. by blast of wind, the ignition is activated imme- diately and re-ignites the gas. If there is a fault in gas operation, the illuminated buttons "Gas" (Fig. 217,5) and "Fault" (Fig. 217,11) flash. The "Fault" indicator lamp (Fig. 217,1) lights up and an alarm sounds for 20 seconds.

Change-over between energy sources

Fig. 217 Operating controls for the refrigerator (Dometic RMD)

1 "Fault" indicator lamp (visible when the refrigerator door is closed) 2 "Operating" indicator lamp (visible when the refrigerator door is closed) 3 On/Off button 4 Illuminated button for "230 V" mode 5 Illuminated button for "Gas" mode 6 Illuminated button for "12 V" mode 7 Illuminated button for "AES" mode (automatic power selection) 8 Illuminated button for frame heater 9 Temperature range selection button

10 Temperature ranges display 11 Illuminated button for "Fault"/"Reset" in gas mode

Never let gas escape unburned due to danger of explosion.

If LPG is used, the gas burner must be cleaned more frequently. Open the regulator tap on the gas bottle and the gas isolator tap "Refriger- ator".

Open flames are prohibited at petrol stations. If the stop takes longer than 15 minutes, the refrigerator has to be turned off at the energy selector switch.

174 T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Appliances9

When changing over from 230 V or 12 V to gas, delay times are built into the AES. For example, when changing over from 12 V operation to gas operation, a 15 minute delay is built in the AES. This prevents a change-over to gas oper- ation when the vehicle is stopped briefly and the engine is switched off (e.g. stop to fill tank).

Refrigerating temperature control

When turned on the first time the refrigerator automatically selects the middle thermostat position. This position can be adjusted manually using the temper- ature range selection button (Fig. 217,9). The indicator lamps (Fig. 217,10) show the selected thermostat position. The refrigerating temperature for all three types of power is set with the temperature range selection button. It takes a few hours till the refrigerator reaches its normal operating temperature. When changing over the operating mode the thermostat setting will be main- tained. The refrigerating temperature is retained regardless of the type of power being used.

Frame heater (FH)

The following options are available for operating times of the frame heater:

2 hours 5 hours Continuous operation (switched on for 30 minutes, then for 5 minutes on and 5 minutes off in alternating intervals)

Setting operating time: Switch on the frame heater for a 2 hour period: Push button (Fig. 217,8) once. One bar is lit up on the temperature range display (Fig. 217,10). Switch on the frame heater for a 5 hour period: Push button (Fig. 217,8) twice. Two bars are lit up on the temperature range display (Fig. 217,10). Setting frame heater for continuous operation: Push button (Fig. 217,8) three times. Three bars are lit up on the temperature range display (Fig. 217,10).

The temperature range display (Fig. 217,10) shows the operating time of the frame heater for several seconds. High external temperatures and high humidity can cause drops of water to form on the metal frame of the freezer compartment. This is why the refriger- ator is equipped with a frame heater for the freezer compartment. If the tem- perature and humidity are high, switch on the frame heater by pressing the button (Fig. 217,8). This prevents corrosion. If the frame heater is switched on, the illuminated button (Fig. 217,8) is lit.

Manual operation

Switching on: Open the regulator tap on the gas bottle and the gas isolator tap "Refriger- ator". Press and hold the On/Off button (Fig. 217,3) for about 2 seconds. The refrigerator switches on and the previously set power type or "AES" is dis- played.

When the frame heater is turned on, it uses about 4 Watts, including in gas operation. To avoid running down the living area battery, in gas mode refrain from running the frame heater in continuous operation or turn the frame heater off entirely.

175T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Appliances 9

Press the button for the desired energy type or the automatic "AES" mode. Use the temperature range selection button (Fig. 217,9) to set the refriger- ating temperature. The indicator lamps (Fig. 217,10) show the selected thermostat position.

When operated with 12 V, the refrigerator draws power only from the living area battery.

Switching off: Press and hold the On/Off button (Fig. 217,3) for about 2 seconds. The refrigerator switches off and no displays are lit. Close the gas isolator tap "Refrigerator" and the regulator tap on the gas bottle.

Additional functions In automatic mode, "AES" and the type of power currently in use are dis- played. The brightness of the display is reduced after a few seconds if no other buttons are pressed. When the door is opened, the interior light goes out after 2 minutes. If the door is open for longer than 2 minutes, the operating indicator lamp flashes and a warning signal sounds.

9.6.4 Operation (Thetford with manual power selection)

Operating modes The refrigerator has 3 operating modes:

Gas operation 230 V operation 12 V operation

If the refrigerator is manually set to "12 V", it will constantly consume cur- rent. Therefore, switch over to gas operation when the vehicle engine is not running, and the vehicle is not connected to the 230 V power supply.

Further information can be obtained from the separate instruction manual "Refrigerator".

The refrigerator starts when it is switched on with the setting selected last. Flashing lamps on the operating unit indicate a fault (see section 14.8).

Fig. 218 Operating controls for the refrigerator

1 On/Off button 2 Arrow keys 3 Confirmation button 4 Indicator for operating mode (230 V operation/12 V operation/gas operation) 5 Indicator for cooling level (lowest - highest cooling level)

176 T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Appliances9

The current operating mode is indicated by an illuminated symbol (Fig. 218,4) on the operating unit.

Refrigerating temperature control

When turned on the refrigerator automatically selects the thermostat position selected last. This position can be adjusted manually by using the arrow keys (Fig. 218,2). The illuminated bars of the cooling level indicator (Fig. 218,5) show the selected thermostat position. The refrigerating temperature for the three types of energy is set with the arrow keys. It takes a few hours till the refrigerator reaches its normal operating temperature. When changing over the operating mode the thermostat setting will be maintained. The refrigerating temperature is retained regardless of the type of power being used.

Gas operation

Switching on: Open the regulator tap on the gas bottle and the gas isolator tap "Refriger- ator". Press and hold the On/Off button (Fig. 218,1) for 1 second. Button (Fig. 218,1) lights up green. To save energy, after approximately 10 sec- onds the display is dimmed. Press confirmation button (Fig. 218,3). The current setting of the operating is displayed. If the operating mode gas is not set: To change the setting, press and hold the confirmation button (Fig. 218,3) for approximately 2 seconds. Using the arrow keys (Fig. 218,2) select the operating mode gas. Gas supply is open. Ignition will take place automatically. A ticking sound can be heard until ignition has been completed successfully. Press and hold the confirmation button (Fig. 218,3) for about 2 seconds. Press confirmation button (Fig. 218,3) again. The current cooling level is shown by the illuminated bars (Fig. 218,5). To change the setting, press the arrow keys (Fig. 218,2) until the desired setting is displayed.

Switching off: Press and hold the On/Off button (Fig. 218,1) for about 2 seconds. All lights go out. Refrigerator is switched off. Close the gas isolator tap "Refrigerator" and the regulator tap on the gas bottle.

The refrigerator always requires a 12 V control voltage, regardless of which type of energy it is using. The control voltage is present as soon as the transformer/rectifier is switched on. Therefore the closed circuit current always flows even if the refrigerator is switched off. Always switch off the transformer/rectifier for a temporary lay-up.

We recommend that the refrigerator be operated in 12 V operation when the vehicle is in motion. When the vehicle is stationary, we advise you to operate the refrigerator in 230 V operation, assuming a 230 V connection is available. In all other cases, the refrigerator can be operated in gas operation.

Never let gas escape unburned due to danger of explosion.

177T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Appliances 9

Electrical operation

The refrigerator can be operated with the following voltages:

230 V AC 12 V DC

Switching the 230 V operation on:

Press and hold the On/Off button (Fig. 218,1) for 1 second. Button (Fig. 218,1) lights up green. To save energy, after approximately 10 sec- onds the display is dimmed. Press confirmation button (Fig. 218,3). The current setting of the operating is displayed. If 230 V operating mode is not set: To change the setting, press and hold the confirmation button (Fig. 218,3) for approximately 2 seconds. Using the arrow keys (Fig. 218,2) select the 230 V operating mode. Press and hold the confirmation button (Fig. 218,3) for about 2 seconds. Press confirmation button (Fig. 218,3) again. The current cooling level is shown by the illuminated bars (Fig. 218,5). To change the setting, press the arrow keys (Fig. 218,2) until the desired setting is displayed.

Switching the 230 V operation off:

Press and hold the On/Off button (Fig. 218,1) for about 2 seconds. All lights go out. Refrigerator is switched off.

Switching the 12 V operation on:

Press and hold the On/Off button (Fig. 218,1) for 1 second. Button (Fig. 218,1) lights up green. To save energy, after approximately 10 sec- onds the display is dimmed. Press confirmation button (Fig. 218,3). The current setting of the operating is displayed. If the 12 V operating mode is not set: To change the setting, press and hold the confirmation button (Fig. 218,3) for approximately 2 seconds. Using the arrow keys (Fig. 218,2) select the 12 V operating mode. Press and hold the confirmation button (Fig. 218,3) for about 2 seconds. Press confirmation button (Fig. 218,3) again. The current cooling level is shown by the illuminated bars (Fig. 218,5). To change the setting, press the arrow keys (Fig. 218,2) until the desired setting is displayed.

Switching the 12 V operation off:

Press and hold the On/Off button (Fig. 218,1) for about 2 seconds. All lights go out. Refrigerator is switched off.

When operated with 12 V, the refrigerator draws power only from the starter battery of the vehicle. The starter battery only supplies the refrigerator with 12 V when the vehicle engine is running. If the vehicle engine is switched off, the cooling no longer operates. However the refrigerator continues to operate via the transformer/rectifier with a control voltage from the living room area battery. For this reason, change over to gas operation during prolonged driving breaks.

Close the gas isolator tap "Refrigerator" when the refrigerator is operated electrically.

178 T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Appliances9

9.6.5 Refrigerator door locking mechanism With some models, the refrigerator has a separate freezer compartment. The specifications in this section correspondingly also apply to the door of the freezer compartment.

There are two positions for locking the refrigerator door in place:

Closed refrigerator door during travel and when the refrigerator is in oper- ation Slightly opened refrigerator door as a ventilation position when the refrig- erator is switched off

Dometic 8 series

Opening: Press the release button (Fig. 219,1) and open the refrigerator door.

Closing: Close the refrigerator door. The lock hook engages audibly.

When the vehicle has been positioned, the lock hook can be fixed. The refrig- erator door can now be opened without having to press the release button.

Fixing the lock hook: Press the fixture (Fig. 220,1) upwards. The lock hook (Fig. 220,2) is pressed upwards and has no function.

Unlocking the lock hook: Push the lock hook (Fig. 220,2) down. The lock hook functions again.

Further information can be obtained from the separate instruction manual "Refrigerator".

During the journey the refrigerator door must always be closed and locked in the closed position.

Lock the refrigerator door in ventilation position when the refrigerator is switched off. This prevents mould forming.

Fig. 219 Release button of the refriger- ator door (Dometic 8 series)

Fig. 220 Lock hook fixture

179T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Appliances 9

Locking in the ventilation position:

Open the refrigerator door. Press down the unlocking device (Fig. 221,2). Push locking device (Fig. 221,1) forwards (Fig. 222).

If the refrigerator door is closed now, a gap will remain between the refrigerator door and the refrigerator.

Dometic 9 series The refrigerator is opened and closed with the handle on the door.

Ventilation position The refrigerator door may be locked in ventilation position with a swivelling bracket.

Fastening to the floor: Open the refrigerator door. Swing the bracket (Fig. 223,1) to the front (Fig. 224).

If the refrigerator door is closed now, a gap will remain between the refrigerator door and the refrigerator.

Fig. 221 Locking device in normal posi- tion

Fig. 222 Locking device in ventilation position

Fig. 223 Locking device in normal posi- tion

Fig. 224 Locking device in ventilation position

180 T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Appliances9

Thetford The refrigerator is opened and closed with the handle on the door.

Ventilation position The refrigerator door may be locked in ventilation position with a swivelling bracket.

Fastening to the floor: Open the refrigerator door. Swing the bracket (Fig. 225,1) to the front (Fig. 226).

If the refrigerator door is closed now, a gap will remain between the refrigerator door and the refrigerator.

Fig. 225 Locking device in normal posi- tion

Fig. 226 Locking device in ventilation position

181T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Sanitary fittings 10

10Sanitary fittingsChapter overview This chapter contains instructions regarding the sanitary fittings of the vehicle. The instructions address the following topics:

complete water system water tank drinking water filler neck waste water installation waste water tank heater heater for the waste water pipes toilet compartment toilet

10.1 Water supply, general

The vehicle is equipped with a fitted water tank. An electric water pump pumps the water to the individual water taps. Opening a water tap automatically switches on the water pump and pumps water to the tap. The waste water tank collects the waste water. The water level in the water and waste water tanks can be checked on the panel.

Fill water tank from supply systems that have been verified to provide drinking water quality. Only use such hoses or containers when filling that have been approved for use with drinking water. Thoroughly rinse filling hose or container with drinking water before use (2 to 3 times capacity). Empty filling hose or container completely after use and close openings of the filling hose or container. Water left standing in the water tank or in the water pipes becomes undrinkable after a short period. Therefore, before each use of the vehicle, thoroughly clean the water pipes and the water tank. After each use of the vehicle completely empty the water tank and the water pipes. In the case of lay-ups lasting more than a week disinfect the water system before using the vehicle (see chapter 11).

If the vehicle is not used for several days or if it is not heated when there is a risk of frost, empty the entire water system. Make certain that the water pump is switched off on the panel. Otherwise, the water pump will overheat and may get damaged. Leave the water taps on in central position. Leave the safety/drainage valve (if there is one) and all drain cocks open. Frost damage to appliances, frost damage to the vehicle and deposits in water- carrying components can be avoided in this way. The water pump will overheat without water and can get damaged. Never operate water pump when the water tank is empty.

Before the water fittings can be used, the 12 V power supply and water pump on the panel must be turned on. Otherwise the water pump will not work. When the water tank is re-filled, an air bubble may form at the bottom of the pump. This air bubble will prevent water from being drawn in. Shake the water pump up and down energetically in the water.

182 T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Sanitary fittings10

10.2 Water system 10.2.1 Water tank

10.2.2 Drinking water filler neck

The central supply unit is installed behind the external flap on the vehicle's left side.

The drinking water filler neck is indicated by the symbol " " (Fig. 227,1).

Ixeo: The drinking water filler neck is on the left side of the vehicle.

The drinking water filler neck is indicated by the symbol " " (Fig. 228,1). The cap is open and closed using the key for the external flap locks.

Opening: Insert key into locking cylinder (Fig. 228,2) and turn a quarter turn in an anticlockwise direction. Remove cap.

The water tank has a capacity of 110 litres (Travel Van) or 120 litres. How- ever the volume has been limited to 20 litres or 60 litres (Ixeo) (overflow installed) for payload reasons. The panel has not been adjusted to this volume. The level indicator on the panel shows the actual amount of water in the tank. If necessary or if there is a sufficiently large residual vehicle payload, the water tank can be filled up to its actual capacity. To do this, close overflow. The handle is on the water tank.

Fig. 227 Cap for drinking water filler neck (central supply unit)

Fig. 228 Cap for the drinking water filler neck (Ixeo)

183T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Sanitary fittings 10

Closing: Place cap on the drinking water filler neck. Turn key one quarter turn in a clockwise direction. Remove the key. Check that the cap sits firmly on the drinking water filler neck.

10.2.3 Filling the water system

Position the vehicle horizontally. Switch on 12 V power supply on the panel. If necessary, switch on the water pump on the panel. Clean or disinfect water system. Close the safety/drainage valve (Truma). Turn the knob perpendicular to the safety/drainage valve and press the push button in. If the temperature is below 6 C, the safety/drainage valve cannot be closed. Therefore switch on the living area heater and wait until the tem- perature of the safety/drainage valve exceeds 6 C. Close all drain cocks. To do this, position the drain cock's rocking lever (Fig. 229,1) horizontally or turn the drain cock's cap (Fig. 230,1) in a clock- wise direction. Close the drainage opening of the water tank. Close all water taps. Open the drinking water filler neck on the outside of the vehicle.

When filling the water tank, observe the maximum permissible gross weight of the vehicle. Luggage must be reduced accordingly when the water tank is full.

The water pump will overheat without water and can get damaged. Never operate water pump when the water tank is empty.

The Truma system (heater/boiler) has a safety/drainage valve and, depending on the model, one or two drain cocks for emptying. Depending on the model, the Alde system (heater/boiler) has one or two drain cocks for emptying. The water quantity can be monitored on the panel while the water tank is filled.

Fig. 229 Drain cock (with rocking lever) Fig. 230 Drain cock (with twist cap)

184 T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Sanitary fittings10

Fill the water tank with drinking water. Use a water hose, a water canister with a funnel or similar for filling. Set all the water taps to "Hot" and open them. The water pump is turned on. The warm water pipes are filled with water. Keep the taps open until the water flowing out of the taps has no bubbles in it. This is the only way to ensure that the boiler is full of water. Set all water taps to "Cold" and leave them open. This will fill the cold water pipes with water. Keep the taps open until the water flowing out of the taps has no bubbles in it. Close all water taps. Close drinking water filler neck. Check that the cap on the water tank is not leaking.

Position of the drain cocks and safety/

drainage valve

See chapter 16.

10.2.4 Topping up the water

Open drinking water filler neck. Fill the water tank with drinking water. Use a water hose, a water canister with a funnel or similar for filling. Close drinking water filler neck.

10.2.5 Closing/opening the overflow

Closing: Turn the handle (Fig. 231,1 or Fig. 232,1) on the water tank in a clockwise direction as far as it will go. Fill the water tank with drinking water.

When filling the water tank, observe the maximum permissible gross weight of the vehicle. Luggage must be reduced accordingly when the water tank is full.

When filling the water tank, observe the maximum permissible gross weight of the vehicle. Luggage must be reduced accordingly when the water tank is full.

Fig. 231 Water tank with handle (Ixeo) Fig. 232 Water tank (central supply unit)

185T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Sanitary fittings 10

Opening: Turn the handle (Fig. 231,1 or Fig. 232,1) on the water tank in an anticlock- wise direction as far as it will go. Excess water will drain away leaving approx. 60 litres (Ixeo) or 20 litres in the tank.

10.2.6 Draining water (handle with overflow)

Turn the handle (Fig. 233,1 or Fig. 234,1) on the water tank in an anticlock- wise direction as far as possible beyond the resistance to fully open the drainage opening.

10.2.7 Emptying the water system

To empty and ventilate the water system, proceed as follows. This will avoid frost damage:

Fig. 233 Water tank with handle (Ixeo) Fig. 234 Water tank (central supply unit)

If the vehicle is not used for several days or if it is not heated when there is a risk of frost, empty the entire water system. Make certain that the water pump is switched off on the panel. Otherwise, the water pump will overheat and may get damaged. Leave the water taps on in central position. Leave the safety/drainage valve (if there is one) and all drain cocks open. Frost damage to appliances, frost damage to the vehicle and deposits in water- carrying components can be avoided in this way. If the water pump can be turned off from the panel, always turn off the water pump from the panel before you empty the water system. Otherwise the water pump runs until it overheats or the battery is empty.

The Truma system (heater/boiler) has a safety/drainage valve and, depending on the model, one or two drain cocks for emptying. Depending on the model, the Alde system (heater/boiler) has one or two drain cocks for emptying.

Fig. 235 Drain cock (with rocking lever) Fig. 236 Drain cock (with twist cap)

186 T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Sanitary fittings10

Position the vehicle horizontally. Switch off water pump on panel. Switch off the 12 V power supply on the panel. Shut off the boiler (see section 9.4). Open all drain cocks. To do this, position the drain cock's rocking lever (Fig. 235,1) vertically or turn the drain cock's cap (Fig. 236,1) in an anti- clockwise direction. Open the safety/drainage valve (Truma). To do this turn the knob parallel to the safety/drainage valve. The push button jumps out. Open the water tank drain. Open all water taps and set to the central position. Hang the shower handset up in the shower position. Check whether the water tank is completely empty. Blow out the remaining water in the water pipes (max. 0.5 bar). To do this, remove the pipe from the water pump and blow into the pipe. Empty the waste water tank. Take note of the environmental tips in this chapter. Empty toilet cassette or sewage tank. Take note of the environmental tips in this chapter. Clean the water tank and then rinse it out thoroughly. Let the water system dry for as long as possible. After emptying, leave all water taps on in the central position. Leave all drain cocks open.

Position of the drain cocks and safety/

drainage valve

See chapter 16.

10.3 Waste water installation

10.3.1 Draining waste water

Never pour boiling water directly into the sink outlet. Boiling water could cause deformation and leaks in the waste water pipe system.

Only empty the waste water tank at disposal stations, camping sites or car- avan sites especially provided for this purpose.

In case of frost add so much anti-freeze (such as kitchen salt) to the waste water tank so that the waste water cannot freeze.

If possible, place the vehicle in inclined position to drain the waste water.

187T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Sanitary fittings 10

The waste water tank is in the rear area of the vehicle. It is located underneath the floor of the vehicle. Waste water from the kitchen and washing unit flows through plastic pipes into the waste water tank. The drain cock and the cleaning opening are located on the underside of the waste water tank. The waste water tank holds 90 litres.

Emptying: Attach the waste water hose to the drain pipe. Turn the handle (Fig. 237,1 or Fig. 238,1) of the drain cock in flow direction. Completely empty waste water tank. Turn the drain cock handle perpendicular to the flow direction. Remove the waste water hose.

10.3.2 Heater for waste water tank and waste water pipes (special equipment) In order to prevent waste water fittings freezing up, the waste water tank and the waste water pipes can be electrically heated separately. When the heater is turned on, temperature sensors monitor the surface tem- perature of the waste water tank and ambient temperature of the waste water pipes. If the temperature falls below 5 C, the heating elements are switched on and the waste water tank and waste water pipes are heated. If the temper- ature rises above a certain level, the heating elements are switched off again. The waste water pipes are at 7 C, the waste water tank at 30 C.

Fig. 237 Drain cock Fig. 238 Drain cock (alternative)

Fig. 239 Control unit Fig. 240 Switch indicator lamps

188 T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Sanitary fittings10

The control unit (Fig. 239) is fitted in the wardrobe or in a bench seat. The con- trol lamps on the control unit have the following meanings:

Indicator lamp (Fig. 239,2) lights up in green: Regulator in operation. Indicator lamp (Fig. 239,1) lights up in red: Waste water tank is heated. Indicator lamp (Fig. 239,3) lights up in red: Waste water pipes are heated.

The on/off switch (Fig. 240) is installed at the front of the bench or bed. Press the switch up to switch on, press it down to switch off.

10.3.3 Warming unit for waste water pipes (special equipment)

In order to prevent waste water pipes from freezing, the waste water pipes can be electrically warmed. When the warming unit is turned on, the temperature of the waste water pipes is monitored by temperature sensors. If the temperature falls below 5 C, the heating elements are switched on and the waste water pipes are warmed. If the temperature rises above 7 C, the heating elements are switched off again.

The 230 V AC/12 V DC transformer (Fig. 241,2) is installed in the wardrobe or in the storage area beneath the seating group, depending on the model. The control unit is integrated in the transformer housing. The control lamps have the following meanings:

Indicator lamp (Fig. 241,5) lights up in green: Regulator in operation. Indicator lamps (Fig. 241,4 and 6) light up in red: Waste water pipes are warmed.

A test button (Fig. 241,3) is integrated in the housing with which the control unit can be operated for a short time. By pressing the test button, the function of the warming unit can be tested, even if the ambient temperature is above 5 C.

Always only press the test button briefly.

The warming unit only functions when the vehicle is connected to a 230 V power supply.

Fig. 241 Transformer with control unit

189T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Sanitary fittings 10

Switching on: Connect the vehicle to a 230 V power supply (see section 8.9.1). Turn switch (Fig. 241,1) on the transformer (Fig. 241,2) to "ON".

Switching off: Turn switch (Fig. 241,1) on the transformer (Fig. 241,2) to "OFF".

10.4 Toilet compartment

10.5 Toilet

The flushing of the toilet is fed directly from the water system of the vehicle.

Do not transport any loads in the shower tray. The shower tray or other items of equipment in the toilet compartment can be damaged.

For ventilation purposes during or after a shower, and for drying wet clothing, close the toilet compartment door and open the window or the toilet compartment skylight. This improves the air circulation. Close the shower curtain completely when showering, so that no water is able to enter the area between the wash room wall and the shower tray. After taking a shower, rinse soap residue from the shower tray, otherwise cracks can appear in the shower tray over time. After using the shower, wipe it dry to prevent moisture from collecting. Further information about cleaning the toilet compartment can be found in the section 11.2.

If there is any risk of frost and the vehicle is not heated, empty the sewage tank (cassette). Do not sit on the lid of the toilet. The lid is not designed to bear the weight of a person and could break. Use a suitable chemical for this toilet. The ventilation will merely remove the odour but not germs and gases. Germs and gases will have a detri- mental effect on the sealing rubbers. Never put the sanitary liquid directly in the toilet bowl.

Further information can be obtained in the device manufacturer's instruc- tion manual.

Only empty the sewage tank (cassette) at disposal stations, at camping sites or caravan sites, that are especially provided for this purpose.

190 T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Sanitary fittings10

10.5.1 Preparing toilet

Open the flap for the sewage tank on the outside of the vehicle. Insert the key into the locking cylinder of the push-button lock (Fig. 242,1) and turn a quarter turn. Remove the key. Press both push-button locks (Fig. 242,2) simultaneously with your thumb and open the flap. Pull up the retaining clip (Fig. 243,3) and use the handle (Fig. 243,2) to lift the sewage tank (Fig. 243,1) straight up. Tilt the sewage tank slightly and remove fully.

Put the sewage tank down vertically. Turn the drainage neck upwards. Remove the cap of the drainage neck. Fill the stated amount of sanitary liquid into the sewage tank. Then add enough water so that the bottom of the sewage tank is com- pletely covered. Close drainage neck with the cap. Return the drainage neck to its original position. Push the sewage tank back to its original position without applying any force. Ensure that the sewage tank is secured by the retaining clip. Lock the flap for the sewage tank.

The sewage tank (cassette) can only be taken out if the sliding trap is closed.

Fig. 242 Flap for sewage tank Fig. 243 Sewage tank

Fig. 244 Turning drainage neck Fig. 245 Filling with sanitary liquid

191T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Sanitary fittings 10

10.5.2 Swivel toilet The flushing of the Thetford toilet is fed directly from the water system of the vehicle. The toilet bowl can be moved into the optimal position.

The operating unit is located close to the toilet bowl.

Flushing: Before flushing open the sliding trap of the Thetford toilet. To do this, push the slide lever (Fig. 246,1 or Fig. 247,1) in an anticlockwise direction. For flushing, press the blue flush button (Fig. 248,1 or Fig. 249,1). After flushing close the sliding trap. To do this push the slide lever in a clockwise direction.

The indicator lamp (Fig. 248,2 or Fig. 249,2) lights up whenever the sewage tank has to be emptied.

Fig. 246 Thetford toilet bowl, swivelling Fig. 247 Thetford toilet bowl, swivelling (alternative)

Fig. 248 Flush button/indicator lamp Thetford toilet

Fig. 249 Flush button/indicator lamp Thetford toilet (alternative)

192 T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Sanitary fittings10

10.5.3 Toilet with fixed seat The flushing of the toilet is fed from the water system of the vehicle.

Flushing: Before flushing open the sliding trap of the Thetford toilet. To do this, turn the slide lever (Fig. 250,1) in an anticlockwise direction. For flushing, press the blue flush button (Fig. 251,1). After flushing close the sliding trap. To do this turn the slide lever (Fig. 250,1) in a clockwise direction.

The indicator lamp (Fig. 251,2) lights up whenever the sewage tank has to be emptied.

10.5.4 Toilet (Dometic) The flushing of the toilet is fed directly from the water system of the vehicle. The toilet seat can be rotated into the required position.

Let some water run into the toilet bowl before using the toilet. In order to do so press the flush button (Fig. 253,3) on the control and operating unit (Fig. 252,2).

Flushing: Before flushing open the sliding trap of the toilet. For this pull out the slide lever (Fig. 252,1). For flushing, press the flush button (Fig. 253,3). After flushing close the sliding trap. To do so, push the slide lever back.

The indicator lamp (Fig. 253,2) goes on whenever the sewage tank is filled up to 3/4.

Fig. 250 Thetford toilet Fig. 251 Flush button/indicator lamp Thetford toilet

Fig. 252 Toilet bowl with control and operating unit

Fig. 253 Control and operating unit toilet

193T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Sanitary fittings 10

The indicator lamp (Fig. 253,1) goes on whenever the sewage tank has to be emptied. The indicator lamp (Fig. 253,4) lights up whenever the sewage tank is with- drawn.

10.5.5 Emptying the sewage tank

Slide the slide lever on the toilet bowl in a clockwise direction. The sliding trap is closed. Open the flap for the sewage tank on the outside of the vehicle. Insert the key into the locking cylinder of the push-button lock (Fig. 254,1) and turn a quarter turn in a clockwise direction. Remove the key. Press both push-button locks (Fig. 254,2) simultaneously with your thumb and open the flap for the sewage tank. Pull the retaining clip (Fig. 255,1) upwards and pull out the sewage tank (Fig. 255,2). Completely empty the sewage tank at disposal stations that are especially provided for this purpose.

The sewage tank can only be taken out if the sliding trap is closed.

Fig. 254 Flap for the sewage tank Fig. 255 Sewage tank

Actuate the aeration knob on the sewage tank with your thumb to empty it completely.

194 T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Sanitary fittings10

195T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Care 11

11CareChapter overview This chapter contains instructions regarding the care of the vehicle. The instructions address the following topics:

exterior of the vehicle interior water system extractor hood air conditioning unit winter operation

At the end of the chapter there is a checklist of measures you must carry out if you are not going to use the vehicle for an extended period of time. The checklist address the following topics:

temporary lay-up winter lay-up start-up after a lay-up

11.1 External care 11.1.1 General

Standard external care consists of regular washing. The use and the environ- mental conditions will determine how often the vehicle needs to be washed. Wash the vehicle more frequently in areas which are exposed to heavy air pol- lution or heavy traffic or roads treated with de-icing salts. If the vehicle is exposed to salty and humid air (coastal areas, humid climates), wash the vehicle more frequently. Do not park under trees if at all possible. The resin-like discharge which many trees secrete, give the paintwork a matt look and can promote the onset of cor- rosion. Wash off bird droppings straight away and thoroughly, as the acid it contains is extremely corrosive.

11.1.2 Washing with a high-pressure cleaner

Before cleaning the vehicle with a high-pressure cleaner, observe the oper- ating instructions of the high-pressure cleaner. When cleaning with the nozzle for circular jet between the vehicle and the cleaning nozzle, maintain a minimum distance of approx. 700 mm. Take into consideration that the jet of water comes out of the cleaning nozzle with pressure. The vehicle may be damaged by incorrect handling of the high- pressure cleaner. The temperature of the water should not be above 60 C. Keep the jet of water in constant movement during the washing process. Do not direct the water jet at clearances, built-in electrical parts, plugs, seals, the ventilation grill or the skylights. The vehicle may be damaged or water may enter the interior.

Do not clean the tyres with a high-pressure cleaner. The tyres might be damaged. Do not spray external applications (deco-films) directly with the high-pres- sure cleaner. The external applications could come off.

196 T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Care11

11.1.3 Washing the vehicle

Wash the vehicle only on a washing site intended for this purpose. Avoid full sunshine. Observe environmental measures. Only clean external applications and synthetic parts with plenty of warm water, dish washing liquid and soft cloth. Wash down the vehicle with plenty of water, a clean sponge or a soft brush. In the case of stubborn dirt add dish washing liquid to the water. Painted exterior walls may also be cleaned with a caravan cleaner. Add-on parts made of glass-fibre reinforced plastic (GRP) require a regular follow-up treatment with a polisher. This way these parts will not turn yellow and the sealing of the surface remains intact. Treat rubber seals of doors and storage flaps with talc. Treat locking cylinder of doors and storage flaps with graphite dust.

11.1.4 Windows of acrylic glass Acrylic glass windows are delicate and require very careful handling.

11.1.5 Underbody The underbody of the vehicle is partly coated with an age-resistant underbody protection. Should the underbody protection be damaged, repair immediately. Do not treat areas coated with underbody protection with spray oil.

Never clean the vehicle in the car wash. Water can enter the refrigerator grills, the waste gas vents, the ventilation of the extractor hoods or the forced ventilations. The vehicle could be damaged.

Never rub acrylic glass windows dry as dust particles might damage the surface! Only clean acrylic glass windows with plenty of warm water, some dish washing liquid and a soft cloth. Never use glass cleaning agents with chemical, abrasive or alcohol-con- taining additives. Premature brittleness of the panes and associated cracks may result from their use. Avoid contact of cleansing agents used for the body (e.g. tar- or silicone- removing agents) with acrylic glass. Do not clean vehicle in car wash. Do not attach stickers to the acrylic glass windows. Having cleaned the vehicle rinse acrylic glass with sufficient clear water. Apply talcum powder to rubber seals.

An acrylic glass cleanser with antistatic effect is suitable for a follow-up treatment. Small scratches can be treated with an acrylic glass polish. These agents are available at the accessories shop.

Only use products approved by the manufacturer. Our authorised dealers and service centres will be happy to advise you.

197T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Care 11

11.1.6 Entrance step If the entrance step is lubricated, coarse particles of dirt can settle on the lubri- cant during the journey and cause damage to the operating mechanism of the entrance step. Therefore, do not lubricate the moving parts of the entrance step.

11.2 Interior care

Surface and knobs of furniture, lamps and synthetic parts in the toilet and living area should be cleaned with water and a wool cloth. A mild cleanser may be added to the water. If required, use furniture polish for the painted surfaces. Clean upholstery with dry foam specially manufactured for the use on upholstery or with the foam of a mild detergent. Do not wash upholstery. Always have it cleaned. Protect upholstery from direct sunlight so that it does not loose its colour.

Clean upholstery made of novalife with clear water only. Leather covers should be cleaned with a cotton cloth and a mild soap (curd soap). Make sure that the leather is not soaked through and that no water seeps through the seams of the leather covers. Wash panel curtains and gathered blinds. When washing observe washing instructions on the product. The sticks may be removed for washing. Vacuum clean the carpet, if necessary clean with carpet shampoo. Clean PVC-floor covering with a mild, soapy cleanser for PVC floors. Do not place carpet on wet PVC-floor covering. The carpet and the PVC-floor covering may stick together.

If possible, treat stains immediately. Acrylic glass windows are delicate and require very careful handling (see section 11.1.4). Synthetic parts in the toilet and living area are very delicate and should be treated with care. Do not use solvents, alcohol-containing cleansers or scourers. This procedure will help you to avoid brittleness and formation of cracks. Hair colourants, nail varnish, cigarette ash and similar substances may cause permanent stains or discolouration. For this reason, you should pre- vent these substances from getting onto plastic parts. If they do get onto plastic parts, you should remove these substances immediately. Do not pour any corrosive agents into the drain holes. Never pour boiling water directly into the drain holes. Corrosive agents and boiling water cause damage to drainage pipes and siphon traps. Do not use vinegar based products to clean the toilet and water system, or for decalcification of the water system. Vinegar-based products may cause damage to seals or parts of the installation. Use standard decalcifying products for decalcification. Save water. Mop up all remaining water. Vacuum off carpets and cushions with a suitable brush attachment.

For information about the use of maintenance products, our representa- tives and service centres will be glad to advise.

198 T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Care11

Never clean the sink or the gas cooker with a scourer. Avoid anything which may cause scratching or grooves. Clean the burners on the gas cooker using a damp cloth only. Prevent any water from penetrating the burner covers. Water may damage the burners on the gas cooker. Brush insect screens on doors, windows and skylights with a soft brush or vacuum with the brush attachment of the vacuum cleaner. Brush blinds with a soft brush or vacuum with the brush attachment of the vacuum cleaner. Grease or stubborn dirt may be removed with a mild soap at 30 C (curd soap). Brush Roman shades with a soft brush or vacuum with the brush attach- ment of the vacuum cleaner. Grease or stubborn dirt may be removed with a mild soap at 30 C (curd soap). Unrolled seat belts can be cleaned with warm soapsuds. The seat belt must be completely dry before being rolled up. Wipe the fuel cell with a soft, damp cloth.

11.3 Water system 11.3.1 Cleaning the waste water tank

Clean the waste water tank after every use.

Empty the waste water tank. Open the cleaning opening (Fig. 256,1) on the waste water tank and the drain cock. Thoroughly rinse out the waste water tank with fresh water. If possible, clean waste water sensors through the cleaning opening by hand.

11.3.2 Cleaning the water tank

Empty the water tank and close the drainage opening. Remove the cap of the water tank. Fill water tank with water and some washing-up liquid (do not use any scourers). Using a trade standard brush for washing dishes, scrub the water tank until there is no longer any visible deposit. Scrub also the pump housing.

Fig. 256 Cleaning opening on the waste water tank

199T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Care 11

If possible, clean fresh water sensors through the cleaning openings by hand. Rinse water tank with copious amounts of drinking water.

11.3.3 Cleaning the water pipes

Empty the water system. Close all drain holes and drain cocks. Fill mixture of water and cleaning agent into the water tank. Observe the manufacturer's instructions regarding the mixing ratio. Open the drain cocks one by one. Leave the drain cocks open until the mixture of water and cleaning agent has reached the respective drain. Close the drain cocks. Set all the water taps to "Hot" and open them. Leave the water taps open until the mixture of water and cleaning agent has reached the drain. Set all water taps to "Cold" and open them. Leave the water taps open until the mixture of water and cleaning agent has reached the drain. Close all water taps. Flush the toilet several times. Allow the cleaning agent to act in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. Empty the water system. Collect the mixture of water and cleaning agent for correct disposal. For rinsing fill the entire water system with drinking water and empty again several times over.

11.3.4 Disinfecting the water system

When disinfecting the water system, proceed the same way as when cleaning the water pipes (see section 11.3.3). Simply use disinfectant instead of cleaning agent.

Only use suitable cleaning agents as sold by the specialist trade. The cleaning agent must meet national regulations and be approved (if required).

Collect any emerging mixture of water and cleaning agent for correct dis- posal.

Only use suitable disinfectants as sold by the specialist trade. The disinfectant must meet national regulations and be approved (if required).

Collect any emerging mixture of water and disinfectant for correct disposal.

200 T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Care11

11.4 Extractor hood Clean the extractor hood filter occasionally. How often cleaning is necessary depends on how often the extractor hood is used. Do not wait to clean the filter until the performance of the extractor hood has noticeably decreased.

Cleaning the filter: Wash the filter with warm water and some washing-up liquid.

11.5 Air conditioning unit 11.5.1 Dometic

A lint filter and an activated carbon filter are each located in the lower part of the air conditioning system ceiling unit (Fig. 257,2) behind the ventilation grills (Fig. 257,1 and 3). The lint filters must be cleaned at regular intervals and replaced if necessary. The manufacturer recommends replacing the activated carbon filter yearly. On the left side of the ceiling unit (outside of the vehicle) is located the drainage opening for the condensation. Keep the drain openings free from dirt, leaves or similar to allow the condensation to be drained.

11.5.2 Telair Every now and then clean the filter and the ventilation grilles on the outside of the housing. How often cleaning is necessary depends on how often the air conditioning unit is used. Do not wait to clean the filter and the ventilation grill until the performance of the air conditioning unit has noticeably decreased.

Cleaning the filter: Wash the filter with warm water and some washing-up liquid. Allow the filter to dry thoroughly before reassembly.

Cleaning the ventilation grill: Use a brush to remove coarse dirt or deposits from the external ventilation grilles. If a cleaning solution is used, ensure that no water ingresses into the inside of the housing.

Fig. 257 Air conditioning unit (Dometic)

Only use mild cleaning solutions to clean the filter, never use benzene or solvents.

201T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Care 11

11.6 Winter care De-icing salt damages the underbody and the parts open to water spray. We recommend that you wash the vehicle more frequently during wintertime. Mechanical and surface treated parts and the underside are under particular strain, and should therefore be cleaned thoroughly.

11.6.1 Preparations

Check the vehicle for paint and rust damage. Repair damage as neces- sary. Make certain that water cannot penetrate the automatic floor ventilation system and the heater. Use a wax-based rust inhibitor to protect the metal parts of the underbody. Use appropriate protection for external painted surfaces.

11.6.2 Winter operation During winter operation, condensation develops when the vehicle is occupied under low-temperature conditions. To ensure good interior air quality and avoid vehicle damage from condensation, sufficient ventilation is essential.

When heating the vehicle, the heater should be at the highest setting and roof storage cabinets, curtains and blinds should be opened. This ensures optimal ventilation. Only heat if the circulation system is switched on. In the morning, lift up all cushions, air out storage boxes and dry any damp areas.

11.6.3 At the end of the winter season

Thoroughly clean the underbody of the vehicle and the engine. When this is done, corrosion-inducing anti-freeze agents (salts, alkaline residues) are removed. Clean the exterior and use regular car wax to protect metal surfaces.

If there is any risk of frost, always run heater at a minimum of 15 C. Switch the circulation fan (if there is one) to automatic. In the case of extreme external temperatures, the furniture flaps and doors should be left slightly open. The inflowing warm air can help prevent the freezing of water pipes, for example, and counteract the formation of condensation in the storage spaces. If there is any risk of frost, cover the outside surface of the windows with winter insulation mats. Keep waste gas vents and forced ventilations free of snow. Use a vent extension, if necessary.

If condensation has still developed, just wipe it off. It is only possible to guarantee unrestricted operation during winter for models without double floor in connection with the "winter package" from the original equipment.

202 T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Care11

11.7 Lay-up 11.7.1 Temporary lay-up

Before laying up the vehicle, go through the following checklist:

If the vehicle has been stationary for a long period (approx. 10 months) have the braking and gas systems checked by an authorised specialist workshop. Take into consideration that water is undrinkable after only a short time. Animal damage to cables can lead to short circuits. Fire hazard!

Activities Done

Base vehicle Completely fill fuel tank. This prevents corrosion damage within the fuel tank system

Jack up vehicle so that the wheels do not bear any load, or move ve- hicle every 4 weeks. This prevents any pressure points from occur- ring on tyres and wheel bearings

Protect the tyres from direct exposure to the sun. Danger of forma- tion of cracks!

Inflate tyres up to the recommended maximum pressure

Always provide for sufficient ventilation in the underbody area

Humidity or lack of oxygen e.g. by covering with plastic film may cause optical irregularities to the underbody.

In addition observe the notes in the operating manual of the base ve- hicle

Body All vents should be sealed with the appropriate caps and all other openings (apart from forced ventilations) should also be sealed. This prevents animals (e.g. mice) from gaining entry

Air the interior, all storage compartments accessible from the out- side, and the parking space (e.g. garage) every 3 weeks in order to prevent the occurrence of condensation and resulting mould forma- tion

Interior Place upholstery in an upright position for ventilation, and cover

Clean refrigerator

Allow refrigerator and freezer compartment doors to remain slightly open

Search for traces of animals that have gained entry

Disconnect the flat screen from the mains and, if necessary, remove it from the vehicle

Gas system Close regulator tap on the gas bottle

Close all gas isolator taps

Always remove gas bottles from the gas bottle compartment, even if they are empty

203T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Care 11

11.7.2 Winter lay-up Additional measures are required if laying up the vehicle over winter:

Electrical system Fully charge living area and starter battery

Charge the battery for at least 20 hours before laying up.

Disconnect the living area battery from the 12 V power supply. To do this, switch off the battery cut-off switch on the transformer/rectifier (see chapter 8)

Water system Empty the entire water system. Blow out the residual water from the water pipes (0.5 bar max.). Leave the water taps on in central posi- tion. Leave the safety/drainage valve (if there is one) and all drain cocks open. Observe the notes in chapter 10

Activities Done

Activities Done

Base vehicle Clean body and underbody thoroughly and spray with hot wax or protect with varnish

Fill fuel tank with winter diesel

Check antifreeze in the cooling water

Rectify damage to the paintwork

Body Clean vehicle from outside thoroughly

Keep the forced ventilation open

Clean and grease installed supports

Clean and grease all door and flap hinges

Brush oil or glycerine on all locking mechanisms

Rub all rubber seals with talc

Use graphite dust to treat locking cylinders

Interior Position de-humidifiers

Remove upholstery from the vehicle and store in a dry place

Air the interior every 3 weeks

Empty all cabinets and storage compartments, open flaps, doors and drawers

Thoroughly clean the interior

If there is a risk of frost, do not leave the flat screen in the vehicle

Electrical system Remove the starter battery and the living area battery and store them in a place protected from frost (see chapter 8) or connect the vehicle to a 230 V supply

204 T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Care11

11.7.3 Starting up the vehicle after a temporary lay-up or after lay- up over winter Go through the following checklist before start-up:

Water system Clean the water system using a cleaning agent from a specialised store

Complete vehicle Arrange the tarpaulins in such a way that the ventilation openings are not covered, or use porous tarpaulins

Activities Done

Activities Done

Base vehicle Check the tyre pressure on all tyres

Check the tyre pressure of the spare wheel

Body Clean the pivot bearing of the entrance step

Check the functioning of the fitted supports

Check that the doors, windows and skylights are working properly

Check that all the external locks are working, such as the external flaps, the filler neck and the conversion door

Remove the cover from the waste gas vent of the heater (if there is one)

Remove the winter cover from the refrigerator grills (if there is one)

Gas system Put the gas bottles in the gas bottle compartment, tie down and con- nect to the gas pressure regulator

Electrical system Connect to 230 V power supply using the external socket

Fully charge living area and starter battery

Charge the battery for at least 20 hours after lay-up.

Connect the living area battery with the 12 V power supply. To do this, switch on the battery cut-off switch on the transformer/rectifier (see chapter 8)

Check that the electrical system are working, e.g. interior light, sock- et and all installed electrical appliances

Water system Disinfect water pipes and water tank

Check the functionality of the operating lever for the waste water tank

Close safety/drainage valve (if there is one), drain cocks and water taps

Check water system for leaks

Appliances Check the function of the appliances

205T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Maintenance 12

12MaintenanceChapter overview This chapter contains instructions about inspection and maintenance work concerning the vehicle. The maintenance instructions address the following topics:

doors living area battery fuel cell Alde hot-water heater independent vehicle heater replacing light bulbs

At the end of the chapter you will find important instructions on how to obtain spare parts.

12.1 Inspection work Like any technical appliance, the vehicle must be inspected at regular inter- vals. This inspection work must be carried out by qualified personnel. Special technical knowledge, which cannot be taught within the framework of this instruction manual, is required for these tasks. Personnel possessing this technical knowledge are available for assistance at all our service centres. Their experience and regular technical instruction by the factory as well as equipment and tools guarantee expert and up-to-date inspection of the vehicle. Have the "First Programmed Inspection" carried out at one of our service cen- tres 12 months after initial registration. Further inspections should be carried out once a year. The service centre in charge will confirm the work performed. Have chassis inspections confirmed in the chassis manufacturer's customer service booklet.

12.2 Maintenance work As with every machine, this vehicle requires maintenance. The extent and fre- quency of the maintenance work required depend on conditions of operation and use. More difficult operating conditions make it necessary to service the vehicle more often. Have the base vehicle and the appliances serviced at the intervals specified in the corresponding instruction manuals.

Observe the inspections indicated by the manufacturer and have them car- ried out at the specified intervals. The value of the vehicle is thus pre- served. The confirmation of the inspection work carried out serves as valid proof in the event of damage and guarantee claims.

206 T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Maintenance12

12.3 Doors To maintain gliding capability between springs and hinges, grease the conver- sion door hinges occasionally.

12.4 Living area battery

Observe the following to extend battery life:

Keep the battery surface clean and dry. Check the acid level periodically and top up with desalinated or distilled water as necessary. Never top up with acids. If water loss is considerable, have the controller voltage checked by an authorised specialist workshop. Use an acid density measurement to check the battery's charging condi- tion.

Acid density The battery must be recharged if the acid density falls below 1.21 kg/l. If battery acid with a density of 1.23 kg/l is used, the battery must be recharged when the acid density falls below 1.18 kg/l. With acid density of 1.21 kg/l, the battery is protected against freezing at temperatures up to -15 C (at 1.28 kg/l up to -70 C).

The battery has cycle stability and is thus particularly suited for vehicle power supply. Cycle stability means that several discharge/charging processes are possible.

12.5 Fuel cell 12.5.1 Replacing the tank cartridge

We recommend either Molykote PG 65 or Vaseline as lubricants.

When replacing the battery, only use the same type of battery (same capacity and voltage, cycle stability). Never use conventional car batteries (starter batteries). A lead acid battery must not be replaced by a dryfill battery. Do not use so-called improvers.

When changing tank cartridges, do not smoke and avoid unshielded flames. Fire hazard! Methanol is toxic. Avoid inhaling, swallowing or any contact with the skin or the eyes.

When connecting the tank, make sure that the tank hose has no kinks and that it is not squashed. Only use original SFC tank cartridges.

The tank cartridge may only be replaced if the system is running. Any methanol emerging will evaporate without residue. Original tank cartridges are available from all authorised dealers and service centres.

207T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Maintenance 12

Unscrew the tank cartridge connection from the empty tank cartridge. Loosen the securing belt on the tank cartridge. Remove empty tank cartridge from the tank cartridge holder. After use, firmly close the cap of the tank cartridge. Insert a new, sealed original tank cartridge into the tank cartridge holder. Secure the tank cartridge with the securing belt. Open cap and keep safe. Screw tank cartridge connection onto the new tank cartridge. In the "Main Menu > Fuel Cartridge" menu, specify the tank cartridge size used and confirm with "OK".

12.5.2 Refilling service fluid

Turn off fuel cell and remove the device's connector plug. Remove the air discharge hose. Cut off the tip of the nozzle on the refill bottle. Pour the entire content of the refill bottle into the connection for the air dis- charge hose. Re-insert the air discharge hose. Plug the device's connector plug back on again. Press the reset button.

12.6 Alde hot-water heater

Only use original SFC refill sets. Only replenish service fluid if a message to do so appears on the operating panel. Ensure that no dirt or foreign bodies enter the filling hole.

Original refill sets are available from all authorised dealers and service cen- tres. Wipe up any spilled service fluid with a cloth.

Check the level of the heating fluid regularly on the compensator reservoir. During or after the first operating hours of the hot-water heater, the filling level may fall below the minimum mark. If this is the case, top up the heating fluid. We recommend to bleed the heating system after the initial heater opera- tion and to check the glycol content. Have heating fluid changed by an authorised dealer or a service centre at intervals of approximately two years as corrosion-protection wears off after some time. Top up heating system with a water-glycol mixture (60 : 40) only. This mix- ture offers frost protection up to approx. -25 C. When topping up hot-water heaters that are connected to the engine's cooling circuit, please observe the instructions in the instruction manuals of the manufacturers.

Further information can be obtained in the manufacturer's instruction manual.

208 T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Maintenance12

12.6.1 Checking the fluid level

Switch off the hot-water heater and allow it to cool down. Check if the fluid level is between the marks "MIN" (Fig. 258,3 or Fig. 259,3) and "MAX" (Fig. 258,2 or Fig. 259,2) on the compensator res- ervoir (Fig. 258 or Fig. 259).

12.6.2 Topping up heating fluid

Position the vehicle horizontally. This prevents the formation of bubbles. Switch off the hot-water heater and allow it to cool down. If necessary, unscrew or remove the panel (depending on the model). Open the rotary lid (Fig. 258,1 or Fig. 259,1) on the compensator reservoir. Remove cover. Check anti-freeze with an anti-freeze hydrometer. The frost protection con- tent must be 40 % or correspond to a frost protection of -25 C. Fill water frost protection mixture slowly into the compensator reservoir.

12.6.3 Bleeding the heating system

The bleeding valves are built in nearby the radiators.

Fig. 258 Compensator reservoir with panel

Fig. 259 Compensator reservoir without panel

The optimum fluid level is reached when the fluid in the compensator res- ervoir is 1 cm above the "MIN" mark when it is cooled down.

Fig. 260 Bleeding valve of hot-water heater

209T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Maintenance 12

Switch off the hot-water heater and allow it to cool down. Open bleeding valve (Fig. 260,1) and leave open until no more air escapes. Close bleeding valve. Repeat this procedure at all bleeding valves. Check to see if the hot-water heater warms up.

12.7 Independent vehicle heater Use the independent vehicle heater for 10 minutes at least once a month with a cold engine and smallest fan settings. Before the heating season starts, have the independent vehicle heater checked by an authorised specialist workshop.

12.8 Replacing bulbs, external

Types of bulbs Different types of bulbs are used in the vehicle. Below, we have described how to change the different types of bulbs.

Bulbs and light fittings can be extremely hot. Therefore, allow lights to cool down before changing bulbs. Store bulbs in a safe place inaccessible to children. Do not use any bulb that has been dropped or which shows scratches in its glass. The bulb might burst.

A new bulb should not be touched with the fingers. Use a cloth when installing the new bulb. Use only bulbs of the same type and with the correct wattage (see section 12.8.4 "Types of bulbs for exterior lighting"). If LEDs in lights are defect, contact an authorised dealer or service centre.

Fig. 261 Types of bulbs

Pos. in Fig. 261

Fixture type/bulb type

Changing

1 Plug-in fixture To remove, pull out the bulb

To mount, push the bulb into the socket with gentle pressure

2 Bayonet socket To remove, press the bulb down and turn in an anticlockwise direction

To insert, place the bulb in the socket and turn in a clockwise direction

210 T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Maintenance12

12.8.1 Front lights The lamps for low beam, main beam and parking light as well as for the direc- tion indicator are part of the basic vehicle. Replacement of light bulbs is described in the instruction manual of the base vehicle.

12.8.2 Rear lights

Undo the five housing screws (Fig. 262,1). Remove housing. Remove bulb. Put in a new bulb. Reassemble the lamp in the reverse order.

12.8.3 Side lights

Side marker light The side marker light (Fig. 263,1) is located at the top of the side wall area at the back of the vehicle.

Marker lights The marker lights (Fig. 263,3) are fitted in the lower part of the vehicle.

3 Cylindrical bulbs To remove and to insert, carefully bend the contacts of the lamp holder outwards

4 Halogen bulb To remove, release retaining springs

After inserting, hook the retaining springs again

Pos. in Fig. 261

Fixture type/bulb type

Changing

Fig. 262 Rear lights

1 Housing screws 2 Rear light 3 Brake light 4 Direction indicator 5 Reverse light 6 Fog tail light

Fig. 263 Side lights

1 Side marker light 2 Awning light 3 Marker light

211T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Maintenance 12

Awning light The awning light (Fig. 263,2) is located above the conversion door.

12.8.4 Types of bulbs for exterior lighting

12.9 Replacing bulbs, internal

The lights have LEDs. To change the LEDs, contact an authorised dealer or a service centre.

Exterior lighting Type of bulb

Rear Brake light Ba15s 12 V 21 W

Rear light Ba15s 12 V 5 W

Direction indicator Ba15s 12 V 21 W orange

Fog tail light Ba15s 12 V 21 W

Licence plate light Soffitte 12 V 5 W

Reverse light Ba15s 12 V 21 W

Third brake light LED

Side Side marker light LED

Awning light LED

Marker light LED

Bulbs and light fittings can be extremely hot. Therefore, allow lights to cool down before changing bulbs. Shut off the power supply on the safety cut-out in the 230 V fuse box before changing bulbs. Store bulbs in a safe place inaccessible to children. Do not use any bulb that has been dropped or which shows scratches in its glass. The bulb might burst. Lights can get very hot. When the light is switched on, there must always be a safety distance of 30 cm between light and flammable objects. Fire hazard! Do not replace the LEDs in lamps with standard light bulbs. Risk of fire due to intense heat build up.

A new bulb should not be touched with the fingers. Use a cloth when installing the new bulb. Only use bulbs of the same type and with the correct wattage. If LEDs in lights are defect, contact an authorised dealer or service centre.

212 T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Maintenance12

12.9.1 Recessed light with LED

Changing bulbs: Contact a dealer or service centre.

12.9.2 Spotlight (movable)

LED 12 V/max. 10 W

Changing bulbs: Turn the spotlight (Fig. 266,1) by 90 and remove from rail. Remove LED (Fig. 266,2) with a suction cup. Press a new LED into the holder. Insert spotlight into the rail.

Fig. 264 Recessed light (example) Fig. 265 Recessed light (alternative)

LED lamps have a very long life. It is not normally necessary to replace a lamp.

Fig. 266 Spotlight (movable)

213T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Maintenance 12

12.9.3 Surface mounted light

12 V/16 W halogen bulb

Changing bulbs: Carefully push the transparent cover (Fig. 267,1) together from both sides, pull it lightly from the switch and pull it off forwards. Remove halogen bulb. Put in a new halogen bulb. Reassemble the lamp in the reverse order.

12.10 Spare parts

For safety reasons, spare parts for pieces of equipment must correspond with manufacturer's instructions and be permitted by the manufacturer as a spare part. These spare parts may only be fitted by the manufacturer or an author- ised specialist workshop. The authorised dealers and service centres are available for any spare parts requirement. Here are some suggestions of important spare parts:

Fuses V-belt Windscreen blades Bulbs Water pump (submerged pump)

When ordering spare parts please indicate the chassis number and the vehicle type to the dealer.

Fig. 267 Surface mounted light

Every alteration of the original condition of the vehicle can alter road behaviour and jeopardize road safety. The special equipment and original spare parts recommended by us have been specially developed and supplied for your vehicle. These products are available at the authorised dealer or service centre. The authorised dealer or service centre is informed about admissible tech- nical details and carries out the required work correctly. The use of accessories, parts and fittings not supplied by us may cause damage to the vehicle and jeopardize road safety. Even if an expert's report, a general type approval or a design certification exists, there is no guarantee for the proper quality of the product. No liability can be assumed for damage caused by products which have not been released by us. This also applies to impermissible alterations to the vehicle.

214 T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Maintenance12

The vehicle described in this instruction manual is built and equipped to factory standards. Special equipment is offered depending on its purpose or use. When fitting special equipment check if such equipment has to be entered in the vehicle documents. Observe the max. permissible gross weight. The authorised dealer or service centre will be happy to advise you.

12.11 Vehicle identification plate

The vehicle identification plate (Fig. 268) with the chassis number is located inside in the entrance area. Do not remove the vehicle identification plate. The vehicle identification plate:

Identifies the vehicle Helps with the procurement of spare parts Together with the vehicle documents identifies the vehicle owner

12.12 Warning and information stickers There are warning and information stickers on and inside the vehicle. Warning and information stickers are for the sake of safety and must not be removed.

Fig. 268 Vehicle identification plate

1 Chassis number

Always include the chassis number with all inquiries for the customer service office.

Replacement stickers can be obtained from an authorised dealer or a service centre.

215T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Wheels and tyres 13

13Wheels and tyresChapter overview This chapter contains instructions regarding the tyres of the vehicle. The instructions address the following topics:

tyre selection handling of tyres changing wheels spare wheel support

At the end of the chapter there is a table you can use to find the correct tyre pressure for your vehicle.

13.1 General

Observe: Check the tyres regularly (every 2 weeks) for equal tread wear, tread depth and external damage. Replace tyres at the latest, when the minimum depth of tread stipulated by law is reached. Always use tyres of the same model, same brand and same style (summer and winter tyres). Only use tyres approved for the wheel rim type fitted. The permitted rim and tyre sizes are quoted in the vehicle documents and the authorised dealer or service centre will always be glad to give you advice. Run-in new tyres for approx. 100 km (60 miles) at low speed since only then do they reach full strength.

Check tyre pressure before a journey or every 2 weeks. Wrong tyre pressure causes excessive wear and can lead to damage or even to tyre burst. You can lose control of the vehicle.

Only check the tyre pressure on cold tyres. Tubeless tyres have been installed on the vehicle. Never install tubes in these tyres. Read the instruction manual for the base vehicle.

Depending on the base vehicle and model the vehicles are only equipped with tyre repair kit as standard. In the case of a puncture, pull over to the side of the road. Make vehicle safe with a hazard warning triangle. Switch on the warning lights. Tyres on vehicles with tandem axles may wear faster. Tyres must not be older than 6 years as the material will become brittle over time. The four-digit DOT number on the tyre flank indicates the date of manufacture. The first two digits designate the week, the last two digits the year of manufacture.

Example: Week 01, year of manufacture 2014.0114

216 T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Wheels and tyres13

Check regularly that the wheel nuts or wheel bolts are firmly seated. Re- tighten the wheel nuts or wheel bolts of a changed wheel cross-wise (Fig. 269) after 50 km (30 miles). See section 13.5.2 for tightening torque. When using new or newly painted rims, re-tighten the wheel nuts or wheel bolts once again after approx. 1,000 to 5,000 km (600 miles to 3,000 miles). For lay-ups or long periods of inactivity, keep the tyres and tyre bearings free from pressure points: Jack up the vehicle so that the wheels do not bear any load, or move the vehicle every 4 weeks in such a way that the position of the wheels is changed.

13.2 Tyre selection

The tyre sizes approved for the vehicle are given in the vehicle documents or can be obtained from the authorised dealers or service centres. Each tyre must fit the vehicle on which it will be driven. This applies to the external dimensions (diameter, width), which are indicated with the standardised size designations. In addition, the tyres must meet the requirements of the vehicle with regard to weight and speed. Weight refers to the maximum permissible axle load which can be distributed on two tyres. The maximum load-carrying capacity of a tyre is indicated by its load index (= LI, load index code). The axle geometry of a vehicle, such as wheel camber and track, is also important for tyre selection. The maximum permissible speed for a tyre (with full load-carrying capacity) is indicated by the speed index (= SI). Together, load index and speed index form the operating code of a tyre. This is an official component of the complete, standardised dimensions description which appears on every tyre. The information on the tyres must correspond to the specifications which appear in the vehicle papers.

Fig. 269 Tighten the wheel nuts or wheel bolts cross-wise

A wrong tyre can damage the tyres during the journey and even cause it to burst.

If tyres that are not approved for the vehicle are used, then the type approval for the vehicle and subsequently the insurance coverage can lapse. The authorised dealer or service centre will be happy to advise you.

217T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Wheels and tyres 13

13.3 Tyre specifications

13.4 Handling of tyres

Drive over kerbs at an obtuse angle. Otherwise the flanks of the tyres may get pinched. Driving over a kerb at a sharp angle can damage the tyre and result in it getting ruptured. Drive over high manhole covers at a slow speed. Otherwise the tyres may get pinched. Driving over a high manhole cover at high speed can damage the tyre and result in it getting ruptured. Check the shock absorbers regularly. Driving with poor shock absorbers significantly increases wear. If the tread wear is uneven, have the toe-in and the wheel camber checked. Driving with an incorrectly set toe-in or a one-sided wheel camber leads to a significant increase in wear. Avoid block brakings. Block braking gives the tyres "brake plates" of var- ying strength. This reduces driving comfort. It might even make the tyres unserviceable. Do not clean the tyres with a high-pressure cleaner. The tyres can suffer serious damage within just a few seconds and rupture as a result. Drive in such a way as to protect your tyres. Avoid braking sharply, revving up too strongly and long journeys on poor roads.

13.5 Changing wheels 13.5.1 General instructions

Description Explanation

215/70 R 15C 109/107 Q (example)

215 Tyre width in mm

70 Height-to-width proportion in percent

R Tyre design (R = radial)

15 Rim diameter in inches

C Commercial (transporter)

109 Load index code for single tyres

107 Load index code for twin tyres

Q Speed index (Q = 160 km/h)

The vehicle must be on level, firm ground, secure from slipping. Go into first gear. In the case of automatic transmission, change gear to "P" position. Before jacking up the vehicle firmly apply the handbrake. Prevent the vehicle from rolling away by blocking the opposite wheel with the wheel chocks. Under no circumstances jack the vehicle with the fitted supports. If a trailer is connected: Detach the trailer before lifting the vehicle. Position the vehicle jack underneath the axle, not under any circum- stances on the bodywork.

218 T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Wheels and tyres13

13.5.2 Tightening torque Depending on the wheel rim type and the wheel manufacturer, the wheels must be tightened with different tightening torques.

Never overload the vehicle jack. The maximum permissible load is spec- ified on the vehicle jack's identification plate. Use the vehicle jack only for lifting the vehicle briefly while changing the tyre. No persons may be in the vehicle while it is is raised. Do not start the motor while the vehicle is jacked up. Whilst the vehicle is in a jacked up position, persons must not lie down under it.

Do not damage the thread of the thread bolt or wheel bolt when changing the wheel. Tighten the wheel nuts or wheel bolts cross-wise (Fig. 269). When changing wheels (e.g. light metall wheel rims or wheels with winter tyres), use the correct wheel bolts of the correct length and shape. Other- wise the wheels may not be securely fixed or the braking system may not work correctly. The use of wheel rims or tyres that are not approved for the vehicle can make it less than fully roadworthy; such wheel rims or tyres must be sepa- rately inspected and approved by an accredited test centre. Do not replace wheels cross-wise.

Protect the vehicle according to the national regulations, e.g. with a hazard warning triangle. Before changing the wheel, check the wheel rim and tyre size, the max. tyre load and the speed index on the tyres. Only use the wheel rim and tyre sizes stated in the vehicle documents. Further information can be found in the instruction manual of the base vehicle.

Description Tightening torque

Steel wheel rims 15" 160 Nm

16" 180 Nm

Fig. 270 Steel wheel rim (standard)

219T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Wheels and tyres 13

Description Tightening torque

Light metal wheel rims 15" Borbet HW65560 130 Nm

16" Borbet HW65660 130 Nm

15" Tomason TN3F-6515 180 Nm

16" Tomason TN3F-6516 180 Nm

15" Goldschmitt GSM1-1560 180 Nm

16" Goldschmitt GSM1-1665 180 Nm

15" Irmscher IC-Line 180 Nm

16" Irmscher IC-Line 180 Nm

Fig. 271 Borbet Fig. 272 Tomason

Fig. 273 Goldschmitt Fig. 274 Irmscher IC-Line

220 T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Wheels and tyres13

13.5.3 Changing a wheel

Park the vehicle on as even and stable a surface as possible. Switch off the engine and safeguard the area. Engage first gear or reverse gear. Apply the handbrake. Place wheel chocks or other appropriate objects beneath the opposite wheel of the vehicle to secure it (Fig. 275). Remove the spare wheel from the spare wheel support. If the ground is soft, place a stable support such as a wooden board beneath the vehicle jack. Apply the vehicle jack to the designated mounting points (refer to the instruction manual for the base vehicle). Turn the wheel bolts several times to loosen them, but do not remove them. Lift the vehicle until the wheel has been lifted 2 to 3 cm above the ground. Remove the wheel bolts and take off the wheel. Place the spare wheel on the wheel hub and adjust. Screw in the wheel bolts and slightly tighten them cross-wise. Crank down the vehicle jack and remove it. Using the wheelbrace, tighten the wheel bolts evenly (see section 13.5.2 for tightening torque). Have the tightening torque checked by an authorised specialist workshop.

The footplate of the vehicle jack must be levelly positioned on the ground. Do not tilt the vehicle jack.

The wheel you have replaced should be repaired immediately. Take note of the general instructions in this chapter.

Fig. 275 Securing vehicle

221T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Wheels and tyres 13

13.6 Spare wheel support (special equipment) The spare wheel support is built into the rear garage.

Removing the spare wheel: Open external flap of the rear garage. Loosen and remove both fixing screws (Fig. 276,2) with the on-board tool set. Remove the spare wheel (Fig. 276,1) from the support (Fig. 276,3).

13.7 Tyre pressure

The payload and the durability of tyres is directly dependent on the tyre pres- sure. Air is a volatile medium. It is unavoidable that it will escape from tyres. As a rule of thumb it can be assumed that a filled tyre loses pressure at a rate of 0.1 bar every two months. To prevent the tyres becoming damaged or burst, check the tyre pressure regularly. The contact surface of the tyre changes, depending on the tyre pressure.

Fig. 276 Spare wheel support in the rear garage

Tyres overheat if the tyre pressure is too low. This can cause serious tyre damage. Check tyre pressure before a journey or every 2 weeks. Wrong tyre pressure causes excessive wear and can lead to damage or even to tyre burst. You can lose control of the vehicle. Use only valves that are approved for the specified tyre pressure.

Only check the tyre pressure on cold tyres.

Fig. 277 Contact surface of the tyre

1 Correct tyre pressure 2 Tyre pressure too low 3 Tyre pressure too high

222 T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Wheels and tyres13

The vehicles are constantly brought up to the newest technical standards. It is possible that new tyre sizes are not yet included in this table. If this is the case, any authorised dealer or service centre will be happy to provide the newest values.

The information on pressure levels is valid for cold tyres and loaded vehi- cles. Pressure in hot tyres must be 0.3 bar higher than in cold tyres. Recheck the pressure when the tyres are cold. Tyre pressures in bar. The tyre pressure tolerance is +/- 0.05 bar.

Types Tyre size Front air pressure in bar

Rear air pressure in bar

All types 215/70 R 15 C (109/107) Q

4.1 4.5

All types with motorhome tyres

215/70 R 15 CP (109/107) Q

5.0 5.5

All types with winter tyres (M+S)

215/70 R 15 C (109/107) Q

4.3 4.75

All types 225/75 R 16 C (116/114) Q

4.5 5.0

All types with motorhome tyres

225/75 R 16 CP (116/114) Q

5.5 5.5

All types with winter tyres (M+S)

225/75 R 16 C (116/114) Q

5.2 5.2

All types 225/75 R 16 C (116/114) Q (tandem axle)

4.5 3.8

All types with motorhome tyres

225/75 R 16 CP (116/114) Q (tandem axle)

5.5 3.8

All types with winter tyres (M+S)

225/75 R 16 C (116/114) Q (tandem axle)

5.2 3.8

223T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Troubleshooting 14

14TroubleshootingChapter overview This chapter contains instructions about possible faults in your vehicle. The faults are listed with their possible causes and corresponding remedies. The instructions address the following topics:

braking system electrical system fuel cell gas system heater boiler air conditioning unit gas cooker gas oven microwave oven refrigerator water supply body

The specified faults can be remedied with relative ease and without a great deal of specialised knowledge. In the event that the remedies detailed in this instruction manual should not be successful, an authorised specialist work- shop must find and eliminate the cause of the fault.

14.1 Braking system

14.2 Electrical system

Have defects on the braking system immediately remedied by an author- ised specialist workshop.

When the living area battery is changed, only use batteries of the same type and the same capacity.

See chapter 8 for changing the fuses.

Fault Cause Remedy

Road light system does no longer work correctly

Bulb is defective Replace bulb. Note volts and watts specifications

Interior lighting does no longer work correctly

Bulb is defective Replace bulb. Note volts and watts specifications

Plug connector or cable defective

Contact customer service

Fuse on the transformer/ rectifier is defective

Replace fuse on the transformer/rectifier

The electrically operated entrance step cannot be moved in or out

Fuse on the transformer/ rectifier is defective

Replace fuse on the transformer/rectifier

224 T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Troubleshooting14

230 V indicator lamp does not light up even though 230 V mains sup- ply is connected

The mains connection is de-energised

Check mains connection (e.g. campsite)

No 230 V power supply despite connection

230 V automatic circuit breaker has triggered

Switch on the 230 V au- tomatic circuit breaker

Starter or living area bat- tery is not charged when operated in 230 V mode

Jumbo flat fuse (50 A) on the starter or living area battery is defective

Replace jumbo flat fuse (50 A) on the starter or living area battery

Charger module in the transformer/rectifier is defective

Contact customer service

Living area battery is not charged during vehicle operation

Fuse on terminal D+ of the alternator is defective

Replace fuse

Disconnector relay in the transformer/rectifier is defective

Contact customer service

Living area battery over- loaded ("hot")

Battery selection switch set wrongly

Move position of battery selection switch

Defective load sensor or relay

Contact customer service

12 V power supply does not work

12 V power supply switched off

Switch 12 V power sup- ply on

Battery cut-off switch on the transformer/rectifier is switched off

Set battery cut-off switch to on

Living area battery is dis- charged

Charge the living area battery

Jumbo flat fuse (50 A) on the living area battery is defective

Replace jumbo flat fuse (50 A) on the living area battery

Disconnector relay in the transformer/rectifier is defective

Contact customer service

12 V power supply does not work in 230 V opera- tion

12 V power supply switched off

Switch 12 V power sup- ply on

Battery cut-off switch on the transformer/rectifier is switched off

Set battery cut-off switch to on

Charger module in the transformer/rectifier is defective

Contact customer service

230 V automatic circuit breaker has triggered

Contact customer service

Jumbo flat fuse (50 A) on the living area battery is defective

Replace jumbo flat fuse (50 A) on the living area battery

Fault Cause Remedy

225T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Troubleshooting 14

Starter battery is dis- charged in 12 V opera- tion

Disconnector relay in the transformer/rectifier is defective

Contact customer service

Battery cut-off switch on the transformer/rectifier is switched off

Set battery cut-off switch to on

No voltage is supplied by the living area battery

Living area battery is dis- charged

Charge living area bat- tery immediately

Total discharge damages the battery.

If the vehicle is to be laid up for a long period, fully charge the living area battery beforehand Discharging is caused by inactive appliances (see chapter 8)

12 V indicator lamp does not light up

12 V power supply switched off

Switch 12 V power sup- ply on

Battery cut-off switch on the transformer/rectifier is switched off

Set battery cut-off switch to on

Starter or living area bat- tery is not charged

Charge the starter or liv- ing area battery

Disconnector relay in the transformer/rectifier is defective

Contact customer service

Flat fuse (2 A) in the liv- ing area battery is defec- tive

Replace flat fuse (2 A) in the living area battery

Extractor hood does not work

230 V automatic circuit breaker is switched off

Switch on the 230 V au- tomatic circuit breaker

Fuse (15 A) at the trans- former/rectifier is defec- tive

Replace fuse (15 A)

Extractor hood defective Contact customer service

Fault Cause Remedy

226 T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Troubleshooting14

14.3 Fuel cell

14.4 Gas system

14.5 Heater/boiler In the event of a defect contact the nearest customer service workshop of the relevant appliance manufacturer. The list of addresses is enclosed with the accompanying appliance documentation. Only authorised qualified personnel may repair the appliance.

Do not open the fuel cell. The fuel cell contains no parts that could be repaired by itself. All faults are not displayed. If the faults cannot be rectified using the fol- lowing table or the instruction manual for the fuel cell, please contact the customer service.

Fault (display) Cause Remedy

Fuel cell cannot be switched on

No battery connected, battery connected incor- rectly or totally dis- charged

Inspect the connection

Fuse is defective Replace fuse; if it hap- pens again, contact the customer service

Failure: Environment too warm

Ambient temperature too high (40 C)

Fuel cell restarts when the ambient temperature is between 0 C and 40 C

In case of a defect of the gas system (gas odour, high gas consumption) there is danger of explosion! Close regulator tap on the gas bottle imme- diately. Open doors and windows and ventilate well. If the gas system is defective: Do not smoke; do not ignite any open flames, and do not operate electric switches (light switches etc.). Have the defective gas system repaired by an authorised specialist workshop.

Fault Cause Remedy

No gas Gas bottle is empty Change gas bottle

Gas isolator tap closed Open the gas isolator tap

Regulator tap on the gas bottle is closed

Open regulator tap on the gas bottle

External temperature is too low (-42 C for pro- pane gas, 0 C for bu- tane gas)

Wait for higher external temperatures

Built-in appliance is de- fective

Contact customer service

227T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Troubleshooting 14

14.5.1 Truma heater/boiler with analogue operating unit

Blink sequence In the event of an error, the LEDs flash as follows:

On/off 0.5 seconds Pause 5 seconds

Fault Cause Remedy

Heater does not ignite Temperature sensor on operating unit or remote sensor defective

Pull out plug on operating unit. The heater then works without thermostat. Contact the customer service as soon as possi- ble

Boiler empties, safety/ drainage valve has opened

Internal temperature be- low 8 C

Heat inside

Safety/drainage valve cannot be closed

Temperature at safety/ drainage valve below 8 C

Heat inside

Fan wheel runs noisily or not steadily

Fan wheel is soiled Contact Truma service department

Fault is displayed See flash sequence table See flash sequence table

Fault Cause Remedy

None of the LEDs comes on, device is switched on, operating voltage is connected

Automatic restart is blocked, e.g. following an interruption of the power supply

Reset the device (switch off, wait 5 seconds, switch on again)

After switching on (win- ter and summer opera- tion) none of the LEDs comes on

No operating voltage Check 12 V battery volt- age, load battery if nec- essary

Check all electrical plug connectors

Appliance fuse or vehi- cle fuse defective

Check appliance fuse or vehicle fuse and replace if necessary

After switching on, the green LED comes on but the heater does not work

The temperature set on the control unit is below room temperature

Set a higher temperature on the control unit

Green LED comes on, yellow LED flashes 1 x (heater still in operation)

Risk of undervoltage; battery voltage too low < 10.4 V

Charge the battery

Green LED comes on, yellow LED flashes 2 x (no further operation)

Undervoltage; battery voltage too low < 10.0 V

Charge battery or replace

Overvoltage > 16.4 V Check battery voltage and voltage sources (e.g. charging unit)

228 T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Troubleshooting14

14.5.2 Truma heater/boiler with CP plus digital operating unit

Green LED comes on, yellow LED flashes 4 x After extended operation, heater registers a fault

Summer operation with empty water container

Switch off the device and allow it to cool, fill boiler with water

Warm air louvres blocked Check outlet openings

Air circulation suction system blocked

Remove blocking of air circulation suction sys- tem

Green LED comes on, yellow LED flashes 5 x

Room temperature sen- sor or cable defective

Contact customer service

Green LED comes on, yellow LED flashes 7 x

Control unit or cable de- fective

Contact customer service

Green LED comes on, yellow LED flashes 8 x

Short circuit in heating el- ement for frost control

Remove plug of heating element on the electron- ic control unit, replace the heating element

Green LED comes on, yellow LED flashes 9 x approximately 30 seconds after the heater is switched on

Regulator tap or gas iso- lator tap is closed

Open regulator tap or gas isolator tap

Gas bottle is empty Change gas bottle

After extended operation, heater registers a fault

Gas pressure regulator iced up

Use regulator heater (de- froster)

Level of butane in the gas bottle too high

Use propane gas (espe- cially for temperatures below 10 C, butane is not suitable for heating)

Red LED flashes 1 to 8 times (device on)

Fault in the heater Contact customer service

Green LED flashes 5 x after the heater has been switched off

Overrun is active to re- duce temperature of ap- pliance

No error; overrun switch- es off after approximately 5 minutes

After the appliance is switched on, the green and red LEDs come on

Electronics defective Contact customer service

Fault Cause Remedy

Heater does not ignite Temperature sensor on operating unit or remote sensor defective

Pull out plug on operating unit. The heater then works without thermostat. Contact the customer service as soon as possi- ble

No display on the operat- ing unit

Fuse on the transformer/ rectifier is defective

Replace fuse on the transformer/rectifier

Fuse in the electronic control unit has been trig- gered

Contact customer service

Living area battery defec- tive

Charge or replace the liv- ing area battery (or have it charged or replaced)

Fault Cause Remedy

229T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Troubleshooting 14

Fault with error code is displayed

See table "Fault search instruction"

See table "Fault search instruction"

Boiler empties, safety/ drainage valve has opened

Internal temperature be- low 8 C

Heat inside

Safety/drainage valve cannot be closed

Temperature at safety/ drainage valve below 8 C

Heat inside

Fan wheel runs noisily or not steadily

Fan wheel is soiled Contact Truma service department

Error code Cause Rectification

Fault search instruction

# 17 Summer operation with empty water container

Switch off the device and allow it to cool down. Fill the boiler with water

Warm air louvres blocked Check outlet openings

Air circulation suction system blocked

Remove blocking of air circula- tion suction system

# 18 Gas pressure regulator iced up Use regulator heater (defroster if available)

Proportion of butane gas in gas bottle too high

Use propane gas (butane gas is unsuitable for heating especially for temperatures under 10 C)

# 21 Room temperature sensor or cable defective

Contact customer service

# 24 Risk of undervoltage Battery voltage too low < 10.4 V

Charge the battery

# 29 Short circuit in heating element for frost control

Remove plug of heating ele- ment on electronic control unit. Replace heating element

# 41 Electronics blocked Contact customer service

# 42 Safety switch has triggered (Not used here)

# 43 Overvoltage > 16.4 V Check battery voltage and volt- age sources (e.g. charging unit)

# 44 Undervoltage Battery voltage too low < 10.0 V

Charge battery. Replace outdat- ed battery if required

# 45 No 230 V power supply Check external mains connec- tion

230 V automatic circuit breaker has triggered

Switch on the 230 V automatic circuit breaker

Overheating protection has trig- gered

Reset overheating protection. Allow heater to cool, remove connection cover and press re- set button

#112, #202, #121, #211

Lack of gas Open regulator tap and gas iso- lator tap

Connect a full gas bottle

Fault Cause Remedy

230 T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Troubleshooting14

14.5.3 Alde heater/boiler

#122, #212 Combustion air inlet or exhaust gas outlet closed

Check openings for dirt (slush, ice, leaves etc.) and clean if necessary

#255 No connection between heater and operating unit

Contact customer service

Cable defective Contact customer service

If a fault occurs in the system, the cause is shown on the display.

Fault Cause Remedy

Heater does not ignite with gas operation

Lack of gas Open regulator tap and gas isolator tap

Connect a full gas bottle

Heater does not ignite Battery voltage too low Charge battery. If the battery voltage rises above 11 V, the heater is switched on automatical- ly

Heater does not ignite at 230 V electrical operation

No 230 V power supply Switch on the 230 V au- tomatic circuit breaker

Connect the 230 V power supply

Heater switches off Overheating Allow the heater to cool. To reset the display, in- terrupt the 12 V power supply to the heater and switch it back on again

Heater running, but no heat at the convectors

Circulating pump does not work

Switch on room thermo- stat

Contact customer service

Heater and circulating pump running, but no heat at the convectors

Air in the heating system Bleed hot-water heater

Error code Cause Rectification

231T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Troubleshooting 14

14.6 Air conditioning unit 14.6.1 Dometic

14.6.2 Telair

Fault Cause Remedy

Air conditioning unit does not start up

No 230 V power supply Connect the vehicle to the local power supply

230 V automatic circuit breaker has triggered

Switch on the 230 V au- tomatic circuit breaker

Remote control batteries empty

Change remote control batteries

Air conditioning unit does not cool

Temperature below 16 C

Temperature has been set incorrectly

Adjust the temperature

Thermostat defective Contact customer service

Air conditioning unit does not warm up

Temperature above 30 C

Temperature has been set incorrectly

Adjust the temperature

Thermostat defective Contact customer service

Water is entering the ve- hicle

Drainage holes for con- densation are clogged

Clean air conditioning unit

Seal is defective Contact customer service

No more air circulation Air filter clogged Clean air filter

Fan wheel defective Contact customer service

Fault Cause Remedy

Air conditioning unit does not start up

No 230 V power supply Connect 230 V power supply

230 V automatic circuit breaker has triggered

Switch on the 230 V au- tomatic circuit breaker

Remote control batteries empty

Change batteries (2 x AAA)

Air conditioning unit does not cool

Room temperature is lower than the preset temperature

Reset temperature

Air conditioning unit does not heat

Room temperature is higher than the preset temperature

Reset temperature

Insufficient ventilation rat- ing

Ventilation flaps closed Open at least one venti- lation flap

Filter dirty Clean the filter

Water is entering the ve- hicle

Drainage holes for con- densation are clogged

Clean air conditioning unit

232 T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Troubleshooting14

14.7 Cooker 14.7.1 Gas cooker/gas oven

14.7.2 Microwave oven

14.8 Refrigerator In the event of a defect contact the nearest customer service workshop of the relevant appliance manufacturer. The list of addresses is enclosed with the accompanying appliance documentation. Only authorised qualified personnel may repair the appliance.

Fault Cause Remedy

Ignition fuse does not op- erate (flame does not burn after the control knobs are released)

Heat-up time is too short Keep control knob pressed for approx. 15 to 20 seconds after ignition

Ignition fuse is defective Contact customer service

Flame extinguishes when being reduced to its mini- mum setting

Thermocouple sensor is incorrectly set

Correctly reset thermo- couple sensor (do not bend). The sensor tip should protrude by 5 mm beyond the burner. The sensor neck should not be more than 3 mm away from the burner ring; if necessary, contact cus- tomer service

Only qualified personnel may repair the microwave oven. Improper repairs can cause major risks to the user.

Fault Cause Remedy

Microwave oven does not cut in

Fuse is defective Replace fuse

Door of the microwave oven is not properly closed

Remove foreign bodies stuck in the door of the microwave oven and close door properly

233T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Troubleshooting 14

14.8.1 Dometic In the event of a fault, the "Fault" indicator lamp will always light up as well and an acoustic signal will sound for about 20 seconds.

Fault Cause Remedy

LED " " flashes No 230 V power supply Connect the 230 V power supply

230 V automatic circuit breaker has triggered

Switch on the 230 V au- tomatic circuit breaker

230 V operating voltage too low

Have the 230 V power supply checked by an au- thorised specialist work- shop

LED " " flashes Fuse on the transformer/ rectifier is defective

Replace fuse on the transformer/rectifier

Disconnector relay in the transformer/rectifier is defective

Contact customer service

12 V operating voltage too low

Have the 12 V power supply checked by an au- thorised specialist work- shop

No D+ signal Contact customer service

LED " " flashes 1)

1) After fixing the issue, press the illuminated button for "Fault"/"Reset".

Lack of gas Open regulator tap and gas isolator tap

Connect a full gas bottle

Cobwebs or burnt resi- due in the burning cham- ber

Remove the ventilation grill on the outside of the vehicle and clean the burning chamber

LEDs for display of the temperature range flash

Temperature sensor de- fective

Contact customer service

LED " " and LEDs for display of the tempera- ture range flash

230 V heater element de- fective

Contact customer service

LED " " and LEDs for display of the tempera- ture range flash

12 V heater element de- fective

Contact customer service

LED " " and LEDs for display of the tempera- ture range flash

Faulty burner or power unit

Contact customer service

Refrigerator does not re- frigerate sufficiently

Insufficient ventilation of unit

Check if ventilation grills are covered; remove cov- ers if necessary

Remove ventilation grills and clean the space be- hind them (of leaves etc.)

Ambient temperatures are too high

Remove the ventilation grills periodically

234 T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Troubleshooting14

14.8.2 Thetford For certain faults, indicators also flash on the operating panel.

Fault Cause Remedy

230 V operation faulty No 230 V power supply Connect 230 V power supply

230 V automatic circuit breaker has triggered

Switch on the 230 V au- tomatic circuit breaker

230 V operating voltage too low

Have the 230 V power supply checked by an au- thorised specialist work- shop

12 V operation faulty 12 V operation is only possible when engine is running

Start the engine or select a different operating mode

Fuse on the transformer/ rectifier is defective

Replace fuse on the transformer/rectifier

Disconnector relay in the transformer/rectifier is defective

Contact customer service

12 V operating voltage too low

Have the 12 V power supply checked by an au- thorised specialist work- shop

Gas operation faulty Lack of gas Open regulator tap and gas isolator tap

Connect a full gas bottle

Air in the gas pipe Start refrigerator between 2 and 3 times

Cobwebs or burnt resi- due in the burning cham- ber

Remove the ventilation grill on the outside of the vehicle and clean the burning chamber

Refrigerator does not re- frigerate sufficiently

Insufficient ventilation of unit

Check if ventilation grills are covered; remove cov- ers if necessary

Remove ventilation grills and clean the space be- hind them (of leaves etc.)

Ambient temperatures are too high

Remove the ventilation grills periodically

Refrigerator is at too much of an angle

Position the vehicle hori- zontally

Too much ice on the cooling fins

Defrost the refrigerator

235T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Troubleshooting 14

14.9 Water supply Fault Cause Remedy

Leakage water inside the vehicle

A leak has occurred Identify leak, re-connect water pipes

No water Water tank is empty Replenish drinking water

Drain cock not closed Close drain cock

12 V power supply switched off

Switch 12 V power sup- ply on

Fuse of the water pump is defective

Replace fuse on the transformer/rectifier

Water pump defective Exchange water pump (have it exchanged)

Water pipe snapped off Straighten water pipe or replace

Transformer/rectifier de- fective

Contact customer service

Water pump switched off on panel

Switch water pump on

Toilet has no flush water Water tank is empty Replenish drinking water

Fuse for toilet is defective Replace fuse

Display for water and waste water indicates a wrong value

Measuring probe in the waste water or water tank is soiled

Clean water/waste water tank

Measuring probe is de- fective

Replace measuring probe

Waste water tank cannot be emptied

Drain cock is clogged Open the cleaning cap on the waste water tank and drain the waste wa- ter. Rinse the waste wa- ter tank well

Drain on the single lever mixer tap is clogged

Perlator calcified Unclip the perlator, de- calcify in vinegar water (only for products made from metal)

Water jets on the shower nozzle clogged

Water jets calcified De-calcify shower nozzle in vinegar water (only for products made from met- al) or rub off soft nozzle burling

Water drains from the shower tray slowly or does not drain at all

The vehicle is not in a horizontal position

Position the vehicle hori- zontally

Milkiness of the water Tank filled with dirty wa- ter

Clean water tank me- chanically and chemical- ly; then disinfect and rinse copiously with drinking water

Residues in the water tank or water system

Clean water system me- chanically and chemical- ly; then disinfect and rinse copiously with drinking water

236 T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Troubleshooting14

14.10 Body

Any change in the taste or odour of the water

Tank filled with dirty wa- ter

Clean water system me- chanically and chemical- ly; then disinfect and rinse copiously with drinking water

Fuel filled into the water tank by mistake

Clean water system me- chanically and chemical- ly; then disinfect and rinse copiously with drinking water. If not suc- cessful: Contact a spe- cialist workshop

Microbiological deposits in the water system

Clean water system me- chanically and chemical- ly; then disinfect and rinse copiously with drinking water

Deposits in the water tank and/or water-carry- ing components

Water excessively long in the water tank and in wa- ter-carrying components

Clean water system me- chanically and chemical- ly; then disinfect and rinse copiously with drinking water

Fault Cause Remedy

Flap hinges/door hinges are difficult to operate

Flap/door hinges are not sufficiently lubricated

Lubricate flap hinges/ door hinges with acid- free and resin-free grease

Hinges/joints in the bath- room unit/toilet compart- ment are difficult to operate/make a grating noise

Hinges/joints are not suf- ficiently lubricated

Lubricate hinges/joints with solvent-free and acid-free grease

Spray cans often contain solvents

Storage compartment hinges are difficult to op- erate/make a grating noise

Storage compartment hinges are not sufficiently lubricated

Lubricate storage com- partment hinges with acid-free and resin-free grease

Wind-up skylight is diffi- cult to operate

Threaded spindle not lu- bricated

Lubricate threaded spin- dle

Threaded spindle defec- tive

Have threaded spindle replaced

The authorised dealers and service centres are available for any spare parts requirement.

Fault Cause Remedy

237T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Special equipment 15

15Special equipment15.1 Weight details for special equipment

Weight details for factory-provided special equipment are listed in the table below. If these objects are either carried in or on the vehicle and are not part of the standard equipment, they must be taken into consideration when calcu- lating the payload. All weight details are approximate. Observe the max. permissible gross weight.

The use of accessories, parts and fittings not supplied by us may cause damage to the vehicle and jeopardize road safety. Even if an expert's report, a general type approval or a design certification exists, there is no guarantee for the proper quality of the product. Every alteration of the original condition of the vehicle can alter road behaviour and jeopardize road safety. No liability can be assumed for damage caused by products which have not been released by us. This also applies to impermissible alterations to the vehicle.

Item designation Surplus weight (kg)

Waste water pipes insulated and heated 2

Waste water tank, heated with heating coils 1

Waste water tank and drainage isolated and heated 1

Airbag (front passenger) 3

Caravan coupling 40

Dashboard upgrade 2

Single-section conversion door with window and insect screen (Premium)

30

Single-section conversion door with window (XL) 5

Storage boxes for storage compartments, 2 pcs. 2

Load of 3850 kg 15

External shower 1

External mirrors, electric 2

External socket 1

Automatic transmission 17

Car radio and CD 1-2

Fuel cell 7

Heki skylight midi 8

Skyroof skylight 10

Skyroof skylight XL 12

Skyroof skylight Premium XL 13

Roof rail 5

Scatter cushions, 4 pcs. 2

Three-point seat belts in opposite direction to direction of travel (2 x)

30

Extractor hood 1

238 T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Special equipment15

Electric entrance step 5

Electrical stability program (ESP) 3

Spare wheel 15" with support 20

Spare wheel 16" with support 21

External gas connection 1

Bike rack for 2 bicycles 10

Bike rack for 2 bicycles, lowerable 18

Bike rack for 3 bicycles 11

Bike rack for 3 bicycles, lowerable 20

Bike racks for e-bikes 25

Roman shade, driver's cabin 4

Floor warming unit 4

Garage wall storage system for rear wall 8

Gas oven 17

Gas bottle (11 kg) made of aluminium 12

Gas alarm system 5

Holder for flat screen 3

Rear window 3

Rear garage door, left 3

Rear ladder 10

Alde heater 30

Truma Combi 6 EH heater 3

Insect screen, door (full height) 3-4

Air conditioning unit (Dometic) 30

Driver's cabin air conditioning unit 18

Air conditioning unit (Telair) 34

Fuel tank 120 l 50

Refrigerator (145 l) incl. oven 20

Refrigerator (160 l) 14

Refrigerator (Tec-Tower) 30

Wind-up skylight (Heki 3) 15

L-seating group 10

Light metal wheel rims -15

Alternator 180 Ah 2

Pneumatic spring 79

Pneumatic spring, rear 45

Awning 260 cm 27

Awning 300 cm 28

Awning 350 cm 33

Item designation Surplus weight (kg)

239T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Special equipment 15

Awning 400 cm 38

Microwave oven 14

Minisafe 12

Central seating group, convertible into bed 2

Motorcycle rack 38

Motorcycle rack in the rear garage 12

Pioneer multimedia system 4

Zenec navigation system 4

Navigation addition Avic 1

Fog light 4

Pilot seats, cushions covering as in living area 2

Radio preparation 4

Reversing camera 4

Satellite unit (Alden) + LCD television 1425

Satellite unit (Oyster) + LCD television 14

Swivel boxes in the rear garage 6

Seat, variable height 2

Solar installation 1 x 100 W 10

Solar installation 1 x 140 W 15

Solar installation 2 x 100 W 20

Independent vehicle heater 3

Storage compartment, larger (due to lowered rear) 12

Steadies, electrically operated 20

Rear steadies 5

Bedspread 2

Daytime running light 1

Telescopic ladder 10

Tempomat 3

Carpet in driver's cabin 2

Carpet in the living area 3

Switching facility, gas 2

Vario seat 15

Laundry bag for single beds 2

Winter insulation mat, outside 3

Auxiliary battery 27

Additional cushion (guest bed) 2

Auxiliary heat exchanger (heater) for body 3

Two cross beams and slip protection for roof racks 3

Item designation Surplus weight (kg)

240 T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Special equipment15

Engine variants The vehicle mass in a ready-to-drive state relates to the base vehicle. If a more powerful engine is fitted, the mass increases in a ready-to-drive state.

Equipment packages The equipment packages depend on the model. To calculate the additional weight, add the additional weights of the individual special equipment per package.

Engine variant Surplus weight (kg)

2.3 Mjet 15

3.0 Mjet 50

2.3 Mjet Maxi 55

3.0 Mjet Maxi 90

241T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Technical data 16

16Technical data16.1 View of ground plans Explanations (1) 230 V fuse

(2) Transformer/rectifier with 12 V fuses (3) Living area battery with main fuse (4) Water pump mounted in the tank area (5) Drain cock, waste water tank (6) Safety/drainage valve (7) Boiler/heater (8) Water drain cock - yellow (9) Water tank (10) Additional heater (partially special equipment) (11) Water drain cock - white * Access via service flap ** Beneath the vehicle *** Access via kitchen floor cupboard

Specifications without guarantee

Fig. 278 Ground plan T 569 Nexxo Time

Fig. 279 Ground plan IT 586 Ixeo Time

242 T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Technical data16

Fig. 280 Ground plan IT 590 Ixeo Time

Fig. 281 Ground plan T 590 G Travel Van

Fig. 282 Ground plan T 620 G Travel Van

Fig. 283 Ground plan T 660 Nexxo Time

243T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Technical data 16

Fig. 284 Ground plan T 660 Nexxo

Fig. 285 Ground plan IT 664 Ixeo

Fig. 286 Ground plan T 665 Nexxo Time

Fig. 287 Ground plan T 670 G Nexxo Time

244 T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Technical data16

Fig. 288 Ground plan T 685 Nexxo Time

Fig. 289 Ground plan T 685 Nexxo

Fig. 290 Ground plan T 690 G Nexxo

Fig. 291 Ground plan T 690 G Travel Van

245T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Technical data 16

Fig. 292 Ground plan T 690 G Nexxo Time

Fig. 293 Ground plan IT 700 Ixeo

Fig. 294 Ground plan IT 710 G Ixeo Time

Fig. 295 Ground plan T 720 Nexxo

246 T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Technical data16

Fig. 296 Ground plan IT 726 G Ixeo Time

Fig. 297 Ground plan T 728 G Nexxo

Fig. 298 Ground plan T 729 Nexxo

Fig. 299 Ground plan IT 734 Ixeo Time

247T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Technical data 16

Fig. 300 Ground plan IT 735 Ixeo

Fig. 301 Ground plan T 740 Nexxo

Fig. 302 Ground plan IT 745 Ixeo Time

Fig. 303 Ground plan T 745 Nexxo

248 T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Technical data16

16.2 Table of linear measures Type Body width,

exterior Total length without lad- der 1)

1) With ladder: + 70 mm

Wheelbase Overall height without anten- na

T 569 2300 5690 3450 2750

IT 586 2300 5990 3800 2750

IT 590 2300 5990 3800 2750

T 590 G 2180 5990 3450 2850

T 620 G 2180 6600 3450 2850

T 660 2300 6790 3800 2750

IT 664 2300 6740 3800 2750

T 665 2300 6690 3800 2750

T 670 G 2300 6850 3800 2750

T 685 2300 6990 3800 2750

T 690 2300 6990 3800 2750

T 690 G 2300 6990 3800 2750

IT 700 2300 7040 4035 2750

IT 710 G 2300 6990 4035 2750

T 720 2300 7390 4035 2750

IT 726 G 2300 7140 4035 2750

T 728 G 2300 7490 4300 2750

T 729 2300 7390 4035 2750

IT 734 2300 7390 4035 2750

IT 735 2300 7390 4035 2750

T 740 2300 7490 4300 2750

IT 745 2300 7490 4300 2750

T 745 2300 7490 4300 2750

249T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Technical data 16

16.3 Power supply Mains connection Protection class I 230 V ( 10 %),

47 - 63 Hz

Mains power rating 400 VA

Appropriate batteries 6-cell lead acid and lead acid gel batteries from 55 Ah

Charging characteristics IUoU

Final charge voltage 14.3 V

Charging current 18 A throughout entire sup- ply voltage range, electroni- cally restricted

18 A

Trickle charge voltage Automatic switching 13.8 V

Repeated charging cycle (switchover to "Main charg- ing")

At < approx. 13.8 V battery voltage (with approx. 5 seconds delay)

Reflux (without mains and with connected battery)

After approx. 3 minutes "Mains Off"

< 0.3 mA

Guard circuits Short-circuit protection pro- vided by built-in car fuse (FKS)

Safety fuse, 3.15 AT at power input

Overtemperature protection

Charging current distribu- tion at mains connection

Starter battery float charge with max. 2 A

max. 2 A

Living area battery charge with max. 18 A

max. 18 A

Charging current distribu- tion during the journey

Simultaneous charging of starter and living area bat- teries by means of the alter- nator

50 A

Parallel battery switching via disconnector relay

Maximum permitted alter- nator charging current to the living area battery: 50 A (see block diagram)

Battery monitor Disconnection 10.5 V 0.1 V

Battery monitor Minimum voltage for con- nection

11.0 V 0.1 V

250 T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Technical data16

251T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Helpful notes 17

17Helpful notesChapter overview This chapter contains helpful tips for the journey. The instructions address the following topics:

road assistance in European countries traffic rules in European countries gas supply in European countries toll regulations in European countries safe ways to spend the night during travel camping in winter

At the end of the chapter there is a checklist containing the most important equipment for the journey.

17.1 Traffic rules in foreign countries

Information about traffic regulations is especially important as state law applies in case of damage. For your own safety, always observe the following rules when travelling abroad:

Carry your insurance certificate with you. Always register accidents with the police. Never sign documents that you have not read and understood completely.

17.2 Help on Europe's roads

The vehicle driver is required to inform himself as to the traffic rules of the countries in which he plans to travel before beginning the trip. Contact your automobile club or embassy for further information. In some European countries, warning vests must be worn when exiting the vehicle outside of towns in the case of vehicle failures or accidents. Depending on the country, different rules and regulations apply (e.g. dif- ferent warning signs for rear carriers, obligation to carry breathalyzer kits, spare bulbs, high-visibility vests, size of reserve canister). The driver of the vehicle must familiarise him or herself with these rules before every journey. Up-to-date information can generally be found on the web pages of the national automobile associations.

Country Emergen- cy services

Police

Breakdown service

Belgium 112 112

TCB Brussels (02) 2 33 22 11 RACB Brussels (02) 2 87 09 11

Bosnia-Herzegovina 124 122

BI HAMK 33 21 27 72

Bulgaria 112 112

UAB (02) 9 35 79 35

UAB (02) 9 11 46/146 1)

Denmark 112 free of charge

112 free of charge

FDM 45 27 07 07

252 T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Helpful notes17

Germany 112 110

ADAC Munich (01 80) 2 22 22 22

ADAC 22 22 22 1)

Estonia 112 112

EAK 69 79 10 0

EESTI (0) 6 97 91 88/18 88 1)

Finland 112 112

ATCF Helsinki (09) 77 47 64 00

France 15/112 17

AIT-Assistance (08 00) 08 92 22

Greece 112 112

ELPA (021) 06 06 88 00

Great Britain 112 112

AA (0 87 05) 44 88 66

Ireland 112 112

AA Dublin (0) 16 17 99 99

Iceland 112 112

F.I.B 414 99 99

Italy 112 112

TC1 (0 02) 8 52 61 (0 06) 4 99 81

Croatia 112 112

HAK (01) 6 61 19 99

Latvia 112 112

LAMB (0 67) 56 62 22

Lithuania 112 112

LAS (0 52) 10 44 33

Luxembourg 112 112

ACL (04) 50 04 51

Macedonia 194 192

AMSM (02) 3 18 11 81

Montenegro 112 112

AMS CG (0 20) 23 49 99

Netherlands 112 112

ANWB (0 88) 2 69 71 47 KNAC (0 70) 3 83 16 12

Norway 113 112

NAF (092) 60 85 05 KNA (0 21) 60 49 00

Austria 112 112

AMTC (01) 71 19 90

Poland 112 112

PZM (0 22) 8 49 93 61

Portugal 112 112

ACP (02 13) 18 01 00

Country Emergen- cy services

Police

Breakdown service

253T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Helpful notes 17

Date 07/2014 Specifications without guarantee

Romania 112 112

ACR (0 21) 3 15 55 10

Russia 03 02

RAS (04 95) 6 29 07 07 ACAR (04 95) 9 25 50 00

Sweden 112 112

M Stockholm (08) 6 90 38 00

Switzerland 144 112

TCS (0 22) 4 17 27 27 ACS (0 31) 3 28 31 11

Serbia 112 112

AMSS (0 11) 3 33 11 00

Slovakia 112 112

SATC (02) 68 24 92 11

Slovenia 112 112

AMZS (01) 5 30 51 00

Spain 112 112

RACE 9 02 40 45 45

Czech Republic 112 112

UAMK (02 61) 10 41 11

Turkey 112 155

TTOK (02 12) 2 82 81 40

Ukraine 112 112

112 UA (0 32) 2 97 01 12

Hungary 112 112

MAK (01) 3 45 18 00

Cyprus 112 112

CAA (0 22) 31 32 33

1) In the mobile communication network

Country Emergen- cy services

Police

Breakdown service

254 T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Helpful notes17

17.3 Traffic rules for motorhomes For your information, the speed limits (in km/h), alcohol limits and daylight run- ning light requirements in the most-visited countries are the following:

Country Speed limit in km/h Alco- hol

limit

Day- time run- ning

lights com-

pulso- ry

In built- up ar-

eas

Out of town Motorway

Up to / over

3.5 t 1)

Up to 3.5 t

Over 3,5 t 1)

Up to 3.5 t

Over 3,5 t 1)

Belgium 50 90 90 120 90 0.5 No

Bosnia- Herze- govina

50 80 80 130 80 0.3 Yes

Bulgaria 50 90 70 130/ 140

100 0.5 Yes

Denmark 50 80 70 130 80 0.5 Yes

Germany 50 100 80 130 2) 100 0.5 No

Estonia 50 90 70 110 90 0.2 Yes

Finland 50 80/ 100 3)

80/ 100 3)

80/ 100 3)

80/ 100 3)

0.5 Yes

France 50 90 4) 80 130 4) 110 0.5 No

Greece 50 90- 110 5)

80 130 80 0.5 No

Great Britain

48 96 80 112 112 0.8 No

Ireland 50 60- 80 5)

60- 80 5)

120 80 0.5 No

Italy 50 90 80 130 6) 100 7) 0.5 8) Yes

Croatia 50 90 9) 90 9) 130 10) 90 0.5 11) Yes 12)

Latvia 50 13) 90 90 90 5) 90 5) 0.5 14) Yes

Lithuania 50 90 5)

15) 80 5) 110 90 0.4 14) Yes

Luxem- bourg

50 90 75 130 16) 90 0.5 14) No

Macedo- nia

50 5) 80 80 80 80 0.5 17) Yes

Montene- gro

50 80 80 100 18) 80 18) 0.3 Yes

Nether- lands

50 80- 100 18)

80 130 80 0.5 19) No

Norway 50 80- 100 18)

80 90- 110 5)

80 0.2 Yes

Austria 50 100 70 110- 130 5)

80 0.5 20) No

255T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Helpful notes 17

Poland 50 21) 90- 100 5)

18)

70- 80 5)

140 80 0.2 Yes

Portugal 50 90- 100 5)

70- 90 5)

120 110 0.5 22) No

Romania 50 80- 90 18)

23)

80- 90 18)

23)

120 23) 110 23) 0.0 Yes

Sweden - 5) - 5) - 5) - 5) - 5) 0.2 Yes

Switzer- land

50 80- 100 18)

80- 100 18)

120 100 0.5 Yes

Serbia 50 80 80 80 80 0.3 24) Yes

Slovakia 50 90 80 130 90 25) 0.0 Yes

Slovenia 50 90- 100 18)

80 100 80 0.5 26) Yes

Spain 50 80- 90 18)

80- 90 18)

100 27) 90 27) 0.5 28) No

Czech Republic

50 90- 130 18)

80 130 80 0.0 Yes

Turkey 50 80 80 90 90 0.0 No

Ukraine 60 13) 80 29) 80 29) 80 29) 80 29) 0.0 Yes 30)

Hungary 50 90- 110 18)

70 130 80 0.0 Out of town, on mo- tor- ways

Cyprus 50 65- 80 18)

68- 80 18)

100 100 0.5 No

1) Motorhomes up to 7.5 t gross weight 2) Recommended speed 3) Vehicles registered after 01/01/1995 and unladen weight up to 1875 kg,

motorhomes up to 3.5 t permissible gross weight with the following equipment: ABS brakes, driver's airbag, seat belts on every seat, approved by the manufac- turer for speed of 100 km/h.

4) In wet conditions in non-urban areas 80, on motorways 110 km/h 5) As signposted 6) When raining or snowing on dual carriageways 90 km/h, on motorways 110 km/h 7) On motorways with green signs 8) For drivers with less than 3 years driving experience the blood alcohol limit is 0.0. 9) For drivers younger than 25 years 80 km/h generally apply.

Country Speed limit in km/h Alco- hol

limit

Day- time run- ning

lights com-

pulso- ry

In built- up ar-

eas

Out of town Motorway

Up to / over

3.5 t 1)

Up to 3.5 t

Over 3,5 t 1)

Up to 3.5 t

Over 3,5 t 1)

256 T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Helpful notes17

Date 08/2014 Source: ADAC Specifications without guarantee

17.4 Sleeping in the vehicle away from camping areas

10) For drivers younger than 25 years 120 km/h generally apply. 11) For drivers younger than 25 years, drivers of vehicles over 3.5 t and professional

drivers a blood alcohol limit of 0.0 applies. 12) From the last Sunday in October to the last Sunday in March 13) 20 km/h in residential areas 14) For drivers holding their driving license less than 2 years, a blood alcohol limit of

0.2 applies. 15) On non-asphalt roads 70 km/h 16) 110 km/h when wet 17) For drivers holding their driving license less than 2 years, a blood alcohol limit of

0.0 applies. 18) On expressways 19) For drivers holding their driving license less than 5 years, a blood alcohol limit of

0.2 applies. 20) For drivers holding their driving license less than 2 years, a blood alcohol limit of

0.1 applies. 21) Between 11 p.m. and 5 a.m. 60 km/h 22) For drivers holding their driving license less than 3 years, a blood alcohol limit of

0.2 applies. 23) For drivers holding their driving license less than one year, maximum speeds

reduced by 20 km/h apply out of town, on expressways and motorways. 24) For drivers holding their driving license less than one year, a blood alcohol limit of

0.0 applies. 25) 80 km/h on urban motorways 26) For drivers holding their driving license less than 2 years or are younger than

21 years, a blood alcohol limit of 0.0 applies. 27) On roads resembling motorways. In some countries, special rules apply for newly

qualified drivers. 28) For drivers holding their driving license less than 2 years, a blood alcohol limit of

0.3 applies. 29) For drivers holding their driving license less than 2 years, a maximum speed of

70 km/h applies. 30) From October 1st to April 30th

Country Sleeping on roads and fields

Sleeping on privately owned lands

Comments

Yes No Yes No

Belgium X X On highway rest areas max. 24 hours permitted

Bulgaria X X

Denmark X X

Germany X X Staying overnight for one night to restore driving ability is per- mitted. There may be regional and local limitations

257T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Helpful notes 17

Finland X X Possible with the permission of the land owner

France (X) X Permission from the local au- thorities or the owner of the land is required. Parking and staying overnight on free areas is pro- hibited

Greece X X One-off overnight stays in des- ignated areas are permitted

Great Britain X X Regulated by local rules

Ireland X X Regulated by local rules

Italy X X Staying overnight for one night at car parks and service stations is allowed. Observe the local regulations. Parking and staying overnight on free areas is pro- hibited

Croatia X X

Luxembourg X X

Macedonia X X

Netherlands X X Overnight stays on streets and squares is allowed in some bor- oughs

Norway X X Officially prohibited on rest are- as and cultivated grounds. Driv- ing on dirt tracks prohibited; observe local regulations

Austria X X Staying overnight for one night to restore driving ability is per- mitted, but not in nature re- serves. Observe regional and local restrictions. Generally for- bidden in Tyrol

Poland X X Requires property owner's per- mission

Portugal X X Staying overnight for one night on motorway service stations and car parks under 10 hours are tolerated

Romania X X

Russia X X

Sweden X X Not on agriculture areas or in the vicinity of houses. Driving on rough terrain prohibited; ob- serve local regulations

Country Sleeping on roads and fields

Sleeping on privately owned lands

Comments

Yes No Yes No

258 T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Helpful notes17

Specifications without guarantee

17.5 Gas supply in European countries

General tips Always observe the following instructions:

Only go on vacation with completely filled gas bottles. Use all of the gas bottles' capacity. Take along adapter sets (available in camping supply stores) for filling gas bottles in foreign countries and for connecting the gas pressure regulator to foreign gas bottles. During the cold time of the year observe filling with propane gas component (butane does not gas below 0 C). Use blue bottles from the firm Campingaz (distributed world-wide). Only use gas bottles with safety valves. When bottles from other countries are used, check the gas bottle compart- ments to see if the gas bottles fit into them. Gas bottles from other countries do not always display the same size as your own gas bottles.

Switzerland X X One overnight stay at highway rest areas and in some cantons is tolerated

Serbia and Montenegro

X X

Slovakia X X Overnight stays on private land are only allowed if a toilet is present

Slovenia X X

Spain X X Some regional prohibitions ap- ply, especially on beaches

Czech Repub- lic

X X Overnight stays on private land are only allowed if a toilet is present

Turkey X X

Ukraine X X

Hungary X X Staying overnight on privately owned land is permitted only with police certification

Country Sleeping on roads and fields

Sleeping on privately owned lands

Comments

Yes No Yes No

In Europe, there are several different connection systems for gas bottles. It is not always possible to fill or exchange your gas bottles in a foreign country. Get information about the connection system in the country you are travelling to before embarking on your journey, e.g. at a motoring club or in the trade press.

259T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Helpful notes 17

17.6 Toll regulations in European countries Many European countries have introduced a mandatory toll system. The toll regulations and how they are collected vary greatly from country to country. Nevertheless, ignorance is no excuse. Penalties can be quite severe. As is the case with traffic regulations, the vehicle driver is required to be familiar with the toll formalities before starting out on a trip. For example, in Austria the vignette does not meet the toll requirements for vehicles that weigh more than 3.5 t. There, a so-called "Go-Box" must be obtained and charged. Contact your automobile club or the Internet for further information.

17.7 Tips on staying overnight safely during travel Prudent behaviour is the most important protective measure for insuring a safe night in the motorhome. The risk of thievery is reduced to a minimum when the following basic rules are observed:

Before commencing the journey, close and lock all windows, doors and skylights. During high season do not spend the night at highway rest stops or parking areas located along typical vacation routes. Several vehicles on one site at the same time do not necessarily decrease the chances of thievery occurring. Consult your own feelings about the parking site. Even if it is just for one night, go to a camping site. When parking on open space keep emergency routes clear. The way to the driver's seat should be clear. The ignition key should always be within reach. Only take with you those valuables which are absolutely necessary for the journey. If possible, store valuables in a small safe and not in the immediate vicinity of windows or doors. Always lock up the vehicle.

17.8 Tips for winter campers The following tips will help make your winter camping experience as agreeable as possible.

Reserve your parking place in good time. Good winter camping sites are often booked up early. Do not start your trip without winter tyres. Bring snow chains. Choose your parking place with care. Observe the ground beneath you. Snow and ice may melt. When the vehicle has been positioned, release the handbrake to prevent freezing. No snow walls should be allowed to cover the built-in forced ventilation. Keep the built-in forced ventilation free from snow and ice. Make sure the air circulation is good. Good air circulation prevents mois- ture from collecting and makes it easier to heat the living area. Cover the single-paned driver's cabin window with insulation mats to avoid thermal bridges.

Windscreens with solar filters can affect the functioning of automatic toll collection systems (e.g. Go-Box). This must be taken into account when acquiring the appropriate device (e.g. Split-Go-Box).

260 T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Helpful notes17

Follow the instructions in the section "Gas supply in European countries". Use a two-bottle system with automatic controller for the gas system, so that the supply does not run out during the night. Only operate the gas system using propane gas. Do not use the space behind the heater as a storage compartment. Never operate catalytic ovens or infra-red gas radiators in the interior of the vehicle, since they consume oxygen for burning. Lay the 230 V power cable in such a way that the cable cannot be frozen or be damaged (e.g. during snow removal). When it is snowing heavily, clear the roof of the vehicle of snow regularly. A few centimetres of powdery snow serves as insulation, but wet snow quickly becomes a heavy burden. Before embarking on the return journey, remove all the snow from the roof to avoid impeding vehicles behind you with a "snow flag".

17.9 Travel checklists The following checklists will help that nothing important is left at home although not everything on the checklists might be necessary.

Do not leave checking of documents (e.g. vehicle papers and information) as well as checking the condition of the vehicle until just before com- mencing the trip. Planning and checking documents well in advance will save unnecessary trouble.

Object Object Object

Kitchen area Wiping cloth Cleansing agent (detergent)

Salad servers

Mug Dishcloths Chopping board

Turnspit Set of knifes and forks for grilling

Bowls

Can opener Coffeepot Brush to wash the dishes

Egg-cup Corkscrew Cloth to wash the dishes

Ice cube tray Kitchen paper Matches

Lighter Spoons Cups

Bottle opener Knifes Plates

Air-tight storage boxes

Garbage bags Thermos jug

Breakfast plate Frying pans Pots

Forks Stirring spoons Glasses

Bathroom/sanitary items

Towels Toilet brush Toothbrush glass

Sanitary items Toilet paper

Living area Dustbin Insect lamp Rain clothes

Road atlas Insect repellent First aid kit

Bath towels Deck of cards Travel guides/park- ing guide

Bath shoes Broom Rucksack

261T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Helpful notes 17

Batteries Candles Sleeping bags

Bed sheets Dust pan Pencils and paper

Bed linen Coat-hangers Shoes

Laundry bag Clothes brush Shoe polish

Books Pillow Vacuum cleaner

Camping guide Map Flash light

Spare bulbs Medicine Pocket knife

Water bottle Music cassettes Table cloth

Binoculars Neck-supporting pillow

Clothes pins

Fire extinguisher Sewing kit Clothesline

Gas bottle Radio

Vehicle/tools Waste water con- tainer

Fabric tape Screwdriver

Adapter socket Watering can for drinking water

Current-measuring instrument

CEE adapter Cable reel Step

Wire V-belt Wheel chocks

Spare wheel Glue First-aid kit

Spare lamps Universal pliers Vehicle jack

Spare fuses Compressor Hazard warning tri- angle

Replacement wa- ter pump

Luster terminals Warning sign

Hammer Loops Warning vest(s)

Flat wrench Tube adapter Flashing hazard warning light

Gas filling adapter Hose clips

Gas tube Snow chains (win- ter)

Object Object Object

262 T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Helpful notes17

Outside Stay rope Camping table Lock

Bellows Luggage racks String

Camping chairs Grill Tent pegs/tighten- ing ropes

Documents List of addresses Registration book Identity card

Registration confir- mation(s)

Driving licence Passport

Allergy certificate Green insurance card

Writ of protection

Instruction manuals Vaccination certifi- cate

Vignette/toll card

Instruction leaflets for medicines

Credit card Visa

Object Object Object

263T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Inspection plan 18

18Inspection plan

Pos. Component Activity Interval

1 Auxiliary support Lubrication Annually

2 Joints, hinges Lubrication Annually

3 Refrigerator, heater, boiler, cook- er, lighting, flap and door closures, toilet, seat belts

Function check Annually

4 Windows, skylights Function check, water ingress test

Annually

5 Cushions, curtains, blinds Visual check Annually

6 Sealing strips, edges, rubber Check for damage Annually

7 Water supply Water ingress test Annually

8 Hot-air system Function check, clean fan wheel as neces- sary

Annually

9 Underbody protection, floor skirt at- tachment

Visual check Annually

10 Pull-down bed suspension Function check Annually

11 Electrical system Function check Annually

12 Gas system Official gas inspection Every two years

13 Connections between the chassis and body

Check Every two years

14 Underbody Visual check, repair underbody protection as necessary

Every two years

264 T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Inspection plan18

Delivery Pos. 1-11

Stamp of the Brstner dealer

Date Signature

1st year Pos. 1-11 2nd year Pos. 1-14

Stamp of the Brstner dealer Stamp of the Brstner dealer

Date Signature Date Signature

3rd year Pos. 1-11 4th year Pos. 1-14

Stamp of the Brstner dealer Stamp of the Brstner dealer

Date Signature Date Signature

5th year Pos. 1-11 6th year Pos. 1-14

Stamp of the Brstner dealer Stamp of the Brstner dealer

Date Signature Date Signature

7th year Pos. 1-11 8th year Pos. 1-14

Stamp of the Brstner dealer Stamp of the Brstner dealer

Date Signature Date Signature

265T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Index

12 V fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 For Thetford toilet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131, 132 Heater for waste water pipes . . . . . . . . . . 132 On the living area battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 On the relay box AD01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 On the starter battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 On the transformer/rectifier . . . . . . . . . . . . 131

12 V indicator lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 12 V main switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 12 V power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

Switching on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224

230 V connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48, 128 External flap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224

230 V fuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241

230 V fuse box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 230 V power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 230 V indicator lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122

A Accessories, fitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Additional equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Add-on parts see special equipment . . . . . . . . . 10 Add-on parts, securing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Adjustable head section, fixed bed . . . . . . . . . . 86 Air conditioning unit (Dometic)

Air current, adjusting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 Operating modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 Switching off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 Switching on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231

Air conditioning unit (Telair) Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 Filter, cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 Operating modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 Switching off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 Switching on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231 Ventilation grill, cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200

Air outlet nozzles, adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 Antenna alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48

Appliances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Warranty cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

Automatic power selection (AES) . . . . . . . . . . 172 Auxiliary heat exchanger

Switching off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 Switching on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152

Awning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

B Basic equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Battery alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 Battery cut-off switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 Battery monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 Battery see starter battery or living area battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114, 116 Battery selector switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 Battery voltage, displaying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 Bed extension, securing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Beds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 Before the journey . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Bike rack

Bicycles, loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Lowerable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Not lowerable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Travelling with a loaded bike rack . . . . . . . . 25

Bike/e-bike bike rack Driving with loaded bike rack . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

Blind, cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198 Blind, skylight with snap latch

Closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

Blind, window Closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

Boiler (Alde) Emptying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163 Safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163 Switching off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163 Switching on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230 Water, filling with . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163

Boiler (Truma) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158, 161 Emptying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160, 162 Operating modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158, 161 Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241 Safety/drainage valve . . . . . . . . . . . . 158, 162

Index

266 T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Summer operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 Switching off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 Switching on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227, 228 Water, filling with . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160, 162 Winter operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159

Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39, 223

Braking system, troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . 223 Breakdown services in Europe . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 Bulbs, changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209

Exterior lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 Interior lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211 Rear lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210 Recessed light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 Side lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210 Spotlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 Surface mounted light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 Types of external bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211

Bunk bed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Butane gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13, 104

C Cable reel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 Camping gas bottles, use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14, 105 Camping in winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259 Cap, drinking water filler neck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 Capacity of the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 Caravan coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30, 31 Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195

Air conditioning unit (Telair) . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 Blind . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198 Carpet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 Curtains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 Entrance step . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 External care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195 Extractor hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 Fuel cell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198 Furniture surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 Gas cooker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198 High-pressure cleaner, washing with . . . . . 195 Hot-water heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 In the winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201 Insect screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198 Interior care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 Leather covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 Net curtains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197

PVC-floor covering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .197 Roman shade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .198 Seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .198 Sink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .198 Synthetic parts, interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .197 Temporary lay-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .202 Underbody . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .196 Upholstery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .197 Washing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .196 Waste water tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .198 Water system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .198 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .196 Winter lay-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .203

Carpet, cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .197 Central locking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51

Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51 Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51 Unlocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51

Changing wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .217 Tightening torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .218

Charging condition, displaying Living area battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120 Starter battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120

Chassis number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .214 Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35, 202

Before the journey . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35 For the journey . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .260 Initial start-up after temporary lay-up . . . . .204 Road safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35 Temporary lay-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .202 Winter lay-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .203

Child restraint systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40 Children's beds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88, 90, 92 Circuit diagram

Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138 Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136

Circulating pump, setting the rotational speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149 Circulation fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141, 143 Cleaning

Waste water tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .198 Water pipes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .199 Water tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .198

Cleaning see care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .195 Closed circuit current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112 Condensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65

On the double acrylic glass pane . . . . . . . . .66 On the screwed connections in the floor . . . .65

Condensation water see condensation . . . . . . . .66

267T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Index

Connecting cable see 230 V power supply . . . 128 Connection diagram, panel (IT 96) . . . . . . . . . 137 Conventional load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Conversion door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51, 54

Roman shade, closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Roman shade, opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

Conversion door, inside Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52, 53, 54 Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52, 53, 54

Conversion door, outside Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52, 53, 54 Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52, 53, 54

Conversion to bed foundation (lift-off table) . . . 85 Conversion to bed foundation (suspension table) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 Converting seating group into bed . . . . . . . . . . 95 Cooker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164

Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232 Curtains, cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197

D Danger of suffocation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10, 65 Dimensions see table of linear measures . . . . 248 Dimensions, permissible . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254 Direction indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210 Displays

Battery voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 Waste water tank level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 Water tank level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122

Disposal Household waste . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Sewage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Waste water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

Dometic toilet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192 Flushing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192 Indicator lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192

Door lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52, 53, 54 Doors

Conversion door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52, 53, 54 Maintenance work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236

Doors, securing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Drain cock, waste water tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187

Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241 Drain cocks, position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163, 241 Drinking water filler neck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182

Closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183 Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182

Driver's seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Driving speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 Driving the motorhome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 During the journey . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

E Electrical system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

230 V connection, troubleshooting . . . . . . . 224 Entrance step, troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . 223 Explanation of terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 Lighting, troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223 Safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223

Entrance step . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 Electrically operated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Extending . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Indicator lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32, 33 Retracting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223

Environmental tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Exterior lighting

Bulbs, changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223

External care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195 External connection see 230 V connection . . . . 48 External flaps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

Flap lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55, 56, 57 External gas connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 External shower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 Emptying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

External socket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Extractor hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168

Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 Filter, cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200

F Fault current protection switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128

Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Filling level of the waste water tank, displaying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 Filling level of the water tank, displaying . . . . . 122 Filling the tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Fire

Behaviour in the event of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Extinguishing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

Index

268 T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Fire prevention . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Fire risks, avoidance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 FI-switch see fault current protection switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Fixed bed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85, 86

Closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Head section, lowering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Head section, raising . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

Fixed bed, electrically adjustable . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Emergency operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Extending . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Head section, adjusting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Retracting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87

Fixed table Table leg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Table top . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Table-top, moving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Table-top, moving in a crossways direction . . . . . . . . . 83 Table-top, moving in a lengthways direction . . . . . . . . . 83 Table-top, rotating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

Flap lock Closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56, 57, 58 Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56, 57, 58 Service flap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 Square . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 With recessed handle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56

Flat screen with holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 Positioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63, 64, 65 Storing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63, 64, 65

Floor warming unit, electrical Overload protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 Switching off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 Switching on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153

Forced ventilation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10, 65 Front passenger's seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Fuel cell

Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198 Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 Operating status, indication . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 Operating unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 Process medium, refilling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 Tank cartridge, replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226

Fuel filler neck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44 Furniture flaps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58

Closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59, 60 Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58, 59, 60

Furniture flaps, troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . .236 Furniture surfaces, cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .197 Fuse box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134 Fuses

12 V fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129 230 V fuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127, 134 For the Thetford toilet . . . . . . . . . . . . .131, 132 Heater for waste water pipes . . . . . . . . . . .132 On the living area battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130 On the relay box AD01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130 On the solar charge regulator . . . . . . . . . . .133 On the starter battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130 On the transformer/rectifier EBL 99 . . . . . .131

Fuses see 12 V fuses and 230 V fuse . . . . . . .129

G Gas bottle compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13, 104 Gas bottles

Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105 Safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14, 104

Gas connection, external . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106 Gas cooker

Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .198 Switching off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165, 166 Switching on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .232

Gas isolator taps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106 Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106, 139

Gas odour . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13, 103, 226 Gas oven . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166

Switching off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167 Switching on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .232

Gas supply in European countries . . . . . . . . . .258 Gas system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103

Defect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13, 103, 226 General instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12 Safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12, 103 Switching automatics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226

Gas tube, check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13, 104 General instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 Ground plans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .241

269T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Index

H Handbrake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45

Applying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Handling of tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 Headrests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Heat exchanger

Switching off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 Switching on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152

Heat exchanger (Alde) Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 Switching off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 Switching on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151

Heat exchangers, heater, replacement . . . . . . 139 Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

Air outlet nozzles, adjustment . . . . . . . . . . 140 Circulation fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141, 143 Heat exchangers, replacement . . . . . . . . . 139 Hot air distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 Initial start-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226

Heater for the waste water tank and waste water pipes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 Heater for waste water pipes, fuses . . . . . . . . 132 Heki skylight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

Closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 Insect screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 Roman shade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 Ventilation position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

Help on Europe's roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 High rate of gas consumption . . . . . . 13, 103, 226 High-pressure cleaner, washing with . . . . . . . 195 Hinged window

Blind . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 Closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67, 69 Continuous ventilation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68, 70 Insect screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71, 72 Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67, 69 Roman shade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72

Hot air distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 Hot-air heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143

Circulation fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141, 143 Operating modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 Operating unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241 Switching off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 Switching on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227, 228

Hot-water heater 230 V electrical operation, selecting . . . . . 148 Adjustment menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 Auxiliary circulating pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 Fluid level, checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 Gas and 230 V electrical operation, selecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 Gas operation, selecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 Heat distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 Heat exchanger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 Heater, switching off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 Heater, switching on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 Heating fluid, topping up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 Heating system, bleeding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 Maintenance work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 Operating modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 Operating unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 Rotational speed, circulating pump . . . . . . 149 Safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 Start screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 Tool menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230

I Independent vehicle heater

Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 Switching off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 Switching on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154

Indicator lamp, 12 V power supply . . . . . . . . . . 122 Indicator lamp, 230 V power supply . . . . . . . . . 122 Indicator lamp, entrance step . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Indicator lamp, toilet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191, 192 Information stickers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214 Inner door, troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236 Insect screen door

Closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

Insect screen Omni-Vent skylight Closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78

Insect screen, cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198 Insect screen, Heki skylight

Closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77

Insect screen, Skyroof skylight Closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

Index

270 T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Insect screen, windows Closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71, 72 Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71, 72

Insect screen, wind-up skylight Closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78

Inspection plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263 Inspection work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205 Inspections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205 Interior care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 Interior lighting

Bulbs, changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223

K Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

L Ladder, rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211

Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 Lay-up

Temporary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202 Winter lay-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203

Leakage water inside the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 235 Leather covers, cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 Lift-off table

Conversion to bed foundation . . . . . . . . . . . 85 Moving in a crossways direction . . . . . . . . . 84 Moving in a lengthways direction . . . . . . . . . 84 Table leg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 Table top . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 Table-top, moving upwards . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 Table-top, rotating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

Light switch Living area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 Recessed light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 Toilet compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

Lighting Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210 Lamps, cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210 Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223

Living area battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 Battery alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 Charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116

Maintenance work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206 Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .241 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .224, 225 Voltage, displaying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120

Load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21 Bike rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25 Bike/e-bike bike rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27 Rear garage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24 Rear storage space . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24 Roof rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23

Load rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28, 29 Load rack for roof loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23 Load see also payload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21 Lock

Conversion door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52, 53, 54 External flap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56, 57 Furniture flap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58

Low beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210

M Main beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .205 Maintenance work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .205

Air conditioning unit (Dometic) . . . . . . . . . .200 Air conditioning unit (Telair) . . . . . . . . . . . .200 Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206 Fuel cell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206 Hot-water heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207 Independent vehicle heater . . . . . . . . . . . .209 Living area battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206

Marker light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210 Mass in ready-to-drive condition . . . . . . . . . .19, 21 Maximum permissible gross weight . . . . . . .18, 21 Mechanical steady legs

Extending . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46, 47 Length, adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46, 47 Retracting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47

Microwave oven Switching off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168 Switching on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .232

Monitor, reversing camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38

N Net curtains, cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .197 No gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226 Nose weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30

271T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Index

O Off-load voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 Omni-Vent skylight

Aerating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 Boost function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 Fan, switching off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 Venting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

Operating modes Air conditioning unit (Dometic) . . . . . . . . . 155 Air conditioning unit (Telair) . . . . . . . . . . . 157 Boiler (Truma) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158, 161 Hot-air heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 Hot-water heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 Refrigerator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170, 172, 175

Operating unit, hot-air heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 Oven see gas cooker or gas oven . . . . . . 164, 166 Overloading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

P Panel (IT 96) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120

12 V indicator lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 12 V main switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 230 V indicator lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 Battery voltage, displaying . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 Connection diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 Filling level of the waste water tank, displaying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 Filling level of the water tank, displaying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 Switch for water pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122

Panel see also displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 Parking light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210 Payload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

Calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Example calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19, 21

Payload see also load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Permissible gross weight see maximum permissible gross weight . . . . . . 18 Permitted mass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Personal equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Pilot seat see driver's seat and front passenger's seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Pleated Roman shades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249 Propane gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13, 104 Pull-down bed, electrically operated . . . . . . 89, 92

Access ladder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91, 94 Emergency operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92, 94

Lifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91, 93 Lowering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91, 93 Making ready for operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 Overload protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91, 93 Retaining belts, tightening . . . . . . . . . . . 91, 94

Pull-down bed, manually operated . . . . . . . . . . . 88 Access ladder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 Lifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 Lowering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 Retaining belts, tightening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89

PVC-floor covering, cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197

R Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 Ramps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Rear axle load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Rear garage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Rear ladder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Rear storage space . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Recessed light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 Refrigerator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48, 169

12 V operation, switching off . . . . . . . . . . . 177 12 V operation, switching on . . . . . . . . . . . 177 12 V operation, switching on/off . . . . . . . . . 172 230 V operation, switching off . . . . . . . . . . 177 230 V operation, switching on . . . . . . . . . . 177 230 V operation, switching on/off . . . . . . . . 171 Change-over between energy sources . . . 173 Door lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178 Frame heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 Gas operation, switching off . . . . . . . . 171, 176 Gas operation, switching on . . . . . . . . 171, 176 Operating modes . . . . . . . . . . . . 170, 172, 175 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 Refrigerating temperature control . . . . . . . 174 Switching off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 Switching on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232 Ventilation grill, removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169

Refrigerator door Locking in the ventilation position . . . 179, 180 Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179, 180

Refrigerator door locking mechanism Closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178 Locking in the ventilation position . . . . . . . 179 Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178

Refrigerator ventilation grill, removal . . . . . . . . 169 Registration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Remote control, central locking system . . . . . . . 51

Index

272 T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Replacing the fuel cell tank cartridge . . . . . . . . 206 Reversing camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 Risk of frost damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15, 181, 185 Road safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Notes for . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

Roman shade, cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198 Roman shade, driver's window

Closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

Roman shade, front passenger's window Closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

Roman shade, Heki skylight Closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77

Roman shade, Skyroof skylight Closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

Roman shade, window of conversion door Closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

Roman shade, windows Closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72

Roman shade, windscreen Closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

Roman shade, wind-up skylight Closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77

Roman shades, Remis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Roof load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Roof rack, load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Roof rail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Roof, climbing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

S Safety cut-out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

Changing wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 Cooker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164 Electrical system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Fire prevention . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Gas bottles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 Gas system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12, 103 Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 Road safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Water system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

Safety knob, hinged window . . . . . . . . . 67, 69, 79 Safety net, pull-down bed . . . . . . . . . . . 89, 91, 94 Safety switch (FI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134 Safety/drainage valve boiler . . . . . . . . . . .158, 162

Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159, 162, 241 Sanitary fittings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .181 SAT socket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135 Satellite mouse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49 Satellite unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48, 49

Satellite mouse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49 With automatic antenna alignment . . . . .48, 49

Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39 Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .198 Fastening correctly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40

Seat heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41 Seating arrangement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43 Selector switch for radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114 Serial number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .214 Setting up the bed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95 Sewage tank

Emptying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .193 Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .193 Retaining clip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .193

Shade Omni-Vent skylight Closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78 Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78

Shower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .189 Shower connection point, external shower . . . .101 Side marker light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210 Sink, cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .198 Skylight Omni-Vent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78

Closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78 Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78

Skylight with snap latch Blind . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75 Closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75 Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75

Skylights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .236

Skyroof skylight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79 Closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80 Continuous ventilation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80 Insect screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81 Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79 Roman shade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81

Snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34 Sockets

External socket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134 SAT socket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135

273T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Index

TV socket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 USB socket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

Solar charge regulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 Solar installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 Spare parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 Spare wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221 Spare wheel support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221 Special equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237

Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Marking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Weight details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237

Speed limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254 Spotlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62, 212

Removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 Turning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62

Starter battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 Charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 Discharging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224 Voltage, displaying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120

Start-up After temporary lay-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204 After winter lay-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204

Staying overnight Away from camping areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256 During travel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259

Steady legs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46, 47 Extending . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46, 47 Length, adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46, 47 Retracting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

Stopcock, heating circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 Supports see steady legs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46, 47 Surface mounted light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 Suspension table

Conversion to bed foundation . . . . . . . . . . . 84 Extending . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Reducing size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 Table leg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Table top . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

Switching automatics, gas system . . . . . . . . . 107 Symbols

For instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Gas isolator taps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106, 139

Synthetic parts in the toilet and living areas, cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197

T Table of linear measures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Tank lid see fuel filler neck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Technical data

Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 Power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249

Television . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Thetford toilet

Flushing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192 Indicator lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192

Tightening torque, wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218 Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 Toilet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189

Flushing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191 Fuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131, 132 Indicator lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191 Preparing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235

Toilet compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 Light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 Ventilation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189

Toilet see Thetford toilet or Dometic toilet . . . . 189 Toll regulations in European countries . . . . . . . 259 Total discharge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

General instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

Traffic rules in foreign countries . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 Transformer/rectifier (EBL 99) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117

Circuit diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118

Transformer/rectifier, position . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241 Travel checklists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260 Travel cots suitable for children . . . . . . . 88, 90, 92 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223

12 V power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224 230 V connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224 Air conditioning unit (Dometic) . . . . . . . . . . 231 Air conditioning unit (Telair) . . . . . . . . . . . . 231 Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224 Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236 Boiler (Alde) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230 Boiler (Truma) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227, 228 Braking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223 Cooker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232 Electrical system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223 Entrance step . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223

Index

274 T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Extractor hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225 Fuel cell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 Furniture flaps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236 Gas cooker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232 Gas oven . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232 Gas system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 Hot-air heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227, 228 Hot-water heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230 Inner door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236 Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223 Living area battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224 Microwave oven . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232 Refrigerator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232 Starter battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224 Toilet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 Water supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235

TV socket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 Tyre change see changing wheels . . . . . . . . . . 217 Tyre specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 Tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215

Excessive wear . . . . . . . . . . .11, 35, 215, 221 General instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215 Handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 Load-carrying capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218 Tyre pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221 Tyre selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216

U Underbody, maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196 Unladen weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Upholstery, cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 USB socket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

V Vehicle identification plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214 Vehicle lighting see exterior lighting . . . . . . . . . 209 Vehicle, washing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196 Ventilation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

Toilet compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 Volume of waste water, displaying . . . . . . . . . . 122 Volume of water, displaying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122

W Wardrobe light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 Warning stickers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214 Warranty cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

Washing with a high-pressure cleaner . . . . . . .195 Waste gas vent on the right hand side of the vehicle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140, 158 Waste water hose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .187 Waste water tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .186

Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .198 Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .198 Cleaning opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .187 Emptying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .187 Filling level, displaying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122 Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .187 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .235

Water pipes, cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .199 Water pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .181, 183

Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .241 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122

Water supply General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .181 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .235

Water system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182 Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .198 Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .198 Disinfect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .199 Drinking water filler neck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182 Emptying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .185 Filling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .183 Safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15

Water tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182 Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .198 Filling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .184 Filling level, displaying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122 Overflow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .184 Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .241 Water, draining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .185 Water, filling with . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .184

Weight details for special equipment . . . . . . . .237 Wheel chocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45 Wheel rim size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .218 Wheel rim type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .215 Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .215 Window, conversion door

Roman shade, closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55 Roman shade, opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55

Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66 Blind . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71 Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .196 Insect screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71, 72 Roman shade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72 Shade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72

275T-Modell - 14/15 - Ausgabe 08/14 - 2476518 - BUE-0029-15EN

Index

Wind-up skylight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 Closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 Insect screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 Roman shade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77

Winter care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201 Winter operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .